JP2022111291A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in fun of a game.

SOLUTION: When game balls entering a ball receiving hole 3405a of a stored ball performance unit 3400 in a specific game state are stored by a ball storage plate 3490 of the stored ball performance unit 3400, the stored game balls are discharged toward a discharge port 3515 of the stored ball performance unit 3400 by a ball discharge plate 3505 of the stored ball performance unit 3400, so that new fun can be granted for permitting attention not only to ball entry into a first major winning hole and a second major winning hole during a specific game state, but also to ball entry into the ball receiving hole 3405a of the stored ball performance unit 3400 and the discharge port 3515 of the stored ball performance unit 3400.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 108

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, characters, etc., and an effect control board on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted. (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116667 (Fig. 2)

However, there is a risk that the enjoyment of the game will be lowered if the same effect as that of the conventional pachinko machine is performed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest in gaming.

Effective solutions for achieving the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation etc. will be explained as necessary. Also, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like are shown as appropriate in the embodiments of the invention, but they are not limited in any way.

The present invention
In a game machine that performs a pattern variation game in which a lottery is performed based on the game ball launched into the game area entering a start hole in the game area, and the symbols are variably displayed based on the result of the lottery,
a winning game executing means for executing a predetermined winning game when a winning result is derived as a result of the symbol variation game;
A production control means for controlling the production during the winning game,
During the winning game, a unit game for opening and closing a predetermined large winning opening is performed a plurality of times,
The one unit game is set to end when N game balls enter the big winning hole,
The production control means is
an over winning effect execution means for executing an over winning effect when an over winning occurs in which N+1 game balls enter the big winning hole in one unit game;
a total display means for displaying on a predetermined effect display device the total number of prize balls generated as the game balls enter the big prize opening during the winning game;
Even if the over-winning occurs in one of the unit games, the execution of the over-winning effect is not started under a predetermined situation,
Even if the over-winning occurs in one of the unit games and the execution of the over-winning effect is not started, the prize balls generated along with the over-winning are reflected in the total display means,
moreover,
Even after the execution of the performance at the time of over winning occurs in one of the unit games and the performance at the time of over winning is started, the performance at the time of over winning is terminated in the middle under a specific situation. characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in amusement in a game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame and an outer frame and viewed from behind. FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front; (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a plate base unit in the plate unit; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the top view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit in a dish unit from the forward-backward direction of the production|presentation operation part button unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front right. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front left. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit, and was seen from the front lower side. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation portion of the pressing operation portion. is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in . It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a dispensing unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate on the game board. It is a front view of the center accessory and the display effect unit in the front unit of the game board. It is a side cross-sectional view of the display effect unit cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right along with the center accessory. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between LED in a display effect unit, and the reflective recessed part of a front light-guide plate. It is a front view which shows the light emission aspect of a surface light-guide plate. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the stored ball production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the storage ball production|presentation unit. It is various cross-sectional views of the stored ball effect unit. It is operation explanatory drawing of a stored ball production|presentation unit. It is a figure explaining a sphere course. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front light guide plate of the display effect unit is illuminated; It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower front central decorative body in the lower movable effect unit is illuminated. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the lower center elevating base is lifted in the lower movable production unit and the lower front center decoration and the lower rear center decoration are illuminated. Lower center elevating base, lower left side elevating base, and lower right side elevating base are lifted in the lower movable production unit to light up the lower front center decoration, lower rear center decoration, lower left side decoration, and lower right side decoration. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where it has been opened. FIG. 114 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state of FIG. 113 and the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; The four rotary decorations, the left side rotary decoration, the left subside rotary decoration, the right side rotary decoration, and the right subside rotary decoration are unfolded in the lower movable production unit to schematically show the decoration of each surface. It is an explanatory diagram. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the kind (size) of the arrow light-emitting-displayed in a lower movable production|presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the drive mechanism of an upper back movable production|presentation unit from a front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the clutch mechanism of an upper back movable production|presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the upper front movable decoration of an upper front movable production|presentation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit; It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. (a) is a flow chart showing the procedure of main processing executed by the main control MPU, and (b) is a flow chart showing the procedure of interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about special design process processing performed by main control MPU. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of first starting opening passage processing executed by a main control MPU; 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of pre-determination processing executed by a main control MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a hit determination process executed by a main control MPU; (A) is a win determination table used for lottery processing for winning, (B) is a big win symbol determination table used for lottery processing for types of big wins, and (C) is types of small wins. It is a small winning symbol determination table used in the lottery process for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process performed by main-control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop process performed by main-control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small-hit control process performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate passage processing executed by a main control MPU; It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a normal pattern hit determination table used in the lottery process for a normal pattern hit, and (B) is a normal pattern hit time open pattern table used for determination processing about the open pattern at the time of a normal pattern hit. be. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol variation pattern determination processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the normal electric accessary product opening process executed by the main control MPU. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sub-main processing executed by a peripheral control IC; 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of 16 ms steady-state processing executed by a peripheral control IC; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production|presentation control processing performed by peripheral control IC. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the storage ball production|presentation unit activation control process performed by peripheral control IC. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of stored ball count control processing executed by a peripheral control IC; It is a flow chart which shows an example of storage ball discharge effect execution start control processing executed by peripheral control IC. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stored ball production|presentation unit malfunction determination control process performed by peripheral control IC. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the storage ball production|presentation unit activation stop control process performed by peripheral control IC. (A) is a holding notice determination table used to determine the hold notice pattern of hold 1:00; (B) is a hold notice determination table used to determine the hold notice pattern of hold 2:00; ) is a hold notice determination table used to determine the hold notice pattern for the 3 o'clock hold. (D) is a hold notice determination table used to determine the hold notice pattern of 4:00. It is a pending change effect determination table used for determining a pending change effect pattern. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display device when executing the pending movement change effect as the pending change effect. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display device at the time of execution of the holding change effect as the holding change effect. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display device at the time of execution of the billiards pending change effect as the pending change effect. (A) is an over winning effect determination table for the number of over winning occurrences = 1, 3, 5, 7, and (B) is an over winning effect determination table for the number of over winning occurrences = 2, (C) is an over winning effect determination table at the time of over winning occurrences = 4 o'clock, (D) is an over winning effect determination table at the time of over winning occurrences = 6 o'clock, (E) This is an effect determination table at the time of over winning when the number of winning occurrences is 8 or later. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display device at the time of execution of the jackpot game. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stored-ball effect by the stored-ball effect unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the light emission display of a light-guide plate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the light emission display of a light-guide plate. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine; FIG.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, main frame and outer frame 1 is an exploded perspective view viewed from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B (see FIG. 90) are driven by.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operating section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player can operate the performance operating section 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 for putting out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640 and a locking unit 650 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a board arranged behind the game panel 1100. A peripheral control unit 1500 configured as a box, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100. , and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game ball B, and a predetermined privilege ( For example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) general winning openings 2001a to 2001d, first starting opening 2002, gate section 2003, second starting opening 2004, first big winning opening 2005 and second big winning opening 2006 and has. The obstacle nail is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The general winning openings 2001 a to 2001 d, the first starting opening 2002 , the gate section 2003 , the second starting opening 2004 , the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 by the player. As a result, the game ball B enters the general winning openings 2001a to 2001d, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. Additionally, the player can be entertained with the driving operation of the handle 182 to be received or passed.

In addition, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, the display effect unit 2600, and the lower movable effect according to the game state changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. The unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like can be used to perform movable effects and light emitting effects to entertain the players.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and rightward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-like abutting portion 13d that extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recess portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10 .

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-like contact portion 23d that extends short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The upper hooking member 24 extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 to be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending to the left and right, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the placement portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 communicates the inner space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain board and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 with two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich bass sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the form of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a door frame left side unit 400 attached to the tray unit, a door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, and mounted near the right end on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the rear side. a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the door frame main relay board 104; The door frame relay board cover 107 covers the rear handle relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handle rear relay board 106 is covered from the rear side. It has a post-handle relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is ejected into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game to hit into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting a handle unit 180, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 above the handle rear relay board 106. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the bottom corner of the front surface, a plate unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front surface of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1-1. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101 a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery thereof, and is close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101 . It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. In this manner, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole with the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted is recessed near the right end in the front view from the front to the front and the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 101e for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper tray ball passage opening 101g) when viewed from the front and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is positioned in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is positioned behind. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed so as to match the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The handlebar mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion 102a. a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c projecting into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a; , and reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle mounting member 102 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with a screw while the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The cylindrical portion 102 a has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 . One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed in the handle base 181 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 102, the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1-3. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is positioned in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the player can be guided forward (to the player side) of the pachinko machine 1 in a favorable manner.

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, door frame sub relay board 105, and rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 83). and FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410 side. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the body frame 4, The remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board (inverted L-shaped portion extending up and down) can be covered. cover the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical separation therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The cut-out portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper tray ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

[3-1-7. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 . The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a locking spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1-8. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 rotatably with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. can be done.

[3-1-9. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650, which will be described later, to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing and locking with. The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 22, etc.).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 34(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tamper-proof member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 can be supplied. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540, and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. As a result, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding working rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball-feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball-feeding solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is disposed on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the shaft portion 147b extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35(b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 125) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

Then, when the player presses downward the upper tray ball removal button of the tray unit, the upper tray ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission section, and the operation rod 143c moves downward along with the movement of the operation transmission section. will also move relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to form a partition. is released. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, and it is possible to prevent the ball extraction member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B can be inserted into the partition Rebounding at 143a can be prevented.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this tampering prevention member 148, an illicit game ball B to which a string is attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illicit game ball B. The force of the illegal game ball B shot (hit ball) by the ball launching device 540 when a fraudulent act is performed such as operating the string to put the illegal game ball B into or out of the first start opening or the like. By inserting the string attached to the illegal game ball B between the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b, the V shape formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b It can be cut by the narrowed part of the string, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1-11. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. FIG. 36(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 36(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 has a penetrating ball passage 150a that penetrates front to back at the upper left corner in a front view, and communicates the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 with the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit; A full-tank ball receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a in front view and can communicate with the full-tank guideway of the lower full-tank ball path unit of the body frame 4 is provided. .

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and despite being shot by the ball launching device of the body frame 4, it did not reach the game area 5a. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B received in a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c opened forward near the lower right corner in a front view. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and the movable piece 153 and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and they can be urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with a projecting portion 163 b of a glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the two upper corners among the four corners of the door window 101 a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101 .

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by performing the above-described procedure in reverse order. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-shaped body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle 182 covering the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 and a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183 .

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and the handle 182 is attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. A base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handlebar mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are positioned in the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes non-rotatable relative to the handle attachment member 102 .

The handle 182 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d projecting outwardly away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape from the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center from the slit 182e. and a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a protrudes outward from the portion protruding most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (gouged out) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second projection 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first projection 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 85 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. protrudes slightly lower. The second projection 182b protrudes so that the clockwise side surface in the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the counterclockwise side surface, which is the opposite side, curves inward. and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first projection 182a.

The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. Both side surfaces of the third projection 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the clockwise side surface is inclined more gently than the opposite counterclockwise side surface. The portion of the fourth projection 182d that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the third projection 182c that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. It also protrudes slightly higher. Both sides of the fourth projection 182d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and is translucent. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The steering wheel cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 .

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. As shown in FIG. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in a plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without any sense of incongruity.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.例文帳に追加

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the player and detects the static electricity acting on the player's handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a manner different from the original to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Also, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single shot button 193. Firing solenoid 542 is de-energized. As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the single-shot button 193 can be operated before the operation. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 can be rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth projection 182d is the first projection 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the player can comfortably maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position by switching the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. To reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into the main members and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . A mounting base 213 that is attached to and protrudes forward, a plate unit relay board 214 that is attached to the right of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 that is attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, It has an upper tray before ball removal unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper tray after ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray before ball removal unit 230. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate upper right decoration unit 275 and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 are provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotary operation unit 302 rotatable by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by the player. The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular performance operation ring 330 having a rotation operation portion 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation portion 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 that lights up the effect operation ring 330, the decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation part base 320. an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330; and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320. and have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper tray 201 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower tray 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper tray 201. - 特許庁

[3-5-1. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper tray 201 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper tray 201 is positioned below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211, and the game balls touch the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port 211e. It inclines so that it may become low toward the position of a little lower side than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5-2. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the horizontal center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in front view. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be ejected through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. A lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit, and FIG. 44 is a rear perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached on the front surface.

The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the upper plate main body 212 on the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and protruding forward, and a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. and a plate unit relay board 214 .

The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray ball removal front unit 230. - 特許庁

[3-5-3a. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. an upper tray ball feeding port 211e extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper tray main body 212. - 特許庁

The plate unit base 211 has a mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, which projects forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and an upper plate portion 211f on the left side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which an operation transmission part 242b of an upper tray ball removal slider 242 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is inserted is passed through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction, and a front-view lower right corner penetrates the plate body in the front-rear direction. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion opening 211h that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. and a mouth 211i.

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opened in the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end through which the upper tray balls of the door frame base 101 pass. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed port 211e, the entrance port 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feed unit 140, and the upper tray ball feed port 211e. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after tray ball removal, and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding opening 211e is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the game balls in the upper tray 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in the shape of a shallow box with an open top. The mounting base 213 has an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the right corner of the rear end.

The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is through which the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball removal front unit 230 is inserted. A wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5-3d. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate upper right decorative board 278, the plate lower left decorative board 283, and the plate lower right decorative board 288. , and the operation unit relay board 392 . The plate unit relay board 214 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the attachment base 213 . This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed, and the ball lending machine This is for returning the cash or prepaid card put into the machine after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B. - 特許庁

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper tray ball ejection button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper tray ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the withdrawal button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental operation. A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged on the lower rear portion of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. The remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed on the ball lending display section. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit before upper tray ball removal and unit after upper tray ball removal]
The unit 230 before ball removal and the unit 240 after ball removal of the upper plate in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper tray ball before unit 230 and the upper tray after ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 . The upper bowl post-ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion behind the upper bowl ball removal pre-unit 230 on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 .

The upper tray ball removal front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 attached to the front surface of the tray unit base 211 and extending vertically, and a front base 231 inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be vertically movable. and a slider 232 . The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 near the front of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222, and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240. It abuts on the top surface.

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. an upper tray ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the top, a spring 243 urging the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241, It has

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball receiving opening 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving opening 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b for guiding the accepted game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guiding it backward, and a game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. A ball extraction guideway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port 241a is installed in the plate base unit 210 and extends forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an open position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an operation receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface, which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a, projecting rearward. and an operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving section 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion opening 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the . When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extracting slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243 .

In the upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 and the upper bowl ball extraction unit 240, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward. The front slider 232 in contact with the upper surface of the actuation receiving portion 242a positions the upper tray ball eject button 222 upward at the end of movement. In addition, since the urging force of the spring 243 positions the upper tray ball removal slider 242 at the upper moving end, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are separated from each other in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is fed from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening 241a. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is operated. The actuating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partition portion 143a. retreats from between the entry port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b from the upper tray 201 is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b that opens below the entry port 141a. It will be done. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is moved through the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission part 242b, and the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before the upper tray ball is removed and the unit 240 after the upper tray ball is removed. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5-4. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit, and FIG. 48 is a rear perspective view of the dish decoration unit. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. An upper left decorative unit 270 and a right upper plate decorative unit 275, and a lower left plate decorative unit 280 and a lower right plate decorative unit attached below the upper left plate decorative unit 270 and upper right plate decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and .

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and has a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . In addition, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body is located below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211 when assembled with the tray unit 200. 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the plate unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. has a lower front decorative portion 252b protruding forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box-like shape with an open rear, and are provided on the front surfaces of the left and right plate decoration units 270, 280, 275, and 275, respectively. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b at the right end of the lower surface. In addition, the right upper side swelling portion 252a is connected at its lower end to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

The plate unit main body 252 includes a front cutout portion 252e cut upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. and a bottom cutout portion 252f that is cut at a portion below the . A lower tray ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates the bottom right corner of the front decoration part 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylindrical part 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are central in the left-right direction. A production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is positioned. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5-4c. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower pan ball extractor unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower pan main body 251 and includes a flat plate-like lower pan ball extractor base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower pan ball extractor base 261 . A slider 262 attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower dish ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward, A lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower tray ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom notch 252f of the tray unit main body 252, and is vertically aligned with the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (lower tray main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 has a projecting pin projecting upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower tray ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower tray ball removal base 261 so as to be rotatable about a vertically extending axis at a position to the left of the slider 262 on the left end side, and is attached to the slider 262 on the right end side. , and the right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower disk ball removal lid 265 is formed with a laterally extending slit into which the projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower tray ball removal base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower tray ball release button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the tray unit main body 252. As shown in FIG. In the normal state, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole. and closes the through hole (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加In addition, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower tray ball release button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is pushed backward to move backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower tray ball ejection button 263. becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower disk ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower disk ball removal cover 265 moves rearward on the right side with the left side as the center. It rotates in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 positioned directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, thereby opening the through hole and opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower tray ball eject button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower tray ball eject button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264 . As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game ball B in the lower tray 202 is continuously released. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pushed backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. be. Then, when the pressure on the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower tray ball ejection button 263 returns to the state in which it is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is positioned directly above the through hole, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265 . Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5-4e. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 300 on the upper part of the plate unit 200 .

The upper left dish decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical upper left dish decoration body 271 extending in the left and right direction and having translucency, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration body 271, A plate upper left decorative substrate 273 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is provided.

The upper left decorative body 271 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper left ornamental body 271 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The upper left plate reflector 272 is inserted into the upper left plate decoration body 271 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top left decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the top left decoration body 271 can be decorated with light.

The left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 includes a plate upper right decorative body 276 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decorative body 276, A plate upper right decorative substrate 278 is attached to the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper right ornamental body 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. This plate upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The plate top right reflector 277 is inserted into the plate top right decoration 276 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate top right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decoration body 276 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4f. Plate lower left decorative unit and plate lower right decorative unit]
The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. be done. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a lower left plate decoration body 281 which is semicylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a lower left plate reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281, A lower left plate decorative substrate 283 is attached to the rear side of the lower left plate reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape centered rearward in a plan view. is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left plate decoration 281 is a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The lower left ornamental body 281 of the plate has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. This plate lower left decorative body 281 is formed in milky white.

The lower left plate reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left plate decoration body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated with light emission.

The left end of the plate lower decoration unit 280 is positioned below the left end of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the lower plate center decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Contiguous with the left edge. Since the left end of the plate lower left decorative body 281 of the plate lower left decorative unit 280 is formed in a spherical shape, the left end looks as if it is hidden inside the door frame 3 . Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower left plate decoration 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 includes a plate lower right decoration body 286 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decorative substrate 288 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rearward center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The lower right plate decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The dish lower right ornament 286 has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the plate lower right decorative body 286 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is located below the right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is contiguous with the right edge of Since the right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the right end appears to be hidden inside the door frame 3 . The lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower right plate decoration body 286. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 are caused to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the display can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the forward/backward direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation part 301, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation part 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation part 303 is arranged at the center of the rotating operation part 302, and has a central pressing operation part 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotating operation part 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing portion 303b disposed between the inner peripheral portion and the inner peripheral portion.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation part 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 , and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and a effect operation ring decoration board 352. A decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, a vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330. A performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation section cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 includes a downwardly recessed hemispherical unit lower cover 311, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover. A plate center upper reflector 313 attached from behind in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs attached to the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. a plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a plate center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear in a plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower reflector 315 attached to the plate center lower reflector 315 to direct light forward. and a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical surface bulging downward on the front side from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 on the rear side thereof. 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in a slanted state so that the axis perpendicular to the imaginary plane formed on the upper edge extending in a semi-circular shape of the front portion is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 is formed with a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest portion when assembled to the dish unit 200. As shown in FIG.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 when viewed from above. installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a plate center upper decoration 312a in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a plate center upper decoration 312a that extends forward below the plate center upper decoration 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b is provided, the protruding semicircular arc extending in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. - 特許庁The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b.

The upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) into halves, and extend in a semicircular shape with the divided surfaces facing the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is slightly thinner than the upper plate center decoration 312a. is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decoration 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the lower plate center decoration 312b. When the plate unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the upper plate center decoration 312a are connected to the right ends of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the left ends of the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, and the lower plate center decorations. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and milky white.

Further, the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

The plate center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The upper plate center decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular shape along the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the upper plate center decoration substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center upper decoration body 312a can be decorated with light.

The lower plate center reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the lower plate center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower plate center decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the lower plate center decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated with light.

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular shape. When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower dish center decoration substrate 316 emit light, the whole of each can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the upper plate center decoration 312a is continuous with the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is connected with the lower left plate decoration 281 and the right plate decoration. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operating section base 320 of the effect operating unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation part base 320 is inserted into the effect operation part cover unit 310 from above, and the lower end is attached to the effect operation part cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 includes a body portion 321 that is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and has an open top, and a body portion 321 that extends outward from the upper end of the body portion 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward to support the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a rotatable manner.

The operation part base 320 is formed such that the main body part 321 is sized to accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. The main body part 321 has a bottom wall to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from below, and a portion of the bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be flat. The bottom wall of the main body part 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibrations can be amplified, and the vibrations can be converted into sounds such as voice and music and output. can.

A leg portion 361 b of a button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 . Further, the body portion 321 has a through-hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the body portion 321 . The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the body part 321, and the operating part relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . An effect operation ring decoration board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation section cover unit 310 .

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the transmission gear for the operation ring so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the driving side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is positioned at the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation part base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the flange part 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the upper plate center decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . In addition, in the state where the effect operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5-5c. Production control ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56 and the like. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from above, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation part 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the effect operation ring 330 has an outer diameter of approximately 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushings 333 are attached to the ring mounting base 331 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring mounting base 332, and are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to prevent upward movement of the rotation base 332. and a regulating ring retaining member 334 .

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side of the ring outer cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operation part 302 and form a part of the rotation operation part 302. and a ring inner cover 337 that is in the ring. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 and an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 and a boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 projecting upward from a plurality of (here, four) portions, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. and through-holes 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. A plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 .

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 . The rotation base 332 has a ring gear 332a projecting downward from the bottom surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332 . The ring gear 332 a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 , and faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331 when assembled to the effect operation ring 330 . The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring in a state assembled with the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on an outer upper surface portion 335a in which an arc forming the outer and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer upper surface portions 335a are arranged in the circumferential direction. and a plurality of outer cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending toward the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. there is An outer upper surface portion 335a of the upper outer ring cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The upper outer cover mounting portion 335 c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the upper outer surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 .

The ring outer and lower cover 336 has an outer and lower surface portion 336a in which an arc forming the outer and lower portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and toward the center from the inner side of the outer and lower surface portion 336a. A plurality of outer and lower cover attachment portions 336b are provided. A lower outer surface portion 336a of the outer lower ring cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The lower outer cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the upper outer cover 335 of the ring.

The ring inner cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming the inside and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis. and a plurality of inner cover mounting portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. An inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The cylinder surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter equal to the inner diameter of the rotation base 332 . The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332. As shown in FIG.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. - 特許庁

[3-5-5d. Rotation drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57(a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the performance operation unit, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 . The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 .

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of an operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346 and .

The rotation drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The driving gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates together with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. there is A second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with a gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 .

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a left side surface of the gear portion 345a. and a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345 b are detected by a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345 . The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It's like As a result, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation portion 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 .

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the driving side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. engage with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is entirely located inside the effect operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

The rotation drive unit 340 is driven by an operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily rotate the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via a drive gear 343, a transmission gear 344, a transmission detection gear member 345, and an operation ring transmission gear. can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby reciprocatingly rotating and vibrating the rotary operation section 302. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, it is possible to change the content of the player-participation-type effect according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 .

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotational direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted, and by driving the operation ring driving motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the player can be performed. can be loaded. Therefore, by appropriately combining these elements, it is possible to provide the rotary operation unit 302 with an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player-participation type presentation or a click feeling.

[3-5-5e. Operation ring transmission gear]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation portion base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the ring side gear portion 350a that rotates integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a to detect the transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur-gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the driving-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation portion base 320 so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 . The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by inserting it from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 and then attaching the gear mounting member 351 to the operation portion base 320 . be done.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged with the ring gear 332a. It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340 . Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can light-embellish the effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is formed in a shape in which a ring is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decoration board 352a on the front side and a rear decoration board 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery of each of the upper surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. A plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is positioned below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300 . The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is covered with a transparent decoration board cover 353 on the upper side. The decoration board cover 353 is formed in a form that is divided into front and rear, like the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and covers the front decoration board 352a from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation part base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 to cover the rear decoration substrate 352b from above.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331 are passed through the ring outer side of the rotary operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a luminous decoration such that an LED is provided in the rotary operation unit 302 .

[3-5-5g. vibration speaker]
Vibration speaker 354 in production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction directed upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Also, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320 . The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies compared to a vibrating device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can provide more diverse effects to the player.

[3-5-5h. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit, viewed from below. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation part 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation portion 303a. ing.

The performance operation button unit 360 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the button unit base 361 attached inside the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other. Upper base 363 , and between upper base 363 and button unit base 361 , are attached so as to be vertically movable by means of a pair of guide shafts 362 . and a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and biasing the lifting base 364 upward.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape, the upper end of which is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. An operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to protrude upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 are engaged with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably mounted through the central shaft 366. 370, an elevation cam member 371, which is connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end and rotatably mounted through a central shaft 366, and rotates to raise and lower the elevation base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam driving gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom extending vertically with an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted above the elevation base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button body 373 and the lift base 364 and biasing the central button body 373 upward; A central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom and closed at the upper end side, and is attached to the upper end of the central button main body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363 . and a center button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted that are capable of emitting light upward. In the effect operation button unit 360, a central button main body 373 and a central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the center button main body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364. An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373; A translucent cylindrical perimeter decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the perimeter button decoration substrate 377 on the outer perimeter side and that is three-dimensionally decorated, and lifts up and down so as to cover the outer periphery and upper surface of the perimeter decorative lens 379. and a transparent outer perimeter button cover 380 attached to the base 364 and having a center button cover 375 facing upward at the center. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute the outer peripheral press operating portion 303b.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 includes a pressing detection sensor 381 attached to the button unit base 361 for detecting pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 attached to the button unit base 361. and an elevation detection sensor 382 that detects elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. A base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 . The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam driving gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to its upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 attached to its lower surface. is attached. The button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b.

A pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center. A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. A pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366 .

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and have their lower ends in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends in contact with the elevating base 364 . The lifting spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374 .

The elevating base 364 is formed to have substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, a central hole 364b having a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass, A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. there is The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The lifting base 364 is restricted from moving upward by contacting the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c with the upper base 363, and a space is provided between the upper base 363 and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 to move. forming. Also, the elevation base 364 is vertically moved by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two locations facing each other and is detected by the elevation detection sensor 382. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364. As shown in FIG.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see Figure 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the distance between the adjacent cam portions 371a is smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364.

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The elevation cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. is formed as By rotating the elevation cam member 371, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 can be guided by the cam portion 371a so that the elevation base 364 can be elevated.

The central button main body 373 has a vertically extending cylindrical cylindrical portion 373a, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. 362 is slidably inserted into a pair of guide holes 373c, a central opening 373d passing through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressing detection piece 373 e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 , and a pair of guide bosses 373 f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373 b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 .

The center button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the lift base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. As shown in FIG. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373 .

The center button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws through which washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. A washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevation base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is activated when the bottom 373b (lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 to protrude downward. This center button main body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker biasing force than the lifting spring 365 .

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. The central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 at the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full-color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can light-embellish the center button cover 375 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the peripheral button decoration board 377 . The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can light-embellish the peripheral decorative lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 includes an annular substrate portion 378 a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and is attached to the lift base 364 , and a cylindrical substrate portion 378 a that extends upward from the inner periphery of the substrate portion 378 a to cover the center button main body 373 . and a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The peripheral substrate cover 378 is transparent.

The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 has twisted portions extending upward so as to move in the circumferential direction and arranged in rows at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a of the peripheral substrate cover 378 . The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the lifting base 364 at the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

In the state where the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. It is inserted into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevation cam member 371 from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Also, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, when assembled to the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 , and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 . also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63, etc.).

In this state (state shown in FIG. 62(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pushed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 is pushed downward. is detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is substantially level with the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. Neither is detected by the detection sensor 381 . That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view, the elevation cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevation drive gear 368 . The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the engaging portion 371c, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. Together with this, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the elevated position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 abuts the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevation base 364 is restricted. In addition, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (the central depressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral depressing operation portion 303b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 .

When the effect operation unit 300 is assembled into the effect operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b), etc.). reference).

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a ) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374 . It moves downward against the force, and the center button main body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 . When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes downward from the lift base 364. , the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button main body 373 abuts on the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lifting base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lifting base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lifting base 364, the peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364 and the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 is detected. is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the central button cover 375 (the central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the lifting base 364 moves through the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the lifting spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365 , and the lower end of the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 . In this state, the lift base 364 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in the lowered position. The pressure detecting piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lifting base 364, and the pressure detecting piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. 62(b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364, moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevation cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevation base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the state of the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5-5i. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 320 . The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operation section base 320 and an operation section relay board 392 mounted inside the board box 391 .

The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. The operation part relay board 392 includes the plate center upper decoration board 314, the plate center lower decoration board 316, the operation ring drive motor 342, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevation drive motor 367, center button decoration board 376, peripheral button decoration board 377, press detection sensor 381, elevation detection sensor 382, and plate unit relay board 214 of plate base unit 210 are relayed. there is

[3-5-5j. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing portion of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a plate unit when an operation part is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on its upper surface. The effect operating section 301 is composed of a large annular rotating operating section 302 and a pressing operating section 303 arranged in the ring of the rotating operating section 302 . The press operation portion 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation portion 303 a positioned at the center of the rotary operation portion 302 and an annular outer peripheral press operation portion disposed between the central press operation portion 303 a and the rotary operation portion 302 . 303b.

The rotation operation part 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335 , a ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330 . The central pressing operation portion 303 a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360 , and the outer pressing operation portion 303 b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation part 302 (the effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 . Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 clockwise in a left side view, the effect operation ring 330 rotates through the operation ring transmission gear 350 . , rotates clockwise in plan view. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 counterclockwise in left side view, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. .

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation portion 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and rotates. When the operating portion 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. This transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. FIG. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is greater than the space between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in rows at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , is an interval that is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, after the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected from the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

Since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected in this way, the content of the player participation type presentation can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 . Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring driving motor 342 rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. At the same time, the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the rotary operation portion 302 in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotary operation, so that the rotary operation can be made heavy and a click feeling can be imparted.

The rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation portion 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the drawing, the rotary operation unit 302 is attached with the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that is easy for the player to grasp. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 in a way that is easy for the player to operate. is enhanced. Further, the rotary operation portion 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation portion 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. It should be noted that since the lower surface side of the rotary operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 below the effect operation ring 330, on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape. Thus, by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a line are successively arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decoration board) is provided inside the rotary operation unit 302 that rotates.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has a pressing operation part 303 arranged in a ring of the rotary operation part 302, and the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302 is larger than the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302, as shown in FIG. 65(a). It is in a state of a lowered position projecting slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation section 303a of the pressing operation section 303 can be pressed. When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward, the upper surface of the central push operation portion 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer circumference push operation portion 303b (perimeter button cover 380), and the push is detected. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381 .

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. The pressure is never detected by the sensor 381 .

In a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the lifting base 364 to reach the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this elevated position, the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 . In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 .

When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward while the push operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the central push operation portion 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central push operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b face the rotation operating portion 302. It will be in a state of approximately the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotary operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation portion 303 of this embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, regardless of whether the pressing operation portion 303 is in the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the central pressing operation portion 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , the player-participation type performance can be more enjoyable.

Note that the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier using the pressing operation portion 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation becomes difficult due to the pressing operation portion 303 becoming an obstacle. Therefore, it is possible to change the operability of the rotary operation unit 302, thereby making it possible to enjoy a wider variety of operations.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. FIG. 66(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 66(b) is a back perspective view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402, and a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 .

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can light-embellish the door-frame left-side decoration body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 . The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the left end of the upper left plate decoration body 271 of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the top door frame unit 450 and the top decoration body 453 of the door frame. is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end of the

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. FIG. 69(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 69(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200, and a side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. and a plurality of luminous side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and prevents a player playing with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and a player's personal space can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and cylindrically extending forward and arranged vertically in rows, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and a side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 are mounted. and internal reflectors 414 respectively inserted into the interiors of the side window interior decorations 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to a right side reflector 415 that is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the door frame. A door having a through hole 416a that extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front and back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed with a through hole 417a extending in a shape and penetrating in the left-right direction to constitute the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side decorative substrate 418 attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the right side reflector 415. and a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415 .

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (three in this case) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416 at the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b. The side window inner decorative member 412 is attached to the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a lower position to an upper position with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed in translucent milky white.

The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is attached to a portion behind the connection base 412 a of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 . A plurality of LEDs provided on the side window inner decorative portion decorative substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape vertically and horizontally around the axial center of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear portion of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is

The internal reflector 414 has an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four sections, upper, lower, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward from the top end to the bottom end. It is The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending deformed oval shape, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window inner decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame right-side decorative substrate 418 can light-embellish the door-frame right-side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415 . As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decorative body 276 of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453 .

The door frame right side unit 410, in a state assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed like a screen. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (columnar) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a. , the side window inner decorative portion 410b can be decorated with light. By luminous decoration of the side window interior decoration part 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be brightened, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that illuminates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the edge of the island facility) through the three side window interior decoration parts 410b in 410a. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. This pachinko machine 1 can be used to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window inner decorative portion 410b can block the line of sight of a player located nearby. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, so that the other players can play without hesitation. .

Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are illuminated by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can dazzle the inside of the side window 410a, thereby changing the visibility through the side window 410a. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, the light is emitted in a belt-like and radial manner, so that the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzling and the opposite side is seen from between them. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as a neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to being unable to concentrate on the game and feeling lost due to mistakes being induced, and making the player concentrate on the game to make the game more enjoyable. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72(a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is a top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from above, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from below. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration board 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top central reflector 458 arranged between a door frame top decoration 453 and a door frame top central decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457. and a top right reflector 460 located in and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 .

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached downward to the center speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. a top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below; A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451. there is

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like body portion 451a extending in the left and right direction with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction. and a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side of the body portion 451a is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right forward protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The forward projecting portion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top upper cover 452 covers the outer sides of the left and right forward protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right forward protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes forward most at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. The top cover 452 also has an opening 452a on the upper surface thereof, which is largely cut forward from the rear end. This opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a semi-circular arc that protrudes forward, and the curvature decreases as it goes from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and it extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 . formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame top decoration 453 faces downward at both ends in the horizontal direction, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419 .

The door-frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door-frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door-frame top base 451, and bulges upward at the center in the left-right direction. , extending in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically outside the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the horizontal direction and facing the top side speakers 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454 .

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decoration substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate the left portion of the door-frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door-frame top right decoration substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

Top center reflector 458 , top left reflector 459 , and top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, on door frame top center decoration substrate 455 , door frame top left decoration substrate 456 , and door frame top right decoration substrate 457 . Through-holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. As shown in FIG. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as speech and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right forward projections 451 b of the door frame top base 451 . The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter, and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sounds output from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465 .

The door frame top relay board 467 includes the door frame top center decorative board 455 , the door frame top left decorative board 456 , the door frame top right decorative board 457 , the top center speaker 462 , the top side speaker 464 , and the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the door frame secondary relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. there is In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top central speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464 .

[3-9. door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate central upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the upper left plate decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the upper right plate decoration 276, the upper center plate decoration 312a, the left side door frame decoration 404, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the Behind the door frame top decoration 453 are a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately lighting the LEDs of these decoration substrates, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated, A player can be shown or given a light emitting effect such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation part 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation part 302. A pressing operation portion 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing portion 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotating operation portion 302 is provided below the rotating operating portion 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or half-tube) large-diameter plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other. A door-frame left-side decoration 404 of the door-frame left-side unit 400 and a door-frame right-side decoration of the door-frame right-side unit 410 have similar shapes so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached outside the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b. Since the pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be made conspicuous.

In addition, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower left plate decoration 281, the lower right plate decoration 286, and the lower center plate decoration 312b, which are arranged below the upper plate center decoration 312a, are placed in half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 increases upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that is arranged on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The push operation part 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation part 302 and the push operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can.

Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, a doughnut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends forward as it goes upward. Since the state is tilted to be lowered, the top surfaces of the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be fully visible, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear larger. In addition, as described above, since the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotary operation portion 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, it is possible for the player to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player can immediately rotate when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration body 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation portion 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b protrude farther forward than the upper plate 201. Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at a glance, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be made. can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. FIG. 76 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. Fig. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is positioned within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base unit 500 in front view, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. a rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable; and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 according to instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 protruding rearward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
Main body frame base unit 500 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placing portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front. A circular speaker opening 501g that faces the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rotatably attached rearwardly extending portion 501j is formed on the rear surface of the base body 501a near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat plate-like guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the body frame base 501 at an end (right end) on the side opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see FIG. 84(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably, α/3≧β). (see FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 , is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 , and is attached to the door frame 3 . door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. a hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3; , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded profile.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and FIG. 85(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that if the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-rear width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a; and a rear side of the top plate portion 551a. and a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a rear plate portion 551b extending from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width to the right. A back plate left portion 551e, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front portion of the lower side of the left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f are provided. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the first rail cover 554 side is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 in front view on the top surface of the portion extending left and right of the payout base 551 . The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the side of the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. ball guidance unit]
The ball guide unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while being repeatedly folded between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, and the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball ejection movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispenser main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with the second transmission gear 587. and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after bending slightly obliquely downward to the right from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and directly above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The main body side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap than the main body side guide wall 581a, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b in the rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the dispensing device front lid 583. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a extends from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotating shaft and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Furthermore, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in this ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially attached to a dispensing device rear lid 582 and a dispensing device front lid 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part thereof can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 90).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, so that pachinko It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable ball removal piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removal piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball removal piece 592, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not fly out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be surely circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7-3. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper disbursed ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (discharged) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of the Also, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth, and A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full-tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614. In a normal state, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b have front end openings (downstream ends). opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are arranged in the upper full position. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 contacts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in a state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state and are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island equipment side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 93(b) is a back perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The substrate unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a front view near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 facing forward. and a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b, extends in the left-right direction, and obliquely downwards and rearwards. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes rearward the most. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient rear space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the body frame speaker 622. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the panel front member 42, and the panel rear member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the front panel 42 can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since it communicates with the lower outer frame assembly 40 through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to a sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is provided with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through tube 623a extending in a cylindrical shape communicating with the through hole 621d and penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed. When the speaker unit 620a is assembled, the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with a front base 625 and a rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guiding part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guiding part 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball ejection port 629 for ejecting downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the ink is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and .

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (Fig. 97) and The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 and payout commands from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202).

The payout control board box 632 is composed of a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A payout control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the payout control board 633 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is installed) can be checked. ) can be confirmed from the outside of the payout control board box 632 . In addition, the payout control board box 632 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the beta body, respectively. In order to open the control board box 632, its sealing mechanism must be destroyed, and the opening and closing of the payout control board box 632 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover illegal opening and closing of the payout control board box 632, and the deterrence against fraudulent acts on the payout control board box 632 is enhanced.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at the rearward portion of the speaker box 623 , which projects most backward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, and the like, and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The rear cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and its left side attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude backward from the unit base 651 and can be engaged with the outer frame 2, and a door frame that protrudes forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 and rotates depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward, thereby opening the main body frame relative to the outer frame 2 . 4 is unlocked. In this manner, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. FIG. 99 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is a front view showing a game area in which game balls circulate on the game board. In addition, in FIG. 100, the transparent cover body of the stored ball effect unit 3400 is omitted. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are general prize winning openings 2001a to 2001d that give a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B payout) to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B, a first start opening 2002, A gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided (see FIG. 100). Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B has the general winning openings 2001a to 2001d, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second It is for performing a game that entertains the hitting operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a so as to be accepted or passed through the big winning opening 2006 or the like.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 100). In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is performed by hitting game balls B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 97 and 125, etc.) for controlling the contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit (not shown) arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100. A front unit 2000 attached to the front surface and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder (not shown) attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001a to 2001d that are always open to accept the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001a to 2001d. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the game area 5a, and a gate that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. 2003, and a second start opening that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the passage of the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. 2004, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 It is provided with a first big winning hole 2005 and a second big winning hole 2006 in which the game ball B can be accepted in any one of them.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. , a side unit 2200 having two general prize winning openings 2001c and 2001d attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the front view, and a side unit 2200 at the right end in the front view in the game area 5a. A gate unit 2300 having a gate portion 2003 attached below the center of the direction, and a second start opening 2004 and a first big winning opening attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. 2005, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a second big prize-winning port 2006, and a reservoir having one general prize-winning port 2001a attached to the lower right side in the front view in the game area 5a. A ball effect unit 3400 is provided.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel holder) and has a box shape with an open front. and a lower movable production unit 3100, an upper rear movable production unit 3200, and an upper front movable production unit 3300 attached in the back box (not shown).

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in the front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely to the upper right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the space between the outer rail 1001 and is urged by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front constituent member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1010 is aligned with the notch of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front structural member 1000 . Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front and rear directions for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

The panel holder of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder detachably holds the panel plate 1110, is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and has a through-hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has an inner size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a. ing.

In addition, the panel holder has a notch portion that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion is formed so as to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion are penetrated and the lower portion is fully extended. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the tank ball path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . As a result, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the bottom to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 125) for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. and has.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether an unauthorized IC is mounted) ) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320 . In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the beta body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main In order to open the control board box 1320, its sealing mechanism must be destroyed, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510 . The main control board 1310 also includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2301, a second starter sensor 2511, a first count sensor 2512, a second count sensor 2513, a specific area sensor 2512a, a starter solenoid 2514, and a first attacker solenoid. 2515, the second attacker solenoid 2516, the sorting solenoid 2111, the general winning opening sensors 3001a and 3001b, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 has a status indicator, which is not shown in detail, and consists of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and two LEDs for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display made up of LEDs and a normal reservation display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. A first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations (first number of reservations) related to the acceptance of game balls B to and a lottery by accepting game balls B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs displaying the second special lottery result, and two LEDs displaying the number of reservations (second number of reservations) related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 and a second special pending number indicator.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions of the opening/closing pattern of at least one of the first big prize winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 ( A round indicator consisting of five LEDs displaying the number of rounds).

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc. can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit in the game board 5 will be described. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 and the like for controlling the progress of effects provided to the player based on commands from the main control board 1310 .

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, and other boards (peripheral data ROM board and liquid crystal output board to be described later). there is The configuration of peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box of the back unit 3000. FIG. The performance display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box at the approximate center. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

[5-8. front unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end partially covers the opening of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The table unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001a to 2001d that are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001. is a first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the game area 5a, and a gate part that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B 2003, a second start port 2004 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port. A first big prize winning port 2005 and a second big prize winning port in which at least one of the game balls B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into 2004 2006 and.

Among a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001a to 2001d, the general winning openings 2001b to 2001d are arranged in the lower left part of the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001b is the first start in the starting opening unit 2100. It is arranged on the left side of the opening 2002, and the general winning openings 2001c and 2001d are arranged in the side unit 2200, respectively. On the other hand, although the general prize winning opening 2001a is arranged in the lower right part in the game area 5a, it is arranged in a higher position than the general winning openings 2001b to 2001d, and is arranged in the upper right part in the stored ball effect unit 3400. are placed.

The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. Right under the gate section 2003, the right general prize winning opening 2001 is arranged. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a height slightly lower than the general winning opening 2001 on the right side in the lower left of the gate portion 2003 . The first big prize winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004 at a height slightly lower than the first starting opening 2002 . The second big prize winning opening 2006 is arranged in a slightly lower position to the left of the first big winning opening 2005 .

The front unit 2000 includes a starter unit 2100 having a first starter 2002 attached directly above the out port 1008 in the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and a starter unit 2100 having a first starter 2002, A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has two general winning holes 2001c and 2001d, and a side unit 2200 that is mounted at the right end of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and below the center in the vertical direction. A gate unit 2300 having a cage gate portion 2003, and one general winning opening 2001b, a second starting opening 2004, and a first big winning opening 2005, which are attached slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. , and a frame-shaped center role item 2500 having a second prize-winning hole 2006, a transparent presentation unit 2600 attached so as to close the frame of the center role item 2500, and a game area 5a. and a stored ball performance unit 3400 which is attached to the lower right side in front view and has one general prize winning opening 2001a.

The gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is arranged at the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and is located below the center in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . The gate unit 2300 includes a gate portion 2003 formed so that the game balls B can always pass one by one in the vertical direction, and a gate sensor 2301 that detects the game balls B that have passed through the gate portion 2003 .

In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received by the general winning openings 2001b to 2001d is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and detected by one common winning opening sensor 3001b. , and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. Also, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001a is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001a, and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. . Also, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. be done.

Also, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2511 and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. When the game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2005 is distributed to a specific area by a distribution member described later, it is detected by the specific area sensor 2512a and then detected by the first count sensor 2512, and discharged by the distribution member. When distributed to the area, it is detected by the first count sensor 2512 without being detected by the specific area sensor 2512a, then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. Also, after being detected by the second count sensor 2513, the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below.

The game ball B ejected to the substrate holder 1200 is ejected to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and is collected by the island facility of the game hall.

[5-8-1. Center role]
Center role item 2500 of table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. FIG. 101 is a front view of the center accessory and the display effect unit in the front unit of the game board. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. FIG. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a frame, and the effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame, the lower movable effect unit 3100 provided in the back unit 3000, and the upper front movable effect unit. 3300 etc. can be visually recognized from the front. The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference except for the lower side, and the game ball B hit into the game area 5a is positioned within the frame. are made invulnerable to

The center accessory 2500 includes a second start opening 2004 arranged at the lower right corner of the outer circumference of the frame in a front view, a first big prize opening 2005 arranged below the second start opening 2004, and a first big prize. and a second big winning opening 2006 which is arranged to the left of the opening 2005 and slightly below. In addition, the center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 which is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball B which has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released. A warp exit 2502 opened in a frame and a stage 2503 capable of rolling the game ball B discharged from the warp exit 2502 in the horizontal direction and then discharging it into the game area 5a are provided.

The stage 2503 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape with the central side in the left-right direction depressed, and is positioned directly above the first start port 2002 of the starter unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is positioned on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110), the center position in the left-right direction is formed to be the lowest. This stage 2503 is inclined such that the lowest portion in the center in the left-right direction is lowered forward, and the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from this portion. The height of the lowest portion of the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 is approximately the same height as the second starting port 2004 .

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5 , the elevated part (top) in the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it will be received by the first starting port 2002 with a very high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes a second start opening sensor 2511 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a first count that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2005. A sensor 2512, a specific area sensor 2512a for detecting a game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2005 and distributed to a specific area by the distribution member, and a game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2006. and a second count sensor 2513 for detecting (see FIG. 125). In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes a starting opening solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate section 2003, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening. A first attacker solenoid 2515 for opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the opening 2004, the first starting opening 2002 or the second A second attacker solenoid 2516 for opening and closing a second large prize winning port 2006 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the first large prize winning port. A distribution solenoid 2111 for operating a distribution member for distributing the winning game ball 2005 to a specific area and a discharge area is provided.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper right side of the center in the left-right direction and the upper part of the right side face in a front view are aligned with the outer periphery (the outer rail 1001 and the right rail 1005) of the game area 5a. A gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between them. In addition, when the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the lower right corner in the front view is the second starting hole 2004, the first big prize hole 2005, and the second big prize hole 2006. The lower right corner portion extends to the lower corner in the game area 5a, forming a space between the lower right corner portion and the upper portion of the right side surface. A gate unit 2300 and a stored ball effect unit 3400 below the gate unit 2300 are arranged in the space.

Therefore, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), the game ball B can pass through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. At the same time, the game ball B can be received by the storage ball production unit 3400, and the game ball can be released to the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 that are open (open) with a high probability. B can be accepted.

[5-8-2. display unit]
Display rendering unit 2600 in table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 to 110 and the like. FIG. 102 is a side cross-sectional view of the display effect unit along with the center accessory cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LEDs in the display effect unit and the reflective concave portions of the front light guide plate. FIG. 104 is a front view showing the light emission mode of the front light guide plate. FIG. 110 is a front view of the game board shown with the front light guide plate of the display effect unit illuminated.

The display effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the frame-like center accessory 2500 so as to close the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The display effect unit 2600 includes a transparent flat front light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500, a reflector 2620 attached to the upper side of the front light guide plate 2610, and an upper surface of the reflector 2620. A front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 mounted with a plurality of LEDs 2630 for irradiating light toward the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610, and a center function covering the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 and the reflector 2620 from the front. a front cover 2650 attached to 2500;

The front light guide plate 2610 of the display effect unit 2600 includes a transparent plate-like light guide plate main body 2611 and a plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 formed on the back surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. It has a plurality of fine reflecting recesses 2613 that reflect incident light forward. The plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 are composed of four specific light entrance portions 2612a, 2612b, 3rd specific light entrance portions 2612c, and 4th specific light entrance portions 2612d. It is configured. The first specific light entering portion 2612a, the second specific light entering portion 2612b, the third specific light entering portion 2612c, and the fourth specific light entering portion 2612d divide the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 into eight equal parts in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction). Then, they are arranged in order from left to right in two circles (the fourth specific light entrance portion 2612d is followed by the first specific light entrance portion 2612a).

The reflecting concave portion 2613 has a plane extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light entering portion 2612 and inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 . . The reflective recess 2613 is recessed into a pent roof-like triangle. The reflective concave portions 2613 can reflect light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portions 2612 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 . In addition, the reflecting recesses 2613 can reflect the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light entrance portions 2612 in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 .

As a result, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2612, it is reflected by the reflective concave portion 2613 toward the front of the light guide plate main body 2611 (perpendicular to the plane of the paper). A player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees the reflecting concave portion 2613 as emitting light. On the other hand, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from a specific light entrance portion 2612 that does not correspond, it is reflected by the reflective concave portion 2613 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate main body 2611, A player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 does not see the reflection concave portion 2613 emitting light.

In this embodiment, the reflective concave portion 2613 is in a triangular concave state and extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612. However, this is not the case. , and it is sufficient if it extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2612 .

The plurality of reflective concave portions 2613 correspond to any one of the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612, and the plurality of first reflective concave portions 2613a and the second specific light incident portion 2612b corresponding to the first specific light incident portion 2612a. a plurality of second reflecting recesses 2613b corresponding to the plurality of third reflecting recesses 2613c corresponding to the third specific light entering portion 2612c; a plurality of fourth reflecting recesses corresponding to the fourth specific light entering portion 2612d The concave portion 2613d, and the like.

In addition, the front light guide plate 2610 has a plurality of patterns 2614 that can be illuminated in different manners by reflecting light forward from a specific group of the reflecting recesses 2613 among the plurality of reflecting recesses 2613 . there is The plurality of patterns 2614 includes a first pattern 2614a consisting only of a plurality of first reflective concave portions 2613a, a second pattern 2614b consisting only of a plurality of second reflective concave portions 2613b, and a third pattern 2614b consisting only of a plurality of third reflective concave portions 2613c. It is composed of a pattern 2614c and a fourth pattern 2614d consisting only of a plurality of fourth reflecting concave portions 2613d.

The first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are concentric, as shown in FIGS. are arranged in such an order as to return to the beginning and become the first pattern 2614a).

Reflector 2620 has fixed recess 2621 into which the upper end of front light guide plate 2610 is inserted. By inserting the front light guide plate 2610 into the fixed concave portion 2621, the reflector 2620 can sandwich the front side and the back side of the front light guide plate 2610, and the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned without play. can. Through holes 2622 penetrating vertically are formed in the bottom surface (upper surface) of the fixed concave portion 2621 at portions corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted on the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 .

The front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 has a strip-like shape extending left and right, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted at a portion directly above the fixed concave portion 2621 of the reflector 2620 on the lower surface. The plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted (attached) to portions corresponding to the plurality of through holes 2622 of the reflector 2620, respectively. The front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is attached to the upper surface of the reflector 2620 so that the plurality of LEDs 2630 are formed to face downward through the through holes 2622 .

A plurality of LEDs 2630 are attached so as to correspond to a plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 . The plurality of LEDs 2630 includes a first LED group 2630a corresponding to the first specific light entrance portion 2612a, a second LED group 2630b corresponding to the second specific light entrance portion 2612b, and a third specific light entrance portion 2612c. and a fourth LED group 2630d corresponding to the fourth specific light entrance portion 2612d. A first LED group 2630a, a second LED group 2630b, a third LED group 2630c, and a fourth LED group 2630d divide a plurality of LEDs 2630 arranged in a row in the left-right direction into eight equal parts in the left-right direction. (The fourth LED group 2630d is followed by the first LED group 2630a). In this embodiment, the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d each have six LEDs 2630 .

Next, the lighting effect by the display effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2630a of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the first specific light incident portion 2612a, is reflected forward by the first reflecting concave portion 2613a, and is reflected from the remaining second LEDs. Since the second reflecting recess 2613b, the third reflecting recess 2613c, and the fourth reflecting recess 2613d reflect to other than the front, only the first reflecting recess 2613a can be seen to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. A first pattern 2614a composed of a plurality of first reflecting concave portions 2613a can be caused to emit light (see FIG. 104(a)).

When the second LED group 2630b of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the second specific light entrance portion 2612b, is reflected forward by the second reflecting recess 2613b, and is reflected from the remaining second LED group 2630b. Since the first reflecting recess 2613a, the third reflecting recess 2613c, and the fourth reflecting recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the second reflecting recess 2613b appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, A second pattern 2614b composed of a plurality of second reflecting concave portions 2613b can be caused to emit light (see FIG. 104(b)).

When the third LED group 2630c of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the third specific light entrance portion 2612c, is reflected forward by the third reflecting recess portion 2613c, and is reflected from the remaining third LED group 2630c. Since the first reflecting recess 2613a, the second reflecting recess 2613b, and the fourth reflecting recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the third reflecting recess 2613c can be seen shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. A third pattern 2614c composed of a plurality of third reflecting concave portions 2613c can be caused to emit light (see FIG. 104(c)).

When the fourth LED group 2630d of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2612d, is reflected forward by the fourth reflecting recess portion 2613d, and is reflected from the remaining Since the first reflecting recess 2613a, the second reflecting recess 2613b, and the third reflecting recess 2613c are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting recess 2613d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. A fourth pattern 2614d composed of a plurality of fourth reflecting concave portions 2613d can be caused to emit light (see FIG. 104(d)).

As described above, since the plurality of patterns 2614 arranged concentrically can be made to emit light, the plurality of LEDs 2630 are arranged in the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630c. When the LED group 2630d is illuminated in order, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d can be illuminated in order, and there is a movement that spreads outward from the center. It is possible to perform a lighting effect like an animation.

On the other hand, when the plurality of LEDs 2630 are caused to emit light in the order of the fourth LED group 2630d, the third LED group 2630c, the second LED group 2630b, and the first LED group 2630a, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, the second The pattern 2614b and the first pattern 2614a can be illuminated in order, and a lighting effect such as an animation with a movement that concentrates from the outside toward the center can be performed.

As described above, according to the display effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns 2614 can be caused to emit light from a single front light guide plate 2610. There is no need to provide a plurality of light guide plates, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close to the player side as possible, and a wide space is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610. can be easily secured. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. are placed on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. can be arranged, thereby improving the appearance in the game area 5a and making it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the players, and in addition to the performance by the light emitting display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable performance By performing movable performances by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable performance unit 3200, the upper front movable performance unit 3300, etc., various performances can be provided to the players, and the players are entertained and the decrease in interest is suppressed. be able to.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 110, the front light guide plate 2610 makes a plurality of translucent patterns 2614 appear in front of the production unit, the decorative body, and the production display device 1600 by point-like light emission of the plurality of reflecting recesses 2613. Since it is possible to show moving luminous decorations like animation, it is possible to give a strong impact to players who are accustomed to luminous effects using conventional light guide plates, and to surprise and amuse the players. It is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, heighten the player's sense of expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since only the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can clearly see the luminous display of the pattern 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610, other players who are away from the front can see the pattern 2614. To prevent other players from paying attention by making it difficult to see light emitting display and making it difficult for other players to notice that the performance using the front light guide plate 2610 is being performed. At the same time, the player can play the game without worrying about other players, thereby making the game enjoyable and suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached so as to be sandwiched between the fixing recesses 2621 of the reflector 2620, the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 can be reliably positioned with respect to the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. can do. Accordingly, each LED 2630 (first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group 2630c, fourth LED group 2630d) is arranged at a position corresponding to each specific light entrance portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light from each LED 2630 can be reflected forward by the corresponding reflecting concave portion 2613, and the corresponding pattern 2614 can be reliably illuminated.

Furthermore, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500 attached to the center accessory 2500 in the center of the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is illuminated by the LED 2630, the light is emitted. The displayed pattern 2614 does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good condition, and the game becomes hard to see. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful and enjoy the game in a good condition.

In addition, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed concave portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 can be mounted more easily than in the conventional case where two members are used for attachment. , and the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at desired positions with respect to the front light guide plate 2610 . Therefore, since the LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light entrance portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LEDs 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light entrance portions 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 can be displayed. Light emission display can be reliably performed.

Further, by arranging the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) is arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611. The front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) does not surround the outer periphery of the light guide plate body 2611, and the front cover (frame body) covers the entire periphery of the light guide plate body 2611. Since it is possible to avoid partitioning the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged in the space, the effect image etc. can be easily seen from the player side, and the effect image can be displayed to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in a good state to suppress the decline in interest, and the pachinko machine 1 with a sense of openness can be provided by not having a frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and the game area 5a. It is possible to improve the appearance of the inside and make it appealing to strongly attract the attention of the players.

In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, by matching the periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500, the periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610. A strong impact can be given to the player who thought that the 2610 did not exist, and the player can be surprised, and the light emitting display of the plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest. can.

Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflectors 2620 are hidden from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the game area 5a from deteriorating due to the reflectors 2620 being visible. , the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 are hidden from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630. By causing the pattern 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 to emit light, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display that the player did not expect, and the light emission display of the pattern 2614 can be enjoyed by the player. It is possible to make the player think that something good will happen to the player, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610, the light emission display of the plurality of patterns 2614 different from each other by the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 can be achieved. Since it is possible to show the player an effect combining the above, various effects can be performed by appropriately combining them, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 The player can be entertained by the performance by and can suppress the decline of the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 are different, it is possible to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the luminescently displayed patterns 2614 by displaying an effect image associated with the plurality of luminescently displayed patterns 2614 on the front light guide plate 2610. A performance (display performance) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, the reflective concave portion 2613 has a triangular cross section that extends uniformly, but is not limited to this. may be polygonal and extending at a constant rate, or may have a curved cross-section and extending at a constant rate, or the like.

Also, the LED 2630 may be monochromatic or full-color. Also, the plurality of patterns 2614 may be four or more, and the numbers of specific light incident portions, reflecting recesses, and LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number of patterns 2614 .

[5-8-3. Storage ball production unit]
Next, the stored ball effect unit 3400 attached and fixed to the lower right front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 109. FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the stored-ball effect unit seen from the front side, FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the stored-ball effect unit seen from the rear side, and FIG. 107 is various sectional views of the stored-ball effect unit. FIG. 108 is an operation explanatory diagram of the stored ball effect unit, and FIG. 109 is a diagram explaining the ball path. Here, first, the configuration of the stored ball effect unit 3400 will be described, and then the operation of the stored ball effect unit 3400 will be described. 108 and 109, the transparent cover body of the stored ball effect unit 3400 is omitted.

[5-8-3a. Configuration of storage ball production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the stored ball effect unit 3400 has a box-shaped ball receiving portion 3410 having an arc-shaped ball passage 3405 and an open front, and receives and stores game balls passing through the ball passage 3405. A box-shaped ball storage part 3420 which has a storage space 3415 which can be used and which is open at the front, and a discharge space 3422 which can receive and discharge game balls stored in the ball storage part 3420 and which is open in the front-rear direction. It is mainly composed of a base body 3430 in which a hollow quadrangular prism-shaped sphere discharge part 3425 is formed, and a cover body 3435 attached so as to cover the entire front surface of the base body 3430 . The base body 3430 and the cover body 3435 are molded from transparent resin.

When viewed from the front, the base body 3430 has a ball storage portion 3420 as the center, and a ball receiving portion 3410 is arranged above the ball storage portion 3420 so that the ball storage portion 3420 and the ball receiving portion 3410 are communicated with each other. A ball discharging portion 3425 is disposed on the left side of the receiving portion 3410 so that the ball storing portion 3420 and the ball discharging portion 3425 are communicated with each other. The base body 3430 is formed such that the opening side surface of the ball receiving portion 3410, the opening side surface of the ball storing portion 3420, and the front surface of the ball discharging portion 3425 are arranged in the same plane. As a result, when the cover body 3435 is placed over the base body 3430, the base body 3430 is in close contact with the back surface of the cover body 3435 so that no gap is formed.

In a state where the stored ball effect unit 3400 is attached and fixed to the lower right front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the entire rear surface of the ball receiving portion 3410 of the base body 3430 is in close contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The rear surface of the ball storage portion 3420 of the base body 3430 and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 are arranged on the same plane, and about half of the depth distance dimension of the ball discharge portion 3425 of the base body 3430 is in a contact state. It is arranged to protrude from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the depth direction.

The ball receiving portion 3410 of the base body 3430 is formed by a pair of curved passage walls 3440 protruding forward from the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 3410 with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball in an arc shape. A ball passage 3405 is formed. An upstream end and a downstream end of an arcuate ball passage 3405 formed by a pair of curved passage walls 3440 are configured as a ball receiving port 3405a and a ball outlet 3405b, respectively. Of the pair of curved passage walls 3440, a notch portion 3445 is formed near the middle upper portion of the curved passage wall 3440 on the right side as viewed from the front, and a ball distribution portion 3450 is formed approximately in the middle of the ball receiving portion 3410. A sphere distribution space 3455 that can move in the horizontal direction is formed.

On the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 3410 corresponding to the ball distribution space 3455, a ball distribution portion 3450 molded of colored resin (white resin in this embodiment) is inserted into the ball distribution space 3455 from behind. A long hole 3460 is formed so as not to interfere with the movement of the ball distribution portion 3450 in the left-right direction. The lower right side of the ball distribution space 3455 and the lower right side of the ball receiving portion 3410 communicates with the ball storage portion 3420 of the base body 3430 .

The sphere distribution portion 3450 is formed in a triangular prism shape in a portion having a length corresponding to the depth distance dimension of the sphere distribution space 3455 when viewed from the front. is formed in When the ball distribution part 3450 is arranged at the right end as viewed from the front, a game ball passing through the ball passage 3405 collides with the left slope of the triangular prism. In such a state, the game ball passing through the ball passage 3405 is guided to the downstream side of the ball passage 3405 as it is. On the other hand, when the ball distribution part 3450 is arranged at the left end as viewed from the front, the game ball passing through the ball passage 3405 collides with the right slope of the triangular prism. In such a state, when a game ball passing through the ball passage 3405 collides, it is guided to the ball storage portion 3420 .

The ball swinging portion 3450 is operated by a mechanical device (not shown). This mechanical device (not shown) includes a sphere distribution solenoid 3462 controlled by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, and a sphere distribution (not shown) connected to the columnar portion of the sphere distribution section 3450. and a drive mechanism for parts. When the ball distribution solenoid 3462 is energized and driven by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the plunger of the ball distribution solenoid 3462 is pushed by the biasing spring (compression spring) (that is, By changing from an advanced state to a retreated state against the restoring force of the compression spring, this rectilinear motion is transmitted to the ball swinging portion 3450 via the ball swinging portion drive mechanism, and the ball swinging portion 3450 is moved. , at the left end when viewed from the front. On the other hand, when the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 energizes the ball-distributing solenoid 3462 to release the driven state, the plunger of the ball-distributing solenoid 3462 is inserted into the biasing spring. The urging force of the (compression spring) (that is, the restoring force of the compression spring) naturally returns to the forward state from the retracted state. , and the ball distribution part 3450 can be returned to the original position at the right end as viewed from the front.

It should be noted that the ball distribution solenoid 3462 is not driven when the power is cut off due to a power failure (or when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off by an attendant such as a hall clerk) in a normal non-energized state. Therefore, the ball distribution portion 3450 is arranged at the original position. Therefore, if the ball distribution unit 3450 is placed at the operating position, that is, the game ball passing through the ball passage 3405 collides with the right slope of the triangular prism of the ball distribution unit 3450 and is guided to the ball storage unit 3420. When a power failure occurs in this state, the game ball passing through the ball passage 3405 collides with the left slope of the triangular prism of the ball distribution part 3450 as the ball distribution part 3450 naturally returns to its original position. In this state, the game ball passing through the ball passage 3405 is guided to the downstream side of the ball passage 3405 as it is.

The upper end of the notch 3445 of the right curved passage wall 3440 is connected to the outer wall of the ball receiving portion 3410, and the right curved passage wall 3440 and the left curved passage wall 3440 formed on the upper end of the notch 3445 are connected to each other. By configuring the wall 3440 to be the outer wall of the ball receiving portion 3410, the ball receiving portion 3410 is formed in a box shape that opens forward.

The ball storage portion 3420 of the base body 3430 communicates with the lower right side of the ball receiving portion 3410 (that is, the lower right side of the ball distribution space 3455) and can be guided to the storage space 3415. A passageway 3465 is formed. The storage passage 3465 is formed by the upper portion of the right curved passage wall 3440 formed on the lower end side of the notch portion 3445 of the ball receiving portion 3410 and the inner surface of the right side wall of the ball storage portion 3420. The entrance of 3465 is configured as a general prize winning port 2001a. Below the general winning opening 2001a, a mounting groove 3470 is formed in the storage passage 3465 for mounting the general winning opening sensor 3001a by inserting it from the front. A wiring outlet 3472 for connecting a wiring (not shown) to the connector of the general winning opening sensor 3001a is formed in the bottom surface of the ball storage part 3420 at a position corresponding to the connector of the general winning opening sensor 3001a. The connector of the general prize winning hole sensor 3001a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 via wiring (not shown), and the detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 3001a is input to the main control board 1310. It is

The left side wall of the ball storage portion 3420 as viewed from the front is configured as a partition wall between the ball discharge portion 3425 of the base body 3430, and a cut that communicates the ball storage portion 3420 and the ball discharge portion 3425 is provided approximately in the middle. A notch 3475 is formed. In addition, the lower wall of the ball storing portion 3420 when viewed from the front has a height at approximately the middle of which the rib portion 3480 extends toward the inside of the ball storing portion 3420 and is substantially on the same horizontal line as the lower end side of the notch portion 3475. It is protruded with The lower wall of the ball storage portion 3420 slopes downward from the front toward the rear (depth direction), and the rib portion 3480 forms two ball passages. Rectangular discharge ports 3485 are formed on the bottom surface so that game balls can be discharged outside without being returned to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 107(b) and (c)). That is, the two ball passages formed by rib portion 3480 are configured as ball discharge passages 3487 .

Further, on the bottom surface of the ball storage portion 3420, a plate-shaped ball storage plate that can reciprocate in the front-rear direction (forward and depth directions) is provided slightly above the horizontal line on the same horizontal line as the lower end of the notch portion 3475. A rectangular long hole 3495 through which the 3490 is inserted is formed. When viewed from the front, the ball storage plate 3490 has a left sloping left end compared to its right end, and its left end is arranged at a position higher than the lower end side of the notch 3475 . It is That is, the ball storage plate 3490 is configured to be arranged in a downwardly inclined state toward the notch portion 3475 . A part of the mechanism device (not shown) having guide grooves for guiding the left and right ends of the ball storage plate 3490 is inserted into the long hole 3495 . The plate-like sphere storage plate 3490 is molded from a colored resin (red resin in this embodiment).

This mechanism device (not shown) is attached to the back side of the ball storage section 3420, and includes a ball distribution solenoid 3462 controlled by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 described above, and a cylinder in the ball distribution section 3450. In addition to a sphere distribution unit drive mechanism (not shown) connected to the formed portion, a storage solenoid 3500 controlled by a peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and a sphere storage plate 3490 and a drive mechanism for a sphere storage plate (not shown) to be connected. When the retention solenoid 3500 is energized and driven by the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the plunger of the retention solenoid 3500 is pushed by the biasing spring (compression spring) (that is, the compression spring). (Restoring force due to movement)), the straight movement is transmitted to the ball storage plate 3490 via the ball storage plate drive mechanism, and the ball storage plate 3490 moves to the ball storage portion 3420. It can be in an operating position in which it is inserted from the outside to the inside of the bottom surface of the ball reservoir 3420 and advanced to near the open end of the ball reservoir 3420 . On the other hand, when the storage solenoid 3500 is energized by the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the driving state is released, the plunger of the storage solenoid 3500 is inserted into the biasing spring (compression spring). The urging force of the spring (that is, the restoring force of the compression spring) naturally returns from the retracted state to the forward state. The reservoir plate 3490 can be returned to the original position by retreating from the vicinity of the open end of the ball reservoir 3420 to the rear (depth direction) outside of the bottom surface of the ball reservoir 3420 .

When the ball storage plate 3490 is arranged at the operating position where it advances to the vicinity of the open end of the ball storage portion 3420, the game balls passing through the storage passage 3465 can be received and stored on the upper surface of the ball storage plate 3490. As a result, a storage space 3415 can be formed from the outlet of the ball storage portion 3420 to the upper surface of the ball storage plate 3490 . The storage space 3415 is configured to have a distance dimension in the left-right direction and a distance dimension in the front-rear direction (depth direction) so that only four game balls can be stored in the front-rear and left-right directions. A maximum of 12 game balls can be stored in the space 3415 . On the other hand, when the ball storage plate 3490 is arranged in the original position in which the ball storage plate 3490 retreats to the rear (depth direction) outer side of the bottom surface of the ball storage portion 3420, the game ball passing through the storage passage 3465 is placed on the upper surface of the ball storage plate 3490 The substrate holder 1200 falls toward the ball discharge passage 3487 on the lower wall of the ball storage part 3420 without being caught by the ball storage part 3420, and passes through this ball discharge passage 3487 and returns to the game area 5a from the discharge port 3485. It can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the pachinko machine 1 and collected in the island facility of the game hall.

Thus, by increasing the capacity of the storage space 3415, the number of game balls received by the ball storage plate 3490 is increased, and the ball storage plate 3490 becomes a "cantilever". As a result, a large load is applied to the above-described mechanical device (not shown). Therefore, in this embodiment, the upper portion of the rib portion 3480 forming the two ball discharge passages 3487 is positioned so that the bottom surface of the ball storage plate 3490 is bent downward by the weight of the stored game balls. It is configured to function as a receiving member.

It should be noted that the storage solenoid 3500 is not driven when the power supply is cut off due to a power failure (or when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off by an attendant such as a hall clerk) in a normal state in which no power is supplied. , the sphere storage plate 3490 is arranged at the original position in which the sphere storage plate 3490 is retracted rearward (in the depth direction) outside of the bottom surface of the sphere storage portion 3420 . Therefore, if a power failure occurs while there are game balls stored in the storage space 3415, the ball storage plate 3490 will naturally return to the original position where it retreats to the rear (depth direction) outside of the bottom surface of the ball storage portion 3420. , the game balls stored on the upper surface of the ball storage plate 3490 fall toward the ball discharge passage 3487 on the bottom surface of the ball storage portion 3420, pass through this ball discharge passage 3487, and exit the discharge port 3485. It will be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the substrate holder 1200 without being returned to the area 5a again, and will be collected by the island facility of the game hall.

As described above, the left side wall of the ball storage part 3420 when viewed from the front is configured as a partition wall between the ball discharge part 3425 of the base body 3430, and the ball storage part 3420 and the ball discharge part 3425 are located approximately in the middle. A notch 3475 is formed to communicate with. The ball discharging portion 3425 of the base body 3430 has a plate-shaped ball discharging plate 3505 that can reciprocate in the front-rear direction (forward and depth directions) at positions corresponding to the upper and lower ends of the notch portion 3475 . Guide grooves 3510 for guiding are formed respectively. The plate-like ball ejection plate 3505 can close (close) the notch 3475, and is molded from a colored resin (red resin in this embodiment).

The lower wall of the ball discharge part 3425 is inclined downward from the front to the rear (depth direction), and a circular discharge port 3515 capable of discharging game balls to the outside is formed on the downstream side thereof. (See FIGS. 107(a) and (b)). This downward slope is configured as ball discharge passage 3520 . A discharge guide wall 3525 that receives the game ball flowing down the ball discharge passage 3520 and guides it to the discharge port 3515 extends upward from the rear end of the lower wall of the ball discharge portion 3425 and corresponds to the lower end of the notch portion 3475. A groove 3510 is formed, and the rear ends of the left side wall and the right side wall of the ball discharging portion 3425 are connected to each other. A mounting groove 3535 is formed on the outer surface of the lower wall of the ball discharge portion 3425 at a position corresponding to the discharge port 3515 to mount the stored ball count sensor 3530 by inserting it from behind. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 3515 pass through the stored ball count sensor 3530 and are discharged to the outside without being returned to the game area 5a again. The connector of the stored ball count sensor 3530 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 via wiring (not shown), and the detection signal from the stored ball count sensor 3530 is input to the peripheral control board 1510. It is

The upper wall of the ball discharge portion 3425 receives the game ball flowing down from the ball outlet 3405b, which is the downstream end of the arc-shaped ball passage 3405 in the ball receiving portion 3410, and receives the game ball flowing down from the above-described first big winning port 2005. It is inclined downward to the left when viewed from the front so that it rolls toward the opening/closing plate. This left-downward sloping surface is configured to be arranged on the same plane as the opening plate of the first big prize winning opening 2005 .

The upper wall of the ball discharge part 3425 can be reinforced by reinforcing the upper surface of the upper wall of the ball discharge part 3425. A plurality of rib portions 3527 are formed in the vertical and horizontal directions to form three spaces. As a result, the discharge space 3422 can be formed from the lower surface of the rib portion 3527 extending in the left-right direction to the lower wall of the ball discharge portion 3425, which divides and forms the three spaces.

Of the three spaces, in the space on the right side as viewed from the front, a storage space LED board 3545 on which a plurality of LEDs 3540 (three full-color LEDs in this embodiment) are mounted to brightly illuminate the storage space 3415 is inserted. A substrate groove 3550 is formed to be attached to the front, and a plurality of LEDs 3555 (in this embodiment, five full-color LEDs) that brightly illuminate the discharge space 3422 are mounted in the central space when viewed from the front. A board groove 3565 into which the spatial LED board 3560 is inserted and attached is formed.

An LED driver IC (not shown) is mounted on the opposite side of the storage space LED board 3545 where the plurality of LEDs 3540 are mounted, and transmits control signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. A connector 3547 for is mounted. When the control signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is input to the connector 3547 via wiring (not shown), it is transmitted to the LED driver (not shown), and the light emission mode is based on the control signal (serial data). Lighting control (including gradation lighting) of the plurality of LEDs 3540 is performed based on (for example, luminance and emission color). As a result, the storage space 3415 is illuminated brightly so that the number of game balls stored in the storage space 3415 and the state in which they are being stored can be easily visually recognized by the player.

An LED driver IC (not shown) is mounted on the opposite side of the discharge space LED board 3560 where the plurality of LEDs 3555 are mounted, and transmits control signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. A connector 3557 for is mounted. When the control signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is input to the connector 3557 via wiring (not shown), it is transmitted to the LED driver (not shown), and the light emission mode is based on the control signal (serial data). Lighting control (including gradation lighting) of the plurality of LEDs 3555 is performed based on (for example, luminance and emission color). As a result, when the discharge space 3422 is illuminated brightly, the characters "GET" formed on the cover body 3435 are raised and can be visually recognized by the player.

The ball ejection plate 3505 is operated by the above-described mechanical device (not shown). This mechanism device (not shown) is connected to the above-described sphere distribution solenoid 3462 controlled by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 and the columnar portion of the sphere distribution section 3450 (not shown). In addition to the ball distribution unit drive mechanism, the storage solenoid 3500 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the ball storage plate drive mechanism (not shown) connected to the ball storage plate 3490, Further, an opening solenoid 3570 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and a ball ejection plate drive mechanism (not shown) connected to the ball ejection plate 3505 are provided. When the opening solenoid 3570 is energized and driven by the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the plunger of the opening solenoid 3570 exerts an urging force (compression spring) exerted by the urging spring (compression spring) through which the plunger of the opening solenoid 3570 is inserted. 3475), the linear movement is transmitted to the ball discharge plate 3505 via the drive mechanism for the ball discharge plate, and the ball discharge plate 3505 is moved to the cutout portion 3475. It is possible to move from a state in which the ball storing portion 3420 is advanced to the vicinity of the open end of the ball storage portion 3420 to close the ball storage portion 3420, and to be in an operating position in which the notch portion 3475 is opened. On the other hand, when the opening solenoid 3570 is energized by the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the driven state is released, the plunger of the opening solenoid 3570 is inserted into a biasing spring (compression spring). The urging force of the spring (that is, the restoring force of the compression spring) naturally returns from the retracted state to the forward state. The ejector plate 3505 can return from a retracted position that opens the notch 3475 to an advanced position near the open end of the ball reservoir 3420 that closes the notch 3475 . A notch 3567 is formed near the upper rear end of the right wall of the ball discharger 3425 as viewed from the front so as not to interfere with the operation of the drive mechanism for the ball discharger.

The storage space 3415 is closed when the ball discharging plate 3505 is placed at the original position closing the notch 3475 and when the ball storage plate 3490 is placed at the operating position where the ball storage plate 3490 advances to the vicinity of the open end of the ball storage portion 3420. In a state where a plurality of game balls are stored in the ball storage plate 3490, the ball storage plate 3490 is inclined downward toward the notch 3475 as described above. Since the ball pressure due to its own weight (hereinafter referred to as "ball pressure of the game ball") is applied from the storage space 3415 toward the discharge space 3422, the storage space 3415 moves in the horizontal direction due to the ball pressure of the stored game ball. is restricted by the guide groove 3510 to prevent the notch 3475 from being opened.

When the ball ejection plate 3505 is placed in the operating position to open the notch 3475 , the storage space 3415 of the ball storage portion 3420 and the ejection space 3422 of the ball ejection portion 3425 are in communication with each other through the notch 3475 . Become. When the ball storage plate 3490 is arranged in the operating position where it advances to the vicinity of the open end of the ball storage part 3420, the game balls stored on the upper surface of the ball storage plate 3490 move from the storage space 3415 toward the discharge space 3422. It flows in and falls toward the ball discharge passage 3520 on the lower wall of the ball discharge part 3425, passes through this ball discharge passage 3520, the discharge port 3515, and the stored ball count sensor 3530 to return to the game area 5a again. It can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the substrate holder 1200 and collected in the island facility of the game hall. On the other hand, when the ball ejection plate 3505 is placed in the original position to close the notch 3475, the notch 3475 separates the storage space 3415 of the ball storage portion 3420 and the ejection space 3422 of the ball ejection portion 3425. It will be in a non-communication state through. As a result, the sphere storage plate 3490 is placed in the operating position where it advances to the vicinity of the open end of the sphere storage portion 3420, or the sphere storage plate 3490 retreats rearward (in the depth direction) outside of the bottom surface of the sphere storage portion 3420. A game ball flowing in from the storage space 3415 toward the discharge space 3422 can be blocked regardless of the state in which it is arranged.

It should be noted that the opening solenoid 3570 will not be driven when the power is cut off due to a power failure (or when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off by an attendant such as a pachinko parlor clerk) in a normal non-energized state. , the ball ejection plate 3505 is in the original position closing the notch 3475 . For this reason, if the ball discharge plate 3505 is arranged in the operating position to open the notch 3475, that is, the storage space 3415 of the ball storage part 3420 and the discharge space 3422 of the ball discharge part 3425 are separated from each other by the notch 3475. When a power failure occurs while the ball discharge plate 3505 is in communication with the ball discharge plate 3505, the ball discharge plate 3505 naturally returns to the original position to close the notch 3475. By making the discharge space 3422 of 3425 and the discharge space 3422 non-communication via the notch 3475, a game ball flowing from the storage space 3415 toward the discharge space 3422 is blocked.

A mechanism device (not shown) is inserted into a plurality of boss holes 3575 formed on the back side of the ball storing portion 3420 and fixed by screws (not shown). Through holes 3585 are formed in the cover body 3435 at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting holes 3580 formed on the front side of the base body 3430 . The cover body 3435 can be fixed to the base body 3430 by screwing it toward.

In addition, a plurality of panel fixing portions (not shown) are formed on the base body 3430, and the stored ball effect unit 3400 is inserted backward (in the depth direction) from the lower right front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It can be fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) from a through hole of a plurality of panel fixing portions formed in the base body 3430 and screwing it toward the panel plate 1110 . As a result, the entire rear surface of the ball receiving portion 3410 of the base body 3430 is in close contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear surface of the ball storage portion 3420 of the base body 3430 and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 are flush with each other. Approximately half of the depth distance dimension of the ball discharging portion 3425 of the base body 3430 is arranged in a state of protruding from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the depth direction.

[5-8-3b. Operation of the storage ball production unit]
Next, the operation of the stored ball effect unit 3400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. Here, first, the conditions under which the stored ball effect unit 3400 starts the effect operation will be briefly described.

In this embodiment, as described above, the stored ball effect unit 3400 is attached and fixed to the lower right front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that when the player is hitting the right hand, the game is played. A game ball flowing down the area 5a can be received by a ball receiving port 3405a of the stored ball effect unit 3400. - 特許庁

The ball distribution section 3450 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 is operated by controlling the ball distribution solenoid 3462 by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 as described above. The ball storage plate 3490 and the ball ejection plate 3505 of the 3400 are operated by controlling the storage solenoid 3500 and the release solenoid 3570 by the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 as described above.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure), every time a predetermined time arrives (predetermined cycle) , the ball-swinging solenoid 3462 is controlled to repeat a series of operations in which the ball-swinging part 3450 is moved from the original position to the operating position and then returned from the operating position to the original position. In this embodiment, 100 game balls per minute are shot (launched) toward the game area 5a by the shooting device 540. , when the player hits to the right, the time is set for one ball to be received (entered) in the general winning hole 2001a provided in the stored ball presentation unit 3400 when four balls are fired.

On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 can proceed with the performance based on the command from the main control board 1310, and controls the retention solenoid 3500 and the opening solenoid 3570.

When the command from the main control board 1310 does not convey the establishment of the conditions for activating the stored ball effect unit, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the opening solenoid 3570 to dispose the ball ejection plate 3505 at the original position and cut it out. While keeping the portion 3475 closed, the storage solenoid 3500 is controlled to keep the ball storage plate 3490 in the original position. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the storage passage 3465 is not caught by the upper surface of the ball storage plate 3490, and falls directly toward the ball discharge passage 3487 on the lower wall of the ball storage portion 3420. It is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the substrate holder 1200 without being returned to the game area 5a through the discharge port 3485, and is collected by the island facility of the game hall.

When the command from the main control board 1310 indicates that the conditions for activating the stored ball effect unit are established, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the opening solenoid 3570 to dispose the ball ejection plate 3505 at the original position and turn it off. The notch 3475 is kept closed, and the storage solenoid 3500 is controlled to keep the sphere storage plate 3490 positioned from the original position to the operating position. As a result, the game ball passing through the storage passage 3465 is received by the upper surface of the ball storage plate 3490 and stored in the storage space 3415 . At this time, since the base body 3430 and the cover body 3435 are molded from a transparent resin as described above, when the cover body 3435 is attached to the base body 3430 and fixed at a predetermined position, the storage A game ball stored in the space 3415 can be visually recognized through the cover body 3435 .

Then, the peripheral control board 1510 maintains this state when the command from the main control board 1310 does not convey the establishment of the stored ball discharge performance execution start condition in the state where the stored ball performance unit activation condition is established. On the other hand, when the command from the main control board 1310 indicates that the conditions for starting execution of the stored ball discharge performance are established, the opening solenoid 3570 is controlled to dispose the ball discharge plate 3505 from the original position to the operating position. The state in which the notch 3475 is opened is maintained until a predetermined stored ball discharge time (in this embodiment, it is set to 10 seconds) has elapsed), and the storage solenoid 3500 is turned on. Continue to control and maintain the sphere reservoir plate 3490 in the operative position. As a result, the game balls received on the upper surface of the ball storage plate 3490 and stored in the storage space 3415 flow from the storage space 3415 toward the discharge space 3422 through the notch 3475, and the lower wall of the ball discharge portion 3425 The ball falls toward the ball discharge passage 3520, passes through the ball discharge passage 3520, the discharge port 3515, and the stored ball count sensor 3530, and the pachinko machine 1 passes through the board holder 1200 without being returned to the game area 5a. It is discharged to the outside and collected in the island facility of the game hall. At this time, the game ball stored in the storage space 3415 flows from the storage space 3415 toward the discharge space 3422 through the notch portion 3475 and falls toward the ball discharge passage 3520 on the lower wall of the ball discharge portion 3425. , rolling toward the discharge port 3515 through the ball discharge passage 3520 can be visually recognized through the cover body 3435 .

Then, when a predetermined stored ball discharge time arrives, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the opening solenoid 3570 to return the ball discharge plate 3505 from the operating position to the original position, thereby closing the notch 3475. is maintained, and the storage solenoid 3500 is controlled to maintain the state in which the ball storage plate 3490 is continuously placed in the actuated position. As a result, the game ball passing through the storage passage 3465 is received by the upper surface of the ball storage plate 3490 and stored in the storage space 3415 .

The peripheral control board 1510 activates the opening solenoid 3570 when the command from the main control board 1310 indicates that the condition for stopping the activation of the stored ball effect unit is established in a state where the condition for activating the stored ball effect unit is satisfied. The state in which the ball discharge plate 3505 is placed at the original position and the cutout portion 3475 is closed by controlling the ball ejection plate 3505 is controlled, and the ball storage plate 3490 is placed in the original position from the operating position by controlling the storage solenoid 3500. maintain. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the storage passage 3465 is not caught by the upper surface of the ball storage plate 3490, and falls directly toward the ball discharge passage 3487 on the lower wall of the ball storage portion 3420. It is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the substrate holder 1200 without being returned to the game area 5a through the discharge port 3485, and is collected by the island facility of the game hall. At this time, the game ball that has passed through the storage passage 3465 is not caught by the upper surface of the ball storage plate 3490 and falls directly toward the ball discharge passage 3487 on the lower wall of the ball storage portion 3420. It can be seen through the cover body 3435 as it rolls through toward the outlet 3485 .

Here, as the "stored ball effect unit activation condition", a lottery based on acceptance of game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, which will be described later, wins a 14R short-time jackpot and a jackpot game is executed. 14R short time jackpot is won by lottery of the second special pattern based on the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2004 by continuing the right hitting when winning the normal figure in the state of the time saving state. A jackpot game is being executed, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives a determination result notification command corresponding to each of these lottery results from the main control board 1310 to proceed with the effect. In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, a small hit is won by a lottery based on acceptance of game balls into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the big win game is continued after the end of the small win game. may occur. For this reason, as the "reserved ball effect unit activation condition", furthermore, the game ball that entered the first big prize hole 2005 and was distributed to the specific area between the specific area and the discharge area by the distribution member and received A case can also be cited in which the peripheral control board 1510 receives a specific area entry command from the main control board 1310 to inform that the specific area sensor 2512a has detected the .

As the "stored ball discharge effect execution start condition", the state in which the above-mentioned 14R short-time jackpot is won and the jackpot game is being executed (lottery based on acceptance of game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 (Including the case where a small win is won and the big win game continues after the end of the small win game.), 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds, 14 rounds. A command to start an even-numbered round such as (jackpot round start command according to the number of rounds) is received from the main control board 1310 by the peripheral control board 1510 to proceed with the production.

As the "stored ball production unit activation stop condition", the state in which the above-mentioned 14R short-time jackpot is won and the jackpot game is being executed is being executed.) is received from the main control board 1310 by the peripheral control board 1510 to proceed with the production. In addition, the state in which the 14R short-time jackpot is won and the jackpot game is being executed (including the state in which the jackpot game is continued after the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is finished) ends. The command to do may be a command to convey the closed state from the state in which the first large prize winning port 2005 and the second large prize winning port 2006 are opened when the 14 rounds are completed.

Next, the operation of the stored ball effect unit 3400 controlled by the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

As described above, when the ball distribution unit 3450 is in the original position, the game ball passing through the ball passage 3405 collides with the left slope of the triangular prism. While the game ball is guided to the downstream side of the ball passage 3405 as it is, when it is arranged at the operating position, the game ball passes through the ball passage 3405 on the right slope of the triangular prism. collide with each other and are guided to the ball storing portion 3420 .

After the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the ball distribution section 3450 is placed at the original position as shown in FIG. When the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a is received by the ball receiving port 3405a of the stored ball effect unit 3400 when hitting to the right, the game passes through the ball passage 3405 on the left slope of the triangular prism of the ball distribution part 3450. Since the ball B is in a collision state, the game ball B passing through the ball passage 3405 is guided to the downstream side of the ball passage 3405 as it is and is discharged from the ball exit 3405b to the game area 5a again.

The game ball B discharged from the ball exit 3405b to the game area 5a again rolls toward the opening/closing plate of the first big winning hole 2005 as shown in FIG. A first route AR1 that does not pass through the ball passage 3405 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 is formed as a route that flows down toward the opening/closing plate of the first big prize opening 2005 during the beating. A second route AR2 passing through the ball passage 3405 of the ball effecting unit 3400 is formed. As described above, the base body 3430 and the cover body 3435 are molded from a transparent resin. A game ball passing through the ball passage 3405 of 3400 (that is, passing through the second route AR2) can be visually recognized through the cover body 3435.

Returning to FIG. 108, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the above-described predetermined time arrives (at each predetermined cycle described above), the ball distribution unit 3450 is moved from the original position to the operating position, the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a while the player is hitting to the right hits the ball receiving port 3405a of the stored ball effect unit 3400. When the received game ball B passing through the ball passage 3405 collides with the right slope of the triangular prism of the ball distribution portion 3450 and is guided to the ball storage portion 3420, it passes through the storage passage 3465 and is received in the general winning opening 2001a. (Balls can be entered) and the ball discharge plate 3505 is arranged at the original position to close the notch 3475 through the general prize winning opening sensor 3001a when the conditions for activating the stored ball production unit are not satisfied. The opening solenoid 3570 is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 so that the ball storage plate 3490 is arranged at the original position in which the ball storage plate 3490 retreats outward (in the depth direction) from the bottom surface of the ball storage portion 3420. As such, the storage solenoid 3500 is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 .

As a result, the game ball passing through the storage passage 3465 is not caught by the upper surface of the ball storage plate 3490, and falls directly toward the ball discharge passage 3487 on the lower wall of the ball storage portion 3420, passing through this ball discharge passage 3487. It is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the substrate holder 1200 without being returned to the game area 5a from the discharge port 3485, and is collected by the island facility of the game hall. The general winning hole sensor 3001a outputs the detection signal to the main control board 1310 when detecting the ball passage of the game ball B to itself. The main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 as a command (specified general winning hole entry command to be described later) that the game ball B has been received (entered) into the general winning hole 2001a. . At this time, the main control board 1310 transmits to the payout control board 633 as the above-mentioned payout command that the game ball B has been received (entered) into the general winning hole 2001a.

On the other hand, when the conditions for activating the stored ball effect unit are met, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the opening solenoid 3570 so that the ball discharge plate 3505 is arranged at the original position to close the notch 3475. At the same time, the storage solenoid 3500 is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 so that the ball storage plate 3490 moves forward to the vicinity of the open end of the ball storage portion 3420 and is positioned at the operating position.

As a result, the game ball passing through the storage passage 3465 is caught on the upper surface of the ball storage plate 3490 and stored in the storage space 3415 . This state is maintained when the stored ball effect unit activation stop condition is not established.

In a state where the condition for activating the stored ball effect unit is satisfied, when the condition for stopping the activation of the stored ball effect unit is satisfied, as shown in FIG. The opening solenoid 3570 is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 so that the ball storage plate 3490 advances to the vicinity of the open end of the ball storage portion 3420 so that the ball storage plate 3490 is placed in the operating position. At this time, the storage solenoid 3500 is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 .

As a result, the game ball B received on the upper surface of the ball storage plate 3490 and stored in the storage space 3415 flows from the storage space 3415 into the discharge space 3422 through the notch 3475 and the ball on the lower wall of the ball discharge portion 3425. The ball falls toward the discharge passage 3520, passes through the ball discharge passage 3520, the discharge port 3515, and the stored ball count sensor 3530 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the substrate holder 1200 without being returned to the game area 5a. and collected in the island facility of the game hall.

In this way, when the player is hitting to the right, the game ball B guided to the ball storage section 3420 of the storage ball effect unit 3400 rolls toward the opening/closing plate of the first prize winning opening 2005. First, as shown in FIG. 109, a first discharge route DR1 is formed through the discharge port 3515 of the ball discharge portion 3425 to the outside, and the ball is discharged through the discharge port 3485 of the ball storage portion 3420 to the outside. A second discharge route DR2 for discharge is formed. As described above, the base body 3430 and the cover body 3435 are molded from a transparent resin. The state in which the game ball B guided to the ball storage portion 3420 of the 3400 is discharged to the outside through the discharge port 3515 of the ball discharge portion 3425 (that is, the game ball passing through the first discharge route DR1) is defined by the cover body. The cover body 3435 can be visually recognized through the cover body 3435 and the state of being discharged to the outside through the discharge port 3485 of the ball storage part 3420 (that is, the game ball passing through the second discharge route DR2). can be seen through.

[5-9. back unit]
The back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 121. FIG. Fig. 111 is a front view of the game board showing the state where the lower front center decorative body is illuminated in the lower movable production unit. FIG. 113 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the lower rear central decoration body is illuminated, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the center decoration, the lower rear center decoration, the lower left side decoration, and the lower right side decoration are illuminated. 114 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state of FIG. 113 and the depressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. In addition, FIG. 115 shows four rotating decorations, a left side rotating decoration, a left sub-side rotating decoration, a right side rotating decoration, and a right sub-side rotating decoration in the lower movable production unit. It is an explanatory view schematically showing the decoration of. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the types (sizes) of arrows that are illuminated and displayed in the lower movable production unit.

Also, FIG. 117 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit. FIG. 120 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and the performance display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001b that detects the game ball B received in the general winning openings 2001b to 2001d of the front unit 2000, and a first start sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002. A mouth sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting mouth 2002 are provided (see FIG. 125).

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and has a box shape with an open front. The attached lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200 installed in the upper part in the back box, and the upper front installed in front of the upper rear movable production unit 3200 in the upper part in the back box. A movable production unit 3300 is provided.

[5-9-1. Lower movable production unit]
The lower movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 116 and the like. The lower movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower part in the back box, and a part of it is positioned in front of the lower part of the effect display device 1600 . The lower movable production unit 3100 includes a lower front center decoration unit 3110 attached near the front end of the back box below the production display device 1600, and a lower center production unit arranged behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110. 3120, and a lower left side effect unit 3150 and a lower right side effect unit 3170 arranged on both left and right sides of the lower center effect unit 3120, respectively.

The lower front center decoration unit 3110 includes a lower front center decoration body 3111 which is trapezoidal (inverted isosceles triangle with a flattened vertex) and has translucency. The lower front center decoration unit 3110 is positioned behind the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 in the state assembled to the game board 5 . The lower front center decoration body 3111 can be illuminated by the lower center decoration substrate of the lower center effect unit 3120 .

The lower central production unit 3120 is attached to a lower central elevating base 3121 which is attached to the rear of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 so as to be able to be raised and lowered in the back box, and to the front surface of the lower central elevating base 3121, and has translucency. and a lower center decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs arranged behind the lower rear center decoration 3122 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. omitted) and a central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part of the lower central elevating base 3121 .

In addition, although illustration is omitted, the lower central production unit 3120 includes a unit base attached to the back box, a pair of lifting guides attached to the unit base and guiding the lower central lifting base in the vertical direction, and a unit A rod-shaped arm member attached to the base so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth at the base end, a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member and inserted into the slit of the lower central elevating base 3121, and the arm member. and a lower center lift drive motor for rotating.

Although not shown, the lower central elevating base 3121 has a slit extending to the left and right, and a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member is slidably inserted into the slit. The lower center elevating base 3121 is driven by a lower center elevating drive motor between a lowered position where the whole is behind the lower front center decoration 3111 and a raised position where the whole is above the lower front center decoration 3111. Mounted so that it can be lifted.

The lower rear center decorative body 3122 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape and has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a arranged vertically. The lower rear center decoration 3122 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light from the LED of the lower center decoration substrate. The lower central decoration board is mounted with a plurality of LEDs so that each light emitting area 3122a of the lower rear central decoration 3122 can be independently illuminated, and the lower central elevating base 3121 is raised. Sometimes, it is mounted so that it can irradiate light toward the lower front central decorative body 3111 which is downward and forward.

Although not shown in detail, the central movable unit 3125 is attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 at intervals in the left-right direction, and each of them extends upward in a flat plate shape. A plurality of central rotary drive motors attached to a plurality of mounting bases with their rotary shafts oriented in the left-right direction, and a plurality of central rotary drive motors attached to the rotary shafts of the respective central rotary drive motors. and a plurality of cubic rotary ornaments 3126 covering the . A plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3126 are rotatable around a laterally extending axis by a central rotary drive motor, and are arranged coaxially in the lateral direction. In addition, each rotating decorative body 3126 has different decorative portions 3127 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 115). The plurality of rotary decorations 3126 can be independently rotated by their respective central rotary drive motors.

In addition, although illustration is omitted, the central movable unit 3125 is attached below each rotating decorative body 3126 on the upper surface of the lower central elevating base 3121, and has a plurality of units capable of irradiating light toward each rotating decorative body 3126. It has a bottom center top decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted. By appropriately lighting the LEDs of the lower center upper surface decoration substrate, each rotary decoration 3126 can be decorated with light.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a flat plate-shaped lower piece extending horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped side extending upward from the left end of the lower piece. It has a side part and a flat upper side part extending rightward from the upper end of the side part to the upper side of the lower piece part shorter than the lower piece part, and the front of the unit base of the lower central effect unit 3120 A left unit base installed in the back box on the left side of the view, and a cylindrical guide shaft near the right side of the left unit base whose lower and upper ends are attached to the lower and upper pieces, respectively. and a rod-shaped male screw member which is rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by the lower piece and the upper piece of the left unit base so as to extend parallel to the guide shaft, and has a male screw formed on its outer circumference. , a lower left side elevating base 3151 having a nut screwed to the male screw member and slidably attached to the guide shaft, and a lower left side elevation base 3151 attached to the left unit base and rotating the male screw member A side lifting drive motor, a translucent lower left side decorative body 3152 attached to the front surface of the lower left side lifting base 3151, and a right side of the lower left side decorative body 3152 mounted to the left. a lower left side decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted.

The lower left side decoration body 3152 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3152a arranged in a vertical direction, and by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decoration substrate, each light emitting region 3152a can be independently decorated with light emission.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper part of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so as to be slidable in the left and right direction, and has a slit extending back and forth, A lower left slide driving motor is attached to the rear side of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so that the rotating shaft extends upward under the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotating shaft of the lower left slide driving motor. a cam member having a cylindrical slide pin slidably inserted into a slit of the slider on the distal end side extending horizontally from the proximal end side of the cage.

Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the slider and has a mounting base extending upward in a flat plate shape, and a state in which the rotation axis is directed to the mounting base in the left and right direction. It has an attached left side rotation drive motor, and a cubic left side rotation decoration 3153 attached to the rotating shaft of the left side rotation drive motor and covering the outer periphery of the left side rotation drive motor. The left side rotating decorative body 3153 has different decorative portions 3154 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 115). In addition, the left side rotating decorative body 3153 is rotatable around a laterally extending axis by a left side rotating drive motor.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left side rotary decoration 3153 on the upper surface of the slider, and can irradiate light toward the left side rotary decoration 3153. It has a lower left side top decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The left side rotary decoration 3153 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED of the lower left side upper surface decoration substrate.

Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the sub mounting base A left sub-side rotation drive motor mounted with its rotational axis directed in the horizontal direction, and a left sub-side rotation cubic mounted on the rotational shaft of the left sub-side rotation drive motor and covering the outer periphery of the left sub-side rotation drive motor A decorative body 3155 is provided. The left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 has different decorations 3156 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 115). In addition, the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 is rotatable around a laterally extending axis by a left sub-side rotary drive motor.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 on the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base, and faces the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155. and a lower left subside top decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 can be decorated with light emission by properly lighting the LED of the lower left sub-side upper surface decorative substrate.

When the lower left side effect unit 3150 is assembled on the game board 5, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 attached to the left unit base is positioned at a height such that the left side rotating decorative body 3153 can enter below. It is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3126 when the lower central elevating base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is positioned (raised) to the rising end. In addition, the lower left side production unit 3150 has a left side rotary decoration body 3153 between the left sub-side rotary decoration body 3155 and the leftmost rotary decoration body 3126 of the lower central production unit 3120 when assembled on the game board 5. are spaced so that they can enter.

The lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the male screw member by the lower left side elevation drive motor, thereby moving the left side rotating decorative body 3153 together with the slider via the lower left side elevation base 3151 to the lower central effect unit 3120. The lower central elevating base 3121 can be lifted between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotary decoration 3126 at the lowered position and an elevated position at the same height as the left subside rotary decoration 3155 . In addition, the lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the cam member by the lower left slide drive motor, so that the left side rotary decoration body 3153 is moved to the appearance position adjacent to the lower center effect unit 3120 through the slider. , and a retracted position in which about half of it is positioned below the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 away from the lower central effect unit 3120, and can be slid in the left-right direction.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a flat plate-like lower piece extending horizontally, and a flat plate-like side extending upward from the right end of the lower piece. It has a side part and a flat plate-like upper side part extending leftward from the upper end of the side part to the upper side of the lower piece part and shorter than the lower piece part, and the front of the unit base of the lower central effect unit 3120 A right unit base mounted inside the back box on the right side of the view, and a cylindrical guide shaft near the left side of the right unit base whose lower and upper ends are attached to the lower and upper pieces, respectively. and a rod-shaped male screw member which is rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by the lower piece and the upper piece of the right unit base so as to extend parallel to the guide shaft, and has a male screw formed on its outer circumference. , a lower right side elevation base 3171 having a nut screwed to the male screw member and slidably attached to the guide shaft, and a lower right side elevation base 3171 attached to the right unit base and rotating the male screw member A side elevation drive motor, a translucent lower right side decoration 3172 attached to the front surface of the lower right side elevation base 3171, and a right side of the lower right side decoration 3172 attached to the right side. a lower right side decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted.

The lower right side decorative body 3172 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3172a arranged in a vertical direction, and by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right side decorative substrate to emit light, each light emitting region 3172a can be independently decorated with light emission.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the upper part of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so as to be slidable in the left and right direction, and has a slit extending back and forth. A lower right slide drive motor is attached to the rear side of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so that the rotation shaft extends upward under the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotation shaft of the lower right slide drive motor. a cam member having a cylindrical slide pin slidably inserted into a slit of the slider on the distal end side extending horizontally from the proximal end side of the cage.

Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the slider and has a mounting base extending upward in a flat plate shape, and a state in which the rotation axis is directed to the mounting base in the left and right direction. It has an attached right side rotation drive motor, and a cubic right side rotation decoration 3173 attached to the rotation shaft of the right side rotation drive motor and covering the outer circumference of the right side rotation drive motor. The right-side rotating decorative body 3173 has different decorative portions 3174 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 115). In addition, the right side rotating decorative body 3173 is rotatable around a laterally extending axis by a right side rotating drive motor.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right side rotary decoration 3173 on the upper surface of the slider, and can irradiate light toward the right side rotary decoration 3173. It has a lower right side top decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LEDs of the lower right side upper surface decorative substrate.

Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece portion of the right unit base and extends upward in a flat plate shape. A right sub-side rotation drive motor mounted with its rotational axis directed in the horizontal direction, and a cubic right sub-side rotation mounted on the rotation shaft of the right sub-side rotation drive motor and covering the outer circumference of the right sub-side rotation drive motor. A decorative body 3175 is provided. The right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 has different decorations 3176 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 115). In addition, the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 is rotatable around a laterally extending axis by a right sub-side rotating drive motor.

In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 on the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base, and faces the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175. and a lower right subside top decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED of the lower right sub-side upper surface decorative substrate.

When the lower right side effect unit 3170 is assembled on the game board 5, the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 attached to the right unit base is at a height such that the right side rotating decorative body 3173 can enter below. It is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3126 when the lower central elevating base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is positioned (raised) to the rising end. In addition, the lower right side effect unit 3170 has a right side rotating decorative body 3173 between the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 and the rightmost rotating decorative body 3126 of the lower central effect unit 3120 when assembled on the game board 5. are spaced to allow entry.

The lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the male screw member by the lower right side elevating drive motor, thereby moving the right side rotating decorative body 3173 together with the slider via the lower right side elevating base 3171 to the lower central effect unit 3120. The lower central elevating base 3121 can be lifted between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotary decoration 3126 at the lowered position and an elevated position at the same height as the right subside rotary decoration 3175 . In addition, the lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the cam member by the lower right slide drive motor, so that the right side rotating decorative body 3173 is moved to the appearance position adjacent to the lower center effect unit 3120 through the slider. , and a retracted position in which about half of it is positioned below the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 away from the lower central effect unit 3120, and can be slid in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 115, the lower movable production unit 3100 includes the decoration parts 3127 of the four rotating decoration bodies 3126, the decoration part 3154 of the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the decoration part 3156 of the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, and the right side rotation decoration body 3155. Different decorations are formed on the decoration portion 3174 of the side rotating decoration body 3173 and the decoration portion 3176 of the right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175, respectively. The four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are each formed in a dice-shaped cube and extend left and right. Decorations different from each other are formed on the first to fourth surfaces around the rotating shaft.

When the first surface of each of the four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the left subside rotating decoration 3155, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right subside rotating decoration 3175 faces the front, "凰" "first eye" "one eye" "second eye" "third eye" "four eyes" "one eye" "凰". In addition, when the second surface of each is turned to the front, it is "star", "super", "chi", "cha", "n", "su", "!", and "star" from the left. In addition, when the third side is facing the front, from the left, it is "!" Furthermore, when the fourth side is facing the front, from the left are "celebration", "!", "o", "me", "de", "to", "u", and "!!".

In this way, the surfaces of the four rotating decorations 3126, left side rotating decoration 3153, left subside rotating decoration 3155, right side rotating decoration 3173, and right subside rotating decoration 3175 are turned to the front. , a predetermined message can be shown to the player, and an expected value for a "big win" can be displayed depending on the content of the message.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 116, the lower movable production unit 3100 appropriately emits light from the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower rear center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172. "Arrows" of different sizes can be illuminated. Specifically, when only the lower front central decorative body 3111 is illuminated, a triangular "small arrow" with the vertex of the isosceles triangle pointing downward can be illuminated (see FIGS. 111 and 116(a)). reference). In addition, when the lower front center decoration 3111 and the raised lower rear center decoration 3122 are illuminated, a downward-pointing "middle arrow" having a bar extending upward larger than the "small arrow" is illuminated. (see FIGS. 112 and 116(b)). Furthermore, in the state of the "center arrow", the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 are raised, and the lower front central decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decoration body are lifted. When all of the side decorations 3172 are illuminated, it is possible to illuminate a "large arrow" in which the upper end of an arrow that is larger than the "middle arrow" and is directed downward spreads to the left and right (FIGS. 113 and 116(c)). ).

In this way, it is possible to illuminate three arrows of different sizes, "small arrow", "medium arrow" and "large arrow". ” can be illuminated to indicate that the expected value is high.

Next, an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the lower movable production unit 3100 is in the lower central production unit 3120, as shown in FIG. , and the four rotary decorations 3126 attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 are positioned so as to contact the upper end of the lower front central decoration 3111 in a front view.

In addition, in the normal state, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, the lower left side elevating base 3151 is positioned slightly above the upper end of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 and in a lowered position that is almost invisible from the front. The left side rotary decoration 3153 is separated leftward from the lower central effect unit 3120 via the slider, and is positioned at a retreat position where about half of it is below the left subside rotary decoration 3155, and the left subside rotary decoration 3155 is in the game It is located in the vicinity of the left end near the bottom from the center in the vertical direction in the region 5a.

Furthermore, in the normal state, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, the lower right side elevating base 3171 is positioned slightly above the upper end of the lower front center decorative unit 3110 and in a lowered position that is almost invisible from the front. The right side rotary decoration 3173 is separated rightward from the lower central effect unit 3120 via the slider, and is located at a retracted position where about half of it is below the right subside rotary decoration 3175, and the right subside rotary decoration 3175 is in the game It is located in the vicinity of the right end near the bottom from the center in the vertical direction in the region 5a.

In this normal state, as one of the effects provided to the player, for example, the first special lottery result or the second special According to the result of the lottery, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, and the decorative parts 3127 facing forward in each rotating decorative body 3126 whose rotation is stopped are combined. is visually recognized by the player. Thereby, depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops in a desired combination, the player can feel nervous and excited, and can enjoy the movable presentation by the four rotating decorative bodies 3126.例文帳に追加

Then, when the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 whose rotation is stopped satisfies a predetermined condition, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 attached to the lower central elevating base 3121 by the lower central decorative substrate. to emit light to decorate the lower front center decoration body 3111 of the lower front center decoration unit 3110 positioned in front.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 111, a downward arrow is displayed by the lower front central decorative body 3111, so that the player's line of sight is directed downward to the game area 5a by the downward arrow. It is possible to guide the player to the effect operation unit 301 arranged in the above, to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and to facilitate participation in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. This allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance and suppress the decline in interest.

Alternatively, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B from the normal state to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lower central lifting base 3121 Raise from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the game is played. As well as being able to surprise the player, the player can be made to think that something good is happening, and the expectation for the game can be heightened. After that, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, and a combination of decoration parts 3127 facing forward in each rotating decorative body 3126 whose rotation is stopped is given to the player. make visible. As a result, when the rotation of the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 stops in a desired combination for the player, a "jackpot" (advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (sometimes referred to as a "jackpot game state") is achieved. It can be made to think that it must be a lottery result that generates a lottery result), and the player is thrilled and excited depending on whether the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops in a desired combination, and the expectation for the lottery result. can be raised. Then, when the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 whose rotation is stopped satisfies a predetermined condition, the plurality of lower central decorative substrates attached to the ascending lower central elevating base 3121 LEDs are made to emit light, and the lower rear center decorative body 3122 arranged in front and the lower front central decorative body 3111 arranged in the lower front are decorated with light. As a result, as shown in FIG. 112, a large downward arrow is illuminated by the lower rear center ornament 3122 and the lower front center ornament 3111, so that the light emission display of the large downward arrow causes the game to be played. The player's line of sight can be guided to the effect operation unit 301 arranged below the game area 5a to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and the effect operation unit 301 can be operated by the light emitting display of the large arrow. By operating it, it is possible to make the player think that it will be a "big hit", and the player can be made to operate the production operation section 301 to enjoy the player participation type production.

Furthermore, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the normal state, the lower central lifting base 3121 from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the game is played. As well as being able to surprise the player, the player can be made to think that something good is happening, and the expectation for the game can be heightened. Subsequently, after sliding the left and right side rotating decorative bodies 3153 and right side rotating decorative bodies 3173 to the appearance positions on the central side, the respective lower left side lifting bases 3151 and lower right side lifting bases 3171 are respectively slid. Raise to raised position (see Figure 113). As a result, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the four rotating decorations 3126, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be made to think that the lottery result is a "big hit", thereby increasing the player's expectation for the game. After that, after rotating the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the four rotating decorations 3126, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175, the rotation is stopped and left The decoration part 3156 of the sub-side rotary decoration 3155, the decoration part 3154 of the left-side rotary decoration 3153, the decoration parts 3127 of the four rotary decorations 3126, the decoration part 3174 of the right-side rotary decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotary decoration The player is allowed to visually recognize the combination of the decorative parts 3176 of the body 3175 . At this time, since the plurality of decorative portions 3127 includes the decorative portion 3127 decorated with numbers, by stopping the rotation so that the decorative portions 3127 with numbers face forward, the countdown can be started. The countdown effect makes the player think that the result of the lottery must be a ``jackpot'', thereby enhancing the interest in the game. When the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, left-side rotating decoration 3153, four rotating decorations 3126, right-side rotating decoration 3173, and right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 stop rotating and the countdown ends, The lower front center decoration 3111, the lower rear center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172 are decorated with light. As a result, as shown in FIG. 113, an even larger downward arrow (giant arrow) is displayed by light emission, so that the player can operate the effect operation section 301 arranged at the tip of the giant arrow. , the player can be convinced that the lottery result is a ``jackpot'', and the player can be made to operate the presentation operation section 301 without fail. When the giant arrow is illuminated, a message explaining the effect operation section 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation part 301 is raised, and the effect operation part 301 is rotated. Rotate the operation unit 302 at high speed (see FIG. 114). As a result, the rotary operation unit 302 rotates at a high speed, so that the interest of the player can be increased, so that the pressing operation unit 303 can be reliably operated to entertain the player and reduce the interest. can be suppressed.

As an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, in FIG. The player is informed that the higher the rotation speed of the part 302, the higher the expected value of a "big hit". In other words, the expected value is represented by the rotational speed of the rotary operation unit 302, and the effect display device 1600 displays the effect image for informing the player of the expected value.

On the other hand, in FIG. 114, as the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes, as shown in FIG. An effect image suggesting an operation method of the effect operation unit 301 that prompts the player's operation by means of an "arrow" illuminated by the body 3152, the lower right side decorative body 3172, etc. may be displayed. Specifically, effects images such as "Press the button!", "Turn the dial!", "Turn the dial to the left!", "Turn the dial to the right!", etc. are displayed. As a result, it is possible to accurately perform the operation on the performance operation section 301, and to surely enjoy the player-participation type performance that operates the performance operation section 301. - 特許庁

Then, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect image may be used to display the expected value of the "big hit". Using four rotating decorations 3126, a left side rotating decoration 3153, a left subside rotating decoration 3155, a right side rotating decoration 3173, and a right subside rotating decoration 3175, each of which is formed in a dice shape, the expected value is calculated. You may make it display.

As a display of expected values using four dice-shaped rotary decorations 3126, left side rotary decoration 3153, left subside rotary decoration 3155, right side rotary decoration 3173, and right subside rotary decoration 3175. is a combination of each decoration part 3127, decoration part 3154, decoration part 3156, decoration part 3174, and decoration part 3176 that face the front by rotating and stopping, and produces an effect of displaying the expected value of "big hit". . Specifically, when using only the four rotary decorations 3126 of the lower center effect unit 3120 in the center, there are, for example, the following three patterns. In pattern a1, the expected value is displayed in a state in which the combination of decoration parts 3127 facing the front when the four rotating decoration bodies 3126 stop rotating is in a state in which the player cannot read the meaning of the combination. no pattern. The pattern a2 has a relatively high expected value in a state in which each rotating decorative body 3126 stops rotating with the second surface facing the front and the combination of the decorative parts 3127 is "C", "C", "N", and "S". A pattern indicating that Pattern a3 has a very high expected value, in which each rotating decorative body 3126 stops rotating with the third surface facing the front, and the combination of the decorative parts 3127 is "ge", "ki", "a", and "tsu". A pattern indicating that In this way, the expected value can be displayed by the patterns displayed by stopping the rotation of the four rotary decorations 3126, and the expected value increases in the order of pattern a1, pattern a2, and pattern a3.

Furthermore, as an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, all four rotating decorations 3126, left side rotating decoration 3153, left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, right side rotating decoration 3173, right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 ( Eight) dice-shaped rotating bodies are used, and the combination of the decoration part 3127, the decoration part 3154, the decoration part 3156, the decoration part 3174, and the decoration part 3176 displays the expected value of "big hit". You can do it. Specifically, there are the following six patterns. The pattern b1 is a random combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176 whose rotation is stopped (no display of the expected value). In pattern b2, the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 is "o" or "star", the left side rotary decoration 3153 is "!" A combination of "!" or "o" for the right side rotary decoration 3173 and "o" or "star" for the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 (chance display). In pattern b3, the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 is "o" or "star", the left side rotary decoration 3153 is "!" A combination of "!" or "o" for the right-side rotary decoration 3173 and "o" or "star" for the right-side rotary decoration 3175 (Gekiatsu display). In pattern b4, the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 is "o" or "star", the left side rotary decoration 3153 is "super", and the four central rotary decorations 3126 are "chi", "cha", "n" and "su". ”, the right side rotary decoration 3173 is “!”, and the right subside rotary decoration 3175 is a combination of “凰” or “STAR” (super chance display). In pattern b5, the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 is "o" or "star", the left side rotary decoration 3153 is "super", and the four central rotary decorations 3126 are "ge", "ki", "a", and "tsu". ”, the right side rotary decoration 3173 is “!”, and the right subside rotary decoration 3175 is “凰” or “星” (Super Gekiatsu display). In pattern b6, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "Congratulations", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "!", the four center rotating decorations 3126 are "O", "Me", "De", and "To", and the right side is A combination of "U" for the rotary decoration 3173 and "!!" for the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 ("big hit" confirmed). In this way, it is displayed by stopping the rotation of the eight rotating bodies: the four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175. The expected value can be displayed according to the pattern, and the expected value increases in the order of pattern b1, pattern b2, pattern b3, pattern b4, pattern b5, and pattern b6.

In addition, in the above-described effect, if the player does not operate the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after being prompted to operate the effect operation unit 301, the effect of displaying the expected value described above is not performed. The luminous display of "arrow" is also extinguished. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after being prompted to operate the effect operation unit 301, the remaining effect time is used to continuously perform the effect of displaying the above-described expected value. When the effect time ends, the above-described effect ends, and the light emitting display of the "arrow" is extinguished, and the effect ends.

Thus, according to the lower movable effect unit 3100, when the game state changes due to the game being played in the game area 5a in the normal state (the game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 Depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of B), the four rotating decorations 3126 lined up on the left and right above the lower front center decoration 3111 rotate, or the lower center The four rotary decorations 3126 aligned to the left and right by the lifting base 3121 rise together with the lower rear center decoration 3122, or the four rotary decorations 3126 raised by the lower center lifting base 3121 rotate, and the lower left A pair of left side rotating decorative body 3153 and right side rotating decorative body 3173 are slid in the horizontal direction by the lower left slide drive motor of the side effect unit 3150 and the lower right slide drive motor of the lower right side effect unit 3170 (slide mechanism). The left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173 rotate, and the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3153 rotate by the slide mechanism and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171. The four rotating decorations 3126, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are aligned in the left-right direction, and the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 rotate. , so that the player can see the movable effect such as the central movable unit 3125 (four rotating decorative bodies 3126), the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the left sub-side rotating decoration body. The decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 can be noticed, and the movement performance by them can be enjoyed.

In addition, when the lower central elevating base 3121 is positioned at the lower end, the lower rear central decoration 3122 is illuminated and the lower front central decoration 3111 is illuminated to display a downward arrow or elevate the lower center. By raising the base 3121 and illuminating the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111 with a plurality of LEDs on the lower central decoration board, a large downward arrow can be illuminated, or a pair of lower left sides can be raised and lowered. By raising the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 and causing the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to emit light, a larger downward arrow can be displayed by light emission. The player can be entertained by the effect, and the player's line of sight can be guided to the downward direction of the effect operation part 301 by the illuminated downward arrow, and the player can operate the effect operation part 301. can encourage In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, and the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to participate in the player participation type effect. and entertain.

Therefore, since it is possible to perform various movable effects, light emitting effects, and player participation type effects as described above, it is possible to provide various patterns of effects to the player by appropriately combining them. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored and to make it difficult for the player to anticipate the performance pattern, it is possible to surprise the player by performing an unexpected performance. can be entertained and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower rear center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, the lower right side decoration 3172, etc. are caused to emit light to display a downward arrow, so that the player can see the downward arrow. When prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 displays a effect image prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, a effect image explaining the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous. By displaying an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of and the effect operation unit 301, the player can be strongly encouraged to participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. The effect operation section 301 can be easily operated, and the player's participatory effect can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

[5-9-2. Upper rear movable production unit]
The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119 and the like. The upper rear movable production unit 3200 is attached above the production display device 1600 and in the upper part of the back box. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 comprises an upper rear left unit 3210 attached to the upper left corner inside the back box and an upper rear right unit 3230 attached to the upper right corner inside the back box.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper rear left unit 3210 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the left base 3211 attached in the back box and to the left base 3211 so as to be slidable in an oblique direction from the upper left to the lower right. a linear rack gear 3213 attached to the left slider 3212; an upper rear left drive motor 3214 attached to the left base 3211 with its rotational axis facing forward and backward; A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the drive motor 3214 and connected to the input side of the rotating shaft of the upper rear left drive motor 3214, a drive gear 3215 in the form of a spur gear connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250, A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3216 meshing with the drive gear 3215 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3216 meshing with the first transmission gear 3216 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211 a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3217, a third transmission gear 3218 meshing with the second transmission gear 3217 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211, a third transmission gear 3218 and a rack gear 3213, respectively and a spur-like pinion gear 3219 that meshes with and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211 .

In addition, the upper rear left unit 3210 is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3212 and has a flat plate-like upper rear left decoration 3220 extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and has a front surface. and an upper rear left decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear left decoration 3220 can be decorated with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear left decoration substrate to emit light.

The upper rear left unit 3210 can move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 up and down via the rack gear 3213 by driving the upper rear left driving motor 3214 .

The upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the right base 3231 and the right base 3231 so as to be slidable in an oblique direction from the upper right to the lower left, although detailed illustration is omitted. a straight rack gear 3233 attached to the right slider 3232; an upper rear right drive motor 3234 attached to the right base 3231 with its rotational axis facing forward and backward; A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to a motor 3234 and connected to the input side of the rotating shaft of the upper rear right drive motor 3234; A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3236 that meshes with the gear 3235 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3236 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3236 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3237, a third transmission gear 3238 meshing with the second transmission gear 3237 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231, and meshing with the third transmission gear 3238 and the rack gear 3233 respectively. and a spur-like pinion gear 3239 rotatably attached to the right base 3231 .

In addition, the upper rear right unit 3230 is attached to the lower end of the right slider 3232 and has a flat plate-shaped upper rear right decoration 3240 that extends left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the upper rear right decoration 3240 and has a front surface. an upper rear right decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear right decoration 3240 can be decorated with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear right decoration substrate to emit light.

The upper rear right unit 3230 can move the upper rear right decorative body 3240 up and down via the rack gear 3233 by driving the upper rear right drive motor 3234 .

The clutch mechanism 3250 has a cylindrical storage case 3251 and a plurality of protrusions 3252a radially extending to the vicinity of the inner surface of the storage case 3251 in the storage case 3251. An input member 3252 to which the rotating shaft of the rear right drive motor 3234 is attached, and a plurality of transmission grooves 3253a in which the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252 is inserted in the housing case 3251 with a gap in the circumferential direction. A plurality of cam surfaces 3253b formed so that the distance between them and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 becomes narrower as they approach the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 protruding from the storage case 3251. , a plurality of rollers 3254 inserted between a plurality of cam surfaces 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the storage case 3251. A main body housing 3256 having a tightening spring 3255 that tightens from the outside, a housing recess 3256a that houses the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and that is attached to the left base 3211 or the right base 3231, and the main body housing A lid member 3257 that closes a housing recess 3256a of the output member 3256 and through which the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 penetrates; (See FIGS. 119(a)-(c)).

In the clutch mechanism 3250, when the input member 3252 is rotated by the upper rear left driving motor 3214 or the upper rear right driving motor 3234, the plurality of projecting portions 3252a of the input member 3252 engage the circumferential ends of the transmission grooves 3253a of the output member 3253. As a result, the output member 3253 rotates, and the driving gear 3215 or the driving gear 3235 attached to the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 rotates. That is, the clutch mechanism 3250 can transmit the rotation from the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to the drive gear 3215 or drive gear 3235 side as it is.

In addition, when the clutch mechanism 3250 rotates the output member 3253 via the output shaft 3253c from the drive gear 3215 or drive gear 3235 side, the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 moves toward the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252. Therefore, the space between the cam surface 3253b and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 becomes narrow, and the roller 3254 is caught in the space. As a result, the rotation of the output member 3253 is blocked, the rotation of the driving gear 3215 or the driving gear 3235 is locked, and the rotation from the driving gear 3215 or the driving gear 3235 side is transmitted via the input member 3252 to the upper rear side. There is no transmission to the left drive motor 3214 or upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Therefore, even if gravity acts to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward, the clutch mechanism 3250 rotates the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 through the output member 3253 . Since the rotation is locked, the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 do not move downward without permission, and a load is applied to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at arbitrary positions.

In the clutch mechanism 3250 of this embodiment, the storage case 3251 is tightened from the outer peripheral side by a tightening spring 3255 made of a coil spring, and the tightening spring 3255 and the storage case 3251 are housed in the storage recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. Therefore, when the rotational load (torque) applied to the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or drive gear 3235 through the output shaft 3253c becomes larger than a predetermined amount, the tightening force (biasing force) of the tightening spring 3255 ), the circumferential end portion of the transmission groove 3253 a of the output member 3253 abuts against the projection 3252 a of the input member 3252 , and the rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252 . As a result, when an attempt is made to rotate the output member 3253 from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that tightens the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the rotational force is transferred to the upper rear left side. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 is strongly caught and the lock cannot be released, and the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 may be damaged. can be prevented.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 119(d), the clutch mechanism 3250 inserts two rollers 3254 between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 may be biased by the lock spring 3260 toward the protruding portion 3252a close thereto. As a result, when a force to rotate the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately moved between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251. The rotation (rotation angle) of the output member 3253 from the action of rotation from the upper rear left decoration 3220 side and the upper rear right decoration 3240 side until the lock is applied is can be reduced as much as possible.

Next, an effect using the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In a normal state, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is positioned above the effect display device 1600 and behind the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 is in a state where it cannot be visually recognized from the player side. In this normal state, the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and the upper rear right driving motor 3234 are in a non-driving state, respectively. , the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the rotation of the drive gear 3215 and the drive gear 3235 is locked via the output member 3253, and the upper The rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 do not move downward without permission.

Accordingly, in order to prevent the downward movement of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and the upper rear right driving motor 3234 are continuously driven or moved downward. There is no need to provide an electric lock mechanism for blocking the pachinko machine 1, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. In addition, the presence of the clutch mechanism 3250 can prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving freely. Even if vibrations and accelerations are applied in such a case, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 remain in the origin state at the time of shipment, and unnecessary origin adjustment is not required. It is possible to reduce the labor involved in installing the game board 5, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In this normal state, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and When the upper rear right driving motor 3234 is driven, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are moved obliquely downward toward the center through the clutch mechanism 3250 , and the upper rear left decoration 3220 is moved. and the left end of the upper rear right decoration 3240 abut to form one large decoration (see FIG. 117). As a result, a large decorative body extending to the left and right appears on the front upper portion of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Thus, according to the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, the upper rear left drive motor 3214, the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between each of the decorations 3240), vibrations from the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, other movable decorations, etc., and the left slider 3212, right slider 3232, and upper Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 trying to descend due to the gravity acting on the rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, the output The cam surface 3253b of the member 3253 presses the roller 3254 toward the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the output member 3253 side (upper rear side) is pushed. Transmission of rotation from the left ornament 3220 side and the upper rear right ornament 3240 side to the upper rear left driving motor 3214 side and the upper rear right driving motor 3234 side is cut off, and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from descending freely, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved unexpectedly through the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232. To prevent movement (falling) and to avoid unintended movements of an upper rear left decoration body 3220 and an upper rear right decoration body 3240, thereby giving a player a sense of distrust. This allows the player to enjoy the movements of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side are going to descend, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250, so that the left slider 3212 and Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary height position through the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be varied. A player can be shown a variety of performance patterns of lifting and stopping at a position, and the player is less likely to get bored with the movable performance of the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can be made

In addition, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at any position in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3240 can be stopped. It is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and it is possible to prevent early damage to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 due to overload. Disturbance of the game due to breakage of the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be avoided to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119(d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are locked by the lock springs 3260. In the case of urging toward the protruding portion 3252a close to each of them, when a force to rotate the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately applied. can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the lock is locked after the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 until such time can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and the upper rear right driving motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 descend smoothly without jerking. Therefore, the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 does not give the player a sense of incongruity, and the movable performance by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 is enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are respectively moved downward to bring the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 into contact with each other. Since the upper rear right decoration bodies 3240 can be combined to form a large decoration body, a large decoration body can be formed by combining them to give a strong impact to the player, thereby making the player happy. At the same time, the appearance of the large decorative body can make the player think that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot game") in which the player has an advantage will occur. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by enhancing the feeling. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 abut against each other and unite, the mutual contact causes the upper rear right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 to move. However, since each has a clutch mechanism 3250, the force that tries to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (trying to rotate from the output side) Even if the force is applied, the roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 to lock the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented by contact with each other, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body can be prevented from moving by the contact reaction. The return of the 3240 can also be prevented, and the movable effect of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 abutting and uniting can be surely enjoyed by the player and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. .

In addition, in the clutch mechanism 3250, the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the body housing 3256. 3253 is rotated to press the roller 3254 against the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, and the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Therefore, when a force to rotate the storage case 3251 acts via the plurality of rollers 3254 , the force (torque) to rotate the storage case 3251 becomes frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255 . If it is larger than , a slip occurs between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, causing the storage case 3251 to rotate. When the storage case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates via a plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 comes into contact with the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252. Rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252 . As a result, when an attempt is made to rotate the output member 3253 from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that tightens the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the rotational force is transferred to the upper rear left side. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 is strongly caught and the lock cannot be released, and the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 may be damaged. It is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that can prevent the above-described actions and effects from occurring.

[5-9-3. Upper front movable production unit]
The upper front movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. FIG. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the upper part in the back box above the effect display device 1600 in the front view. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 includes a horizontally long unit base 3301 attached to the upper part of the back box, an upper front drive motor 3302 attached to the unit base 3301, and attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be vertically movable. and an upper front movable decorative body 3350 that moves up and down by driving the upper front drive motor 3302 .

The upper front movable decoration 3350 has a circular center decoration 3351 attached to the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction (downward). A pair of first protruding decorative parts 3352a and a pair of first protruding decorative parts 3352a are connected to each other and attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A first protruding decoration 3352 having a connecting rod 3352b, a pair of second protruding decorations 3353a arranged on both left and right sides of the central decoration 3351, and a pair of second protruding decorations 3353a are connected to each other. It has a second connecting rod 3353b coaxially attached to the first connecting rod 3352b of the first protruding decoration 3352 and rotatably mounted on the rear side of the central decoration 3351 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. and a second protruding decorative body 3353.

The first decorative projecting body 3352 has a pair of first decorative projecting parts 3352a formed in the shape of an isosceles triangle protruding long with the central decorative body 3351 side as the base. In the pair of first decorative projections 3352a, the first decorative projection 3352a on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged behind the first decorative projection 3352a on the left side in the front-rear direction. The first projecting decoration 3352 has a link attachment portion 3352c to which the tip of the right second link rod 3304 described later is rotatably attached to the tip of the right first projecting decoration 3352a.

The second projecting decorative body 3353 has a pair of second projecting decorative parts 3353a formed in the shape of a long projected isosceles triangle with the central decorative body 3351 side as the base. As for the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a, the left second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged behind the right second protruding decorative portion 3353a in the front-rear direction. The second projecting decoration 3353 has a link attachment portion 3353c to which the tip of the left second link rod 3304 described later is rotatably attached to the tip of the left second projecting decoration 3353a.

In the upper front movable decoration 3350, the first protruding decoration 3352a of the first protruding decoration 3352 and the second protruding decoration 3353a of the second protruding decoration 3353 are formed to have the same shape and size. there is The upper front movable decoration 3350 has the left second projecting decoration 3353a behind the left first projecting decoration 3352a, and the right first projecting decoration 3352a behind the right second projecting decoration 3353a. The first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

Although not shown, the upper front movable decoration 3350 has a central decoration 3351, a pair of first projecting decorations 3352a, and a pair of second projecting decorations 3353a on the rear side, and a plurality of LEDs on the front. is mounted on the upper front center decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board, and the second protruding decorative part decorative board. The second protruding decoration parts 3353a can be independently decorated with light.

In addition, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the unit base 3301 at symmetrical positions with respect to the center of the front surface in the left-right direction, and is rotatable around an axis extending back and forth at the base end. A pair of first link rods 3303 extending in a rod shape, and a base end side attached to each tip of the pair of first link rods 3303 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a tip side protruding firstly. A pair of second link rods 3304 rotatably attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the decorative body 3352 and the link mounting portion 3353c of the second protruding decorative body 3353, respectively, around the longitudinally extending axis, and the front surface of the unit base 3301. and an upper stopper 3305 for restricting upward rotation of the tip side of the first link rod 3303, and a lower stopper 3306 for restricting downward rotation of the tip side of the first link rod 3303. ing.

Next, an effect using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state of the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 99 and the like, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is raised, and the central decorative body 3351 is positioned near the left-right upper end of the game area 5a. At the same time, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 extend horizontally and overlap each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 121(a)). In this normal state, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 overlap each other in the front-rear direction, so that the player can recognize them as one decoration. In addition, in a normal state, the pair of first link rods 3303 are in contact with the upper stoppers 3305, respectively, and further rotation in the direction in which the tip side moves upward is prevented.

In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 Then, the central decoration 3351 moves downward together with the first projecting decoration 3352 and the second projecting decoration 3353 as well as the upper front movable decoration 3350 as a whole. At this time, the first decorative projecting body 3352 and the second decorative projecting body 3353 move downward while remaining horizontally extended. By moving these first protruding decorative body 3352 and second protruding decorative body 3353 downward, the right second link rod 3304 attached to the link mounting part 3352c of the right first protruding decorative part 3352a and the left side The second link rod 3304 on the left side attached to the link mounting portion 3353c of the second projecting decorative portion 3353a moves downward, and a pair of the second link rods 3304 are attached to the tips of the second link rods 3304. The first link rod 3303 rotates so that the tip side thereof moves downward.

Then, when the pair of first link rods 3303 rotating along with the downward movement of the upper front movable decoration 3350 (central decoration 3351) come into contact with the lower stoppers 3306, further rotation is blocked. state (see FIG. 121(b)). After the pair of first link rods 3303 abut against the lower stoppers 3306, when the central decorative body 3351 further moves downward, the right first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the left second protruding decorative portion 3353a Since downward movement is restricted by the left and right second link rods 3304, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are positioned at the center of the first connecting rod 3352b and second connecting rod 3353b ( The center of the central decoration 3351) rotates in the direction in which the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the side opposite to the side on which the second link rod 3304 is attached move downward. (See FIG. 121(c)). As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a arranged on both the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 rotate around the central decorative body 3351 so as to open the scissors. The entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be enlarged to surprise the player and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Thus, according to the upper front movable effect unit 3300, in the normal state, the first projecting decoration 3352 and the second projecting decoration 3353 of the upper front movable decoration 3350 are overlapped in the front and rear to form one decoration. When the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, the overlapping first protruding decorative part 3352a and second protruding decorative part 3353a are rotated and opened so that the tips are separated from each other. A player who recognizes it as one decoration can be surprised, and the movement of the upper front movable decoration 3350 can be enjoyed.

Further, by the action of the first link bar 3303 and the second link bar 3304, the first projecting decoration 3352 and the second projecting decoration 3353 can be moved to the central decoration 3351 simply by moving the upper front movable decoration 3350 downward. Since they can be opened by rotating them in directions opposite to each other around , there is no need to separately provide a drive motor for rotating the first and second projecting decorations 3352 and 3353 .

[6. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 12 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124. FIG. 122 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 123 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 124 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500 .

As shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 having an open rear and a box shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510 and an electric It has a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 which is directly connected, and a base body 1502 which closes the opening of the cover body 1501 . Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 .

[6-1. Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data (peripheral data) that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is stored in the various boards mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 . Peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two-thirds of cover body 1501 when viewed from the back, and is arranged close to the left side of cover body 1501 . Peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 are located on the upper right side of cover body 1501, with peripheral data ROM board 1520 having a square shape in the remaining one-third area when cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape twice as large as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and is placed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 .

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later. properly connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to form the same ground. (GND).

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color. , bottom side, and right side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e projecting rearward (toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a is slightly upper right in the center, and the air cooling fan FAN is attached at a position corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of cover body 1501 . A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered at the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa, predetermined column-shaped through holes th1 to th4 are inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN) are formed to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, respectively. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501 aaa , it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510 .

A pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a in the vicinity of the fan mounting recess 1501aa and diagonally. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa and attached, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) (screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated) is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the seated pan head screw, comes into contact with the front surface of the cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the cooling fan FAN protrudes from the fan mounting recess 1501aa. can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the fan mounting recess 1501aa, and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa). ), a wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 . When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the fan mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a is aligned along its lower side by 1 position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The connector concave portion 1501ac is defined as two closed substantially horizontally long rectangular regions (more precisely, a convex region with the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 on the top and the connectors CN2 to CN7 on the bottom). It is formed to protrude toward the opening side of cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa). there is Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume control hole 1501ac8 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d. The bottom surface of the connector concave portion 1501ac generally occupies the lower right area when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a sound volume adjuster. Two vertically elongated reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are connected to the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. and are exposed from the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a has, along its lower side, one closed oblong rectangular area corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The opening of the cover body 1501 is located at a position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position where the distance dimension is longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. .

The cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed along the left side of the cover plate 1501a at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the front. A mounting recess 1501af for mounting a wiring cover body 1503 having a laterally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring drawing opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawing opening 1501ae is larger than the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is formed in a cylindrical shape at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover 1503, and is inserted into the through hole 1503a. dimension) is formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and mounting holes 1501afb1 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are respectively formed.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front of the wiring cover 1503 to the rear. , the wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring drawer opening 1501ae is closed and a plurality of wirings (for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the plurality of wirings from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

Plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left cover side wall 1501c when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, and protrude upward and downward respectively outward with a predetermined interval in the center. In addition, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc that is arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and protrudes outward, and a hinge hook portion 1501cd that is arranged below the guide portion 1501cb and protrudes outside are formed. The left ends of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are chamfered on the rear surface side. On the other hand, L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. Four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at positions protruding from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. The four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are surrounded by circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral control Circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the back side of the substrate 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are respectively formed on the peripheral control substrate. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1510 .

When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. As a result, cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of peripheral control board 1510 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by being grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw. ) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and become the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the opening side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. It is The four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are surrounded by copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, Circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 .

When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are fitted to the mounting boss projections 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss projections 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting boss holes. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, seating surfaces of metal pan head screws, are in contact with each other. Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4. As a result, cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of peripheral data ROM board 1520 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw, thereby grounding the peripheral control board 1510 (GND). ) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and become the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are attached to the side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a. The rear surface of the fixed peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the rear so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss projections 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed at positions that are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. The four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are surrounded by copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 for soldering having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and liquid crystal output Circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are formed on the back side of the substrate 1530, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are respectively formed on the liquid crystal output substrate. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1530 .

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting boss holes 1501am1 are formed. , 1501am2 are brought into contact with each other, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the rear surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the bearing surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. It will be in a contact state. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. As a result, the cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal round head screw, thereby grounding the peripheral control board 1510 (GND). , and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and become the same ground (GND).

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the opening-side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and fixed to the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The rear surface of the peripheral control board 1510, which is mounted on the cover plate 1501a, and the rear surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

In this way, when various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (the cover plate 1501a A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, a gap (2.3 mm in this embodiment) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model type are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. is formed.

A cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 has a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. When the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation expels the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby removing the air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. , the space inside the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled by taking in via these ventilation holes 1501az. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed with a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width of 6.5 mm in the horizontal direction, and a pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm in the vertical direction.

[6-2. Base body]
The base member 1502 that closes the opening of the cover member 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e protrude forward (back side of the pachinko machine 1) on the left side, the bottom side, and the right side to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the opening formed by base side walls 1502b to 1502e of base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the opening formed by cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of cover body 1501 . Thus, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are located inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. are fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a has wirings for the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 along the lower side at predetermined intervals so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7. Disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 elongated in the vertical direction are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being broken due to the bending of the peripheral control board 1510 due to the force when inserting the connector for connection. The force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to the connector CN1 at a position where it does not interfere with the connector CN1 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, or the force when operating the volume control switch 1510d An elongated disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa4 is formed in the left-right direction to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from being warped and the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 being disconnected.

An engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left side wall 1502c when the base body 1502 is viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the above-described L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Engageable.

A base side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the right base side wall 1502e at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. Through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[6-3. Various connectors]
A peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I/O interfaces. etc. are integrated on a single semiconductor chip, various programs that can control the progress of game effects and demonstrations (demonstration effects that are performed while the player is waiting), and the progress of effects. A control ROM 1510b that stores various schedule data in advance, and an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) that can transfer and store various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. SDRAM 1510c composed of 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume control switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, a backup power supply 1510e capable of supplying power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when power is cut off, and various other components. It is provided with a power source generation circuit (not shown) that generates a power source voltage and various connectors CN1 to CN7.

The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. A peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/Os, various parallel I/Os, and the like. Various serial I/O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5). SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

In this embodiment, using SPI communication and I2C communication, the electrical drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various motors provided in the lower movable effect unit 3100, communicating via the connector CN6.) and an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation ring drive motor 342 provided in the effect operation unit 300, the operation button elevation drive motor 367, etc., and communicated via the connector CN3.) It transmits drive data to the drive control IC, and multiple LEDs provided on the game board 5 side (communicating via the connector CN7) and multiple LEDs provided on the door frame 3 side (via the connector CN3 ), and various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front It is various detection sensors provided in the movable production unit 3300, and communicates via the connector CN6. It is various detection sensors provided, and communicates via the connector CN3.) as detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate of SPI communication is set to 250 kpbs, and the transfer rate of I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

Various parallel I/O include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output). In this embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of non-controlled objects and the origin position are input to GPIO (via connector CN6), and control signals for controlled objects (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are sent from GPIO (connector CN6 ), or output a signal from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (that is, connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector with both SPI communication and GPIO), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, realizing a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can achieve a high data communication speed. Various control information (peripheral data) from a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for inter-board connection with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN2 for inter-board connection with the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a special connector SCN3 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510 . The liquid crystal output board 1530 has a special connector SCN4 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510 .

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SNC2 in a plurality of types of video signal formats. The multiple types of video signal systems include, for example, multiple types of systems such as RGB system, LVDS system, MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) system, eDP (Embedded Display Port) system, and clockless system. , four systems (four systems in total) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In addition, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. In addition, instead of the MIPI method, for example, the eDP method is adopted, and the RGB method is one system, the LVDS method is two systems (first LVDS method, second LVDS method), and the eDP method is one system Peripheral control board 1510 can also be created.

The peripheral control board 1510 further includes LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. The peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (+37 V DC, +12 V DC, and +5 V DC) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, as will be described later. The LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state in which DC +5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which DC +5V is supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which +12V DC is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which +12V DC is supplied. The LEDML3 confirms (monitors) the state in which the +37V DC is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the +37V DC is supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and is kept lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surface of the various boards (cover A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space thus formed can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in that they have a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, and the sockets and the plugs are fitted by inserting and pushing in the plugs of the corresponding connectors in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are structured such that they do not move vertically when viewed from the front of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 at the time of fitting.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, and the special connectors SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connectors SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets.

By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and the plug are engaged. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is oriented forward and backward (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ) direction), and is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving within a predetermined distance range. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is connected to the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 should not come into contact with the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Moreover, a gap is formed between the front face (upper face) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back face of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG.

By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and the plug are engaged. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket moves forward and backward (in the direction of the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ), the structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving within a predetermined distance range. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control connector) in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the substrate 1510) moves to the maximum within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 does not come into contact with the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the connector SCN4 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 .

Here, the reasons for adopting the special connector SCN3 for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly explained. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Various types of control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided for the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs etc. mounted in a plurality, Sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc. Driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effects provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory, which is less expensive than a NOR flash (non-volatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

By adopting a NAND type flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a in this way, it is possible to reduce costs, contribute to a reduction in power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer rate. can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, it is necessary to transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510 accurately and reliably. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the effect of noise entering the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on itself into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. After pressing in, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By doing so, the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is absorbed, so that a plurality of connecting terminals formed on the plug and the socket are formed. can be prevented from being damaged, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be reliably formed.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the distance is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 together with the peripheral control board 1510 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when connecting, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is secured. It can be formed reliably.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, which is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, from the connector CN10, thereby causing the effect display device 1600 to display the progress of the effect (for example, to the player). An image to convey that a jackpot game state more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image to convey that the jackpot game state will not occur, and a state in which a jackpot game state will occur compared to the normal state although the jackpot game state will not occur. It is an important substrate for drawing an image such as an image that tells you that you are approaching. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are not electrically connected via a wiring (harness). 1510 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, thereby reducing the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission path.

The procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output board 1530 has its special connector SCN4 socket inserted into the special connector SCN2 plug of the peripheral control board 1510 . Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a after pushing it in, the special connector SCN4 socket provided with the floating mechanism described above is adopted. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are absorbed in the back-and-forth direction error caused when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is possible to prevent breakage and reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 .

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the distance is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at that time, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is secured. can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are connected as described above. Since the rear surface and the rear surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, it is said that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the front surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced compared to the case of performing a three-dimensional arrangement, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body can be operated) can be attached to the game board 5. It can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electrical drive source and drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position.

[6-4. Assembling method of peripheral control unit]
Here, a method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the cover plate 1501a. Mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are inserted into the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. insert into As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are located on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in .

Subsequently, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by , and metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a round head screw made by the manufacturer and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, out of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is restrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached to the cover plate 1501a. Movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is constrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for constraining the vertical and horizontal directions. No projecting portion is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are restrained, and the dimensional error caused by such restraint is eliminated. 1501a are absorbed by the dimensional tolerances of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. You can do it.

Subsequently, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are It is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are engaged with the base body. It is inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502 .

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. In the state where the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is covered with a metal (not shown). A metal one-way screw with an anchor rivet inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 . A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the base body 1502 are formed by screwing in the metal one-way screw and expanding the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet toward the outside at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in contact with each other. As described above, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are brought into a conducting state. In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, thereby deterring unauthorized actions to the peripheral control board box 1505. is raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) is screwed into each of the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Subsequently, for connecting a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 through the wire drawer opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Then, the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 . Metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 respectively from the front of the wiring cover body 1503 toward the rear, whereby the wiring cover body is assembled. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) when viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the side) is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix it.

Among the above-described assembling methods, in the procedure for mounting various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is first placed at the above-described predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control substrate 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the rear side of the cover body 1501.) side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back), and then the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is prepared. The socket of the special connector SCN3 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. It is also possible to insert and push in to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the above-described predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the rear side). . Even in such mounting procedures for various substrates, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, errors in the front-rear direction that occur when pushing in the plugs and sockets can be absorbed. 1520 and peripheral control board 1510 can be reliably formed, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines with different game specifications. In this embodiment, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 stores the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. , and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board dependent on the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 .

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board, and does not depend on the system of the video signal that is input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). In addition, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 having the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As for the method of the video signal input to the display device such as the effect display device, for example, as described above, there are multiple types of methods such as the RGB method, the LVDS method, the MIPI method, the eDP method, and the clockless method. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these multiple types of systems are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. That is, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced according to the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 . In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the video signal system (LVDS system) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the board-to-board connector described above.

In this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan head screws, they are grounded to the same ground (GND). ), the noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can be flowed to the ground (GND) of various substrates, and the noise can be removed. there is As a result, there is no need to equip each substrate with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, which contributes to cost reduction of each substrate.

Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. These plural circular ventilation holes 1501az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 as described above, and also have the function of confirming the presence or absence of tampering.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided and the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized. In order to check the state of the pins, they are arranged separately so as to form an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. As a result, modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b maintains the lighting state when DC +5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Therefore, the DC +5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. can contribute to

A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked. An area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and the peripheral data provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a can be visually recognized. They are distributed and arranged so as to form a large area in which the state of the pins can be almost confirmed. Thus, modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML3, which is arranged near the special connector SCN1, maintains its lighting state when +37V DC is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of supply, it serves as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. , the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the board-to-board connector.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. They are arranged separately so as to form an area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530). Thus, modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML4, which is arranged near the special connector SCN2, is designed to keep the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Although it has a function, the peripheral control board 1510 has a spotlight function that brightly illuminates the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530. The special connector SCN2 provided and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530 can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the board-to-board connector.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa have the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. A region larger than the shape of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is provided so that the states of the IC pins can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the states of the IC pins can be confirmed from multiple angles. are distributed and arranged so that As a result, modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state while the +12V direct current from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function to check (monitor) the state of DC +12 V supply, but it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) and the state of the IC pin.

In addition, among the plurality of blades constituting the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN) , the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

In this embodiment, the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted, with a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and weak directivity. Also suitable for lighting applications. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surface of the various boards (cover A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By turning on the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, the space thus formed can be illuminated brightly.

In addition, the light emitted from the LEDML1 to LEDML4 is reflected back to the area on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and its surroundings, which face the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. A reflecting portion (not shown) directed toward the peripheral control board 1510 is formed. These reflecting portions (not shown) may be colored paint having a bright color such as white, or colored paint having gloss, or a metallic sheet having luster may be adhered.

4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG. are arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball paths formed by these and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data A configuration in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are grounded to the same ground (GND) is adopted. As a result, noise that enters through the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is suppressed by the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the like. Noise can be removed by flowing it to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 .

Incidentally, conventionally, there have been gaming machines equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, characters, etc., and an effect control board, etc., on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted. proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems that are input to the display device. Therefore, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to modify the effect control board according to the video signal input to the display device and manufacture it, and it is difficult to suppress the cost of the effect control board. there were.

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of production based on various commands from the main control board 1310 . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[7-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, and a second start opening that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. An opening sensor 2511, a general winning opening sensor 3001a that detects a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001a, a general winning opening sensor 3001b that detects a game ball B received in the general winning openings 2001b to 2001d, and a gate section 2003 A gate sensor 2301 that detects the passing game ball B, a first count sensor 2512 that detects the game ball B received in the first big prize winning port 2005, and a specific area received by the first big prize winning port 2005 and a sorting member A specific area sensor 2512a that detects the game ball B distributed to the second count sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B that has been accepted in the second big winning opening 2006, and a magnetic field that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a Detection signals from the sensors 3003, etc. are input to the main control I/O ports via the main control input circuits.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the starting solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, and the second attacker solenoid 2516. , and output a drive signal to the distribution solenoid 2111, or from the main control I / O port to the function display unit 1400 status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special A drive signal is output to the holding number display, the second special symbol display, the second special holding number display, the round display, and the like.

In this embodiment, the stored ball effect unit 3400 includes a general prize winning opening sensor 2001a, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2511, a gate sensor 2301, a first counting sensor 2512, a specific area sensor 2512a, and A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the second count sensor 2513, while a general winning slot sensor 3001b provided in the back unit 3000 (the general winning slot sensor 3001b, as described above, It is possible to detect the game ball B received in the general winning openings 2001b to 2001d of the table unit 2000.), a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, and is frequently received by the stored ball effect unit 3400. The game ball B is frequently detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002, the second starting hole sensor 2511, the gate sensor 2301, and the general winning hole sensor 3001a. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2511, the gate sensor 2301, and the general winning opening sensor 3001a.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“jackpot” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently. , the detection of the game ball B by the first count sensor 2512 and the second count sensor 2513 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first count sensor 2512 and the second count sensor 2513 as well. Further, since the specific area sensor 2512a is also an important sensor related to the occurrence of a big hit game (directly linked to the player's profit), a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used. On the other hand, the general winning openings 2001b to 2001d of the front unit 2000 are configured to detect the entry of the game ball B using one general winning opening sensor 3001b, but the game ball B Since the balls do not enter the general winning openings 2001b to 2001d of the unit 2000 frequently, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001b does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001b.

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control I/O port. In addition, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Various voltages (DC +37 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when the voltages of these voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control I/O port of the main control MPU, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[7-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. It has a control unit 633b, an error LED indicator for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an error release switch for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner at the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch to the payout control I / O port via the payout control input circuit, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection from the ball cut detection sensor 574 A signal, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control I/O port through the payout control input circuit.

A detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are sent to the payout control input circuit via a payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control I/O port of the MPU.

A detection signal from the door frame open switch for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a detection signal from the main body frame open switch for detecting opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to a payout control input circuit. to the payout control I/O port of the payout control MPU.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control I/O port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the payout control I/O to the payout motor 584 via the payout motor drive circuit, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. to output a signal from the payout control I/O port to the error LED indicator, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control I/O port to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 from the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the fact that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, that the game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 are full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off in any part from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port of the payout control MPU. . In addition, the CR unit updates the residual of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a residual display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220 .

[7-2-2. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a driving current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. Triggered by the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to move. One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

Various voltages (DC +37 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control board 633 . The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when power is cut off. Due to this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of production based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces. is integrated on a single semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b pre-stores various schedule data that defines the progress of various programs and effects, and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing control information (peripheral data), a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d capable of adjusting volume, and a real-time clock IC (not shown). It has a backup power source 1510e capable of supplying power even at times, a power generation circuit (not shown) that generates various power supply voltages, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Examples of various I/O interfaces include various serial I/O ports, various parallel I/O ports, and the like.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stores various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 when the power is turned on (including when the power is restored after a power failure). Control to transfer. Between the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, as described above, the transfer speed is 2 Gbps. transferred at high speed. The control information (peripheral data) includes, as described above, image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and image data provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs etc. mounted on various decorative substrates, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and game It is driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effects provided on the board 5 .

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information associated with processing or delete the information. In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system, based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 to proceed with the effect. .

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b. Various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read out according to the schedule data, and control is performed to draw images on the effect display device 1600, and various LED light emission modes according to various effects are performed. Various performances are progressed by performing control such that sound such as music and sound effects in accordance with various performances is played.

The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, generates drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600, and outputs the drawing data to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Control output. This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output board 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. FIG.

The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, generates and outputs the sound data, thereby generating vibration speakers provided in the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. 354, the top central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played in accordance with various presentations. When a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, this volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 to output acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to provide a sound effect (sound performance) with a more realistic feeling than before.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and stores the read schedule data. , the game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and various serial I Game board side drive data for transmitting from the /O port to each decoration board of the game board 5 and for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate various effect units provided on the game board 5 are stored from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is read out and sent from various serial I/O ports to each drive board that drives the drive motor and/or drive solenoid of the game board 5, the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, and the operation button elevation drive motor Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to 367, etc., and door-side for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals for color LEDs, etc. provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Light emission data and light emission data for driving the door side are read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted to the door frame 3 side from various serial I/O ports.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting positions in the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are peripheral control inputs. It is received by various serial I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via circuits. In addition, the detection signal from the press detection sensor 381 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the detection signal from the second rotation detection sensor 348 are peripheral control inputs. It is received by various serial I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via circuits. Also, signals from the air cooling fan FAN that transmit the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

In addition, the drive signal for the opening/closing solenoid 3570 provided in the stored ball effect unit 3400 and the drive signal for the storage solenoid 3500 provided in the stored ball effect unit 3400 are peripherally controlled from various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a. While output via the output circuit, detection signals from the stored ball count sensor 3530 provided in the stored ball effect unit 3400 are input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. It is

Various voltages (DC +37 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 . A power generation circuit (not shown) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 converts one of the various voltages from the power supply board 630 (for example, DC +12 V) into a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510. We produce and supply types.

The peripheral control IC 1510a has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is running out of control.

[8. Game content and gameplay]
The game content and game characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are rotated by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 . is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The more the handle 182 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. , that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Also, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 to move left and right, and is released forward from the center in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted by the first start hole 2002 with a high probability because the part is located directly above the first start hole 2002. - 特許庁When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 or the general winning opening 2001b.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it will be moved to the center in the left-right direction by the side unit 2200 and the obstacle nail N, and will enter the general winning opening 2001c of the side unit 2200. , 2001d, or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001b, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning openings 2001b to 2001d, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are placed on the upper tray 201. is paid out to

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right hitting). , is discharged to the upper part of the gate unit 2300 through the right side of the center accessory 2500 . A gate section 2003 of the gate unit 2300 is provided, and passes through the gate section 2003 with a certain probability. Below the gate unit 2300, the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged on the left side thereof, and the general winning opening 2001a of the stored ball effect unit 3400 is arranged on the right side thereof. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the stored ball effect unit 3400 receives game balls at a predetermined probability by reciprocating the ball distribution part 3450 repeatedly in the horizontal direction. While guiding B as it is toward the opening/closing plate of the first big prize winning port 2005, it guides him to the general winning prize port 2001a.

Then, when the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit", the closed second start opening. 2004 will be in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 to 15 seconds), and reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 will be possible. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game ball B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, to the upper tray 201. paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0 .08-20 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the ordinary lottery result ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of retained lottery results is set to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being retained. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 enters an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", A lottery of special lottery results to generate "small hit" and "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed.In addition, the lottery is drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. If you win a big hit in the special lottery result, the jackpot type is determined based on the random number of symbols obtained at the time of entering the ball (hereinafter also referred to as the random number of symbols (first special random number, second special random number)), A game privilege (jackpot game or game state after the jackpot game) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (determined jackpot type) is provided.Similarly, the first start port 2002 and the second If you win a small hit in the special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B in the start port 2004, the symbol random number acquired at the time of entry (hereinafter referred to as the symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special Pattern random number)), and the game privilege corresponding to the determined type of small hit (determined small hit type) (small winning game or entering a specific area in a small winning game A jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot game is played, a game state after the jackpot game, etc. Then, the lottery special lottery result is given for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, special fluctuation (Also referred to as time) to suggest to the player.In addition, the jackpot type drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 includes "14R short-time jackpot (14R short-time jackpot A, 14R short-time big hit B)”, “5R short-time big hit (5R short-time big hit A, 5R short-time big hit B)”, etc. , 5R small hit B1)”, “5R small hit (V short time big hit)” (5R small hit A2, 5R small hit B2)”, “14R small hit (V time short big hit) (14R small hit A, 14R small hit B) , etc. In addition, as will be described later in detail, with respect to "5R small hits A2, B2" and "14R small hits A, B", there are small hits that make it easier for the game ball to enter a specific area. "5R small hits A1, B1" are set to make it more difficult for game balls to enter a specific area than "5R small hits A2, B2" and "14R small hits A, B". A hit is set.

The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 will be in a state in which the game ball B can be received in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 when the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 by . Therefore, when the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 can accept the game ball B, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 to accept the game ball B, game ball B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is a "small hit", the first big prize winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B for a predetermined short period of time (for example, 1.8 seconds). The opening/closing pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", or when the game ball that has won the first big prize opening 2005 in the small winning game enters the specific area, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize After the opening 2006 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, a predetermined long time (in this example, 28.5 seconds) elapses, or to the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 Acceptance of a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of game balls B is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) to make the game ball B unacceptable in a closed state. is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 5 rounds for a ``5R jackpot'' and 14 rounds for a ``14R jackpot'' are repeated, and an advantageous game state (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player by allowing the player to win a prize. generate

In this embodiment, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is suggested. Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted at the time, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without withholding the special lottery result. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to accumulation of reservations. When the special lottery results drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are suggested, the suggested special lottery results must be "big win" and "minor win". If there is a special lottery result pending in an unexecuted state in the main control board 1310, the special lottery result with the highest order of completion is selected. will be digested (executed) from

Suggestion of this special lottery result (variation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol)) is performed by function display unit 1400 and effect display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs. For example, if the special lottery result is "big hit", the LEDs are lit in combination according to the big win type (big hit pattern), and if the special lottery result is "small hit", the LEDs are lit in combination according to the small win type. (small win pattern), and if the special lottery result is ``losing'', the special lottery result is suggested by lighting the LEDs in a combination different from the big win pattern and the small winning pattern (losing pattern).

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a state in which three pattern rows (decorative patterns) composed of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the left-right direction, and after each pattern row is changed, the variable display is performed. The displayed pattern rows (decorative patterns) are sequentially stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, each pattern row is changed in a state in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of decorative patterns are displayed side by side. After that, the symbol rows that are being variably displayed are successively stopped and displayed. At this time, each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the decorative symbols of the three symbol rows to be stopped and displayed form a combination corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is drawn. An advantageous game state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

In addition, in the effect display device 1600, when viewed from the player side, the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped in the order of the left row → right row → middle row. row) is preceded and paused by the same decorative symbol, a reach condition is formed. In this embodiment, among the plurality of pattern rows, the left row is the first stop row, the right row is the second stop row, the middle row is the third stop row, and the left and right rows form the ready-to-win state. becomes.

Here, the "temporary stop display" can appear during a period in which the special symbols are maintained in a fluctuating state on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, It is a state in which a specific decorative pattern is displayed in a swaying state within the display area of the effect display device 1600 . On the other hand, the "fixed stop display" can appear when the special symbols are stopped on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, or after that, It is a state in which none of the decorative patterns are shaken and stopped within the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). The time until display is different), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time. Also, when the time (fluctuation time) indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 elapses, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits a stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later. Until the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) receives a stop display command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU), the effect display device 1600 does not completely stop the effect indicating the special lottery result (for example, shaking fluctuation display), and based on the reception of the stop display command, the effect suggesting the special lottery result is stopped (determined display).

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300 on the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player-participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302, vibrate it, assist the rotary operation, or inhibit the rotary operation. By 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to be conspicuous, and the operation of the production operation section 301 can entertain the player participation type production.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, the display effect unit 2600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the upper rear By appropriately using the movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., it is possible to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, etc., and various effects can also entertain the player, allowing the player to enjoy the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type presentation in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated. to notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation portion 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 is caused to vibrate. The effect display device 1600 is made to display that effect.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting a special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the display effect unit of the front unit 2000 on the game board 5 is displayed according to the special lottery result. 2600, the lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200, the upper front movable production unit 3300, etc. of the back unit 3000 can be used as appropriate to perform light emission production, movable production, display production, etc. The player can be entertained by various performances, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

As described above, when the special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) stop in the jackpot pattern, the main control board 1310 executes a jackpot game in which the player can win a prize. When executing the big win game, first, an opening period is generated in which an opening performance indicating the start of the big win game is performed. Then, when the opening period ends, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened up to the prescribed number of rounds (14 rounds in this embodiment) predetermined according to the determined jackpot type. is opened (the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are brought into a state capable of receiving the game ball B), and a round game is performed. One round game is until the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are performed a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment), and the first big prize is won during one round game. Until the prescribed number of game balls B (upper limit number of winning prizes: 10 balls in this example) wins the opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006, or for a prescribed time (round game time: 28.5 seconds in this example) ) has elapsed. In the round game, a round production is performed. Then, when the round game of the specified number of rounds is completed, an ending period (about 5 seconds in this embodiment) for performing an ending effect indicating the end of the big win game is generated, and when the ending period ends, the big win game is ended. be.

Also, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stop at the small winning symbols, the main control board 1310 executes a small winning game in which the player can win a prize. When executing the small winning game, first, an opening period is generated in which an opening performance indicating the start of the small winning game is performed. Then, when this opening period ends, the first big winning hole 2005 is opened (the first big winning hole 2005 is put in a state where it can accept the game ball B). In the embodiment, this is performed with an upper limit of one time. During one open game, until the specified number (upper limit number of winning prizes: 10 balls in this example) of game balls B wins in the first big winning hole 2005, or for a specified time (open game time: in this example 1.8 seconds) has elapsed. In the open game, an open production is performed. Then, when the opening game of the specified number of times of opening ends, an ending period (about 5 seconds in this embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the small winning game is performed is generated, and when the ending period ends, the small winning game is performed. is terminated.

Moreover, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, after the end of the small winning game, the big winning game may be continuously generated. Although not shown, the first big prize winning port 2005 is provided with a distribution member that distributes the game balls that have won the first big prize winning port 2005 to a specific area and a discharge area, and when a small winning game is started, a distribution solenoid is provided. 2111 operates in a predetermined operation mode. Then, when the game ball B wins in the first big winning hole 2005 in the small winning game, and the winning game ball B is distributed to the internal specific region by the distribution member and detected by the specific region sensor 2512a. , A round game is performed in which the second big winning opening 2006 is opened with the prescribed number of rounds (15 rounds in this embodiment) predetermined according to the determined small winning type as the upper limit. Therefore, in the ending effect at the end of the above-described small winning game, not only indicates the end of the small winning game, but also the game ball B distributed by the distribution member is a specific area inside the first big winning opening 2005 It is also shown whether or not it is detected by the sensor 2512a, that is, whether or not the big winning game is performed continuously from the small winning game. In addition, when the big winning game is continuously generated after the end of the small winning game, the small winning game in which the first big winning opening 2005 is opened becomes one round, and the number of round games including this one round is played. A round game is performed in which the second big prize winning port 2006 is opened until reaches the prescribed number of rounds (from the 2nd round to the 15th round).

In addition, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, in a part of the cases where the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are big hit symbols, after the big win game is finished, control is performed in a time saving state. Also, in a part of cases where the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are small winning symbols, the game ball B distributed by the distribution member during the small winning game is detected by the specific area sensor 2512a. After the jackpot game executed based on the fact is finished, control is made to the time-saving state. In this time-saving state, compared with the non-time-saving state (normal game state, etc.) in which the time-saving state does not occur, the result of the normal determination of whether or not to make it easier to win the game ball B to the second start port 2004 is derived. In addition to shortening the fluctuation time of normal pattern fluctuation, the second start port 2004 opens and closes with an open pattern different from the non-time saving state when winning per normal pattern in normal judgment (time saving control) .

In this embodiment, when winning per normal figure in a non-time saving state, the second start port 2004 opens and closes in a short open mode (0.05 seconds in this example) while the open pattern A is performed, time saving When winning per normal figure in the state, the second start port 2004 opens and closes in a long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example). That is, the second start port 2004 is set to operate advantageously for the player, with a longer opening/closing time corresponding to one normal pattern in the time saving state compared to the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, compared with the case of the non-time-saving state, the second start port 2004 is in a ball-entering rate improvement state in which it is easy to open and close. The ball B is accepted, and the normal pattern variation according to the normal determination is easily performed. It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the time-saving state is made on the basis of when the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 stops, specifically, when the normal symbol variation stops In the case of the time saving state, even if it is the time saving state at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, the opening pattern A that opens and closes the second start port 2004 in a short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example) is executed, and the normal pattern In the case of the time saving state at the time of stopping the fluctuation, even if it is a non-time saving state at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, the second start port 2004 is opened and closed in a long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example). executed.

According to the above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted in the second start port 2004 if the game ball B is continuously hit to the right when winning the normal game in the time saving state. Yes (there is a high probability that the game ball B will be received in the second starting port 2004). On the other hand, when winning per normal figure in a non-time saving state, it is difficult to accept the game ball B in the second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加Therefore, in the non-time-saving state, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the reception of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 is mainly executed, and in the time-saving state, mainly the game ball B to the second start port 2004 is displayed. A variable display of the second special symbol based on acceptance is performed.

In addition, in the time-saving state according to this embodiment, after the jackpot game executed when the 14R time-saving jackpot is won, the sum of the pattern variation of the first special pattern and the pattern variation of the second special pattern is predetermined. After the time-saving state A that ends when the number of times (100 times in this example: time-saving number of times) is executed, and after the jackpot game that is executed when the 5R time-saving jackpot is won, the pattern variation of the first special pattern is a predetermined number of times. There is a time saving state B that is executed (5 times in this example: number of time saving times) or ends when the pattern variation of the second special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (one time in this example: number of time saving times). In addition, after the end of the big win game executed when the 5R small win (V time reduction big win) is won, control is performed to the time reduction state B, and when the 14R small win (V time reduction big win) is won, the big win game executed when the 14R small win (V time reduction big win) is won. After the end, it is controlled to the time saving state A.

Thus, in the non-time-saving state, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the reception of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 is mainly executed, and in the time-saving state, the game ball B mainly to the second starting port 2004 is executed. A variable display of the second special symbol based on the acceptance of is executed. In addition, in the time-saving state B that is executed when the 5R time-saving jackpot is won in the time-saving state, the number of symbol changes that can be performed during the time-saving state B (the number of times of time-saving) is set to 5 times in the first special design. On the other hand, the second special symbol is set to 1 time, and the number of times (time reduction number of times) is different.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting port 2004 is displayed more than the case where the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting port 2002 is executed. When the variable display is executed, the state is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the time-saving state B executed when the 5R time-saving jackpot is won in the time-saving state, when the first special lottery result is lost and the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the fluctuation time is 7 seconds. (Excluding hold shortening control (control to set a variable time shorter than normal (7 seconds) when the number of holds is 3 or more)), whereas the second special lottery result is a loss When the variable display of the two special symbols is executed, the variable time is 16 seconds (the second special symbol does not perform the holding shortening control in the time saving state B executed when the 5R time saving jackpot is won in the time saving state) is set to

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when there are both the first reservation number based on the start winning to the first start port 2002 and the second reservation number based on the start winning to the second start port 2004, The variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second number of reservations is preferentially executed (the second number of reservations is preferentially digested over the number of first reservations). As described above, if you continue to hit the right when winning per normal in the time saving state, there is a high probability that the game ball B will be accepted in the second start port 2004, so 5R time saving out of the time saving state In most cases, the time-saving state B executed when the jackpot is won is generated by the start winning to the second start opening 2004 and the variable display of the second special symbol based on this start winning is executed. finish.

Next, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described. As the decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, eight kinds of numbers with a value of 0 to a value of 8 are adopted. 111”, “222”, “333”, “444”, “555”, “666”, “777” and “888” are adopted. In addition, 2/270 is defined as the winning probability of the big hit on the side of the first special symbol and the side of the second special symbol. 3/270 is defined as the probability of winning a small hit on the side of the first special symbol, and 113/270 is defined as the probability of winning a small win on the side of the second special symbol. 251/251 is defined as the winning probability per normal pattern. In addition, as the number of prize balls of the game ball B, 3 for the first start hole 2002, 1 for the second start hole 2004, 1 for the first big prize hole 2005 and the second big prize hole 2006 15 are defined for each. Further, as the open pattern A of the second starting port 2004, a mode is defined in which the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state until 0.05 seconds have passed. On the other hand, as the open pattern B of the second starting port 2004, a mode is defined in which the state is maintained until 1.5 seconds have passed after the second starting port 2004 is opened. In addition, "1 ball" is defined as the winning upper limit number, which is the condition that the second starting port 2004 is closed. In addition, in each round game of the jackpot game, the number of opening times of the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 is set to "1 time", and the winning upper limit number is set to "10 balls". In addition, in the small winning game, the number of openings of the first big winning hole 2005 is defined as "1 time", and the maximum winning number is defined as "10 balls".

By the way, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is a big win symbol, the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 will be open as a big win game. Then, when the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is in the open state, when the game ball B is received in the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006, the main control board 1310 and payout control A predetermined number of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 by the board 633 . Therefore, when the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is in the open state, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 to accept the game ball B, many game balls B are released. It can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

On the other hand, if the stopped special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are small winning symbols, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened as a small winning game. When the game balls B are received in the first big winning hole 2005 when the first big winning hole 2005 is open, a predetermined number of game balls B are released from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , is dispensed onto the upper tray 201 . However, in the small winning game, the opening time of the first big winning hole 2005 is short, and the number of game balls B accepted in the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 in the big winning game is larger than the number of the first big winning holes. The number accepted by mouth 2005 is significantly lower. In this way, in the small winning game, the number of game balls B paid out to the player is small, but the game balls B entered the first big winning hole 2005 during the small winning game and distributed by the distribution member. By being detected by the specific area sensor 2512a, a big hit game can be generated and the player can be entertained.

In addition, in this embodiment, 2/270 is set as the probability of winning the jackpot on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, and when the first special symbol side wins the jackpot, Since most of them (94%) are configured to be 5R time-saving jackpots, the jackpot (so-called first hit) on the first special symbol side in the normal game progress process (non-time-saving state) is 5R time-saving There is a high possibility that a big win will occur, and after the big win game related to the 5R time-saving big win ends, the above-described time-saving state B will occur. Then, when it is controlled to the time saving state B after the end of the jackpot game, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed, multiple to the second start port 2004 during the variative display The game balls B are entered to increase the second holding number which is highly likely to lead to the execution of the small winning game, and after the variable display, the variable display corresponding to the second holding number is executed to execute the small winning game. This will give the amusement companies high expectations. In other words, when it is controlled to the time saving state B after the end of the big hit game, even if any of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed, the variable display time is used first. A stock game is executed to increase (accumulate) the second reserved number that is likely to lead to the execution right of the winning game, and after the fluctuation display, the increased (accumulated) second reserved number during the stock game is consumed to play the small winning game. To realize a novel game property of executing a final game aiming at acquisition of the right to execute a game, and to suppress the deterioration of game interest in comparison with the conventional game property of simply waiting for the next big win in relation to the continuous occurrence of big wins. becomes possible.

In addition, in order to more preferably realize the above-described game characteristics, in the present embodiment, progress control of the time saving state is controlled in a peculiar form. Specifically, in the time-saving state B executed when the 5R time-saving jackpot is won in the time-saving state, when the start winning to the second start port 2004 occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed , the time-saving state B will be ended after the variable display of the second special symbol is performed only once, but since the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in a long variation time of 16 seconds, during that time A plurality of starting prizes to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and after the time saving state B ends, a variable display based on these plurality of starting prizes is executed. That is, in the time-saving state B that is executed when the 5R time-saving jackpot is won in the time-saving state, the variable display period of the second special symbol that is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning to the second start port 2004 is , is set long enough to allow opening and closing of the second start port 2004 multiple times, and as a result, a period for generating multiple start winnings to the second start port 2004 (increasing the number of second reservations) It has become. As a result, even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state B, before and after the end of the time saving state B is used to store and digest the second special symbol. It is possible to realize "game characteristics to be played", and to suppress the decline in game interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the time saving state B that is executed when the 5R time saving jackpot is won in the time saving state, the second pending number is zero (the second pending number is not stored) And, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the first reservation number or the occurrence of a new start winning prize to the first start port 2002, the single variable display of the first special symbol Without terminating the time saving state B, the time saving state B is continued even after the first special symbol variable display is performed once, and the second special symbol variable display is not performed. It is configured to terminate the time saving state B after performing the variable display of the special symbol five times at maximum. As a result, in the time saving state B that is executed when the 5R time saving jackpot is won in the time saving state, the first is more disadvantageous than the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is performed because there is no second pending number. Disadvantageous for the player compared to the case where the variable display of the special symbol is executed only once and the time saving state B is terminated after the variable display of the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol is the first special symbol It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a disadvantage such as the player not being able to receive the right for one lottery of the second special symbol, even though it is easier to win a small hit than It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to this.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is constructed so as to terminate the time saving state B after executing the variable display of the first special symbol five times maximum in the time saving state B in which the second special symbol variable display is not performed. Therefore, after the time saving state B is started, the time saving state B continues even if the four reserved numbers of the first special symbols already stored are all consumed. Therefore, even if the player leaves the seat after the time-saving state B starts, the player can experience the above-described game characteristics, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by leaving the seat.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the second special symbol is displayed once, even if the first special symbol is not displayed five times, the second special symbol is displayed once. It is configured so that the time saving state B ends with the display. That is, one pattern variation of the second special symbol in the time saving state B will also function as a limiting means for forcibly ending the time saving state B that can occur over a plurality of fluctuation displays on the first special symbol side. , the time-saving state B does not become unduly long, and it is possible to prevent the game player from being excessively advantageous, so that the above-described game characteristics can be more preferably realized.

In addition, in the time-saving state B that is executed when the 5R time-saving jackpot is won in the time-saving state, the conditions for ending the time-saving state B (time-saving number of times) are not limited to those described above, but at least the second special symbol For example, the number of time reductions for the first special design may be two times, the number of time reductions for the second special design may be one time, or the number of time reductions for the first special design may be It may be 5 times and 2 times as the number of times of variation of the second special symbol. In addition, as described above, as a limiting means for forcibly ending the time-saving state that can occur over a plurality of variable displays on one special symbol side, when the variable display of the other special symbol is functioned, the other It is preferable to set the number of fluctuations of the special symbol to one.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the symbol variation of the first special symbol is executed five times as the time saving state B after the end of the jackpot game, or the symbol variation of the second special symbol is executed once. In addition, it is programmed to end the time saving state B by executing the total number of fluctuations of the pattern fluctuations of the first special pattern and the second special pattern five times after the end of the jackpot game. It may be set in advance. For example, when adding the total number of fluctuations, when determining the end of the time saving state B, the total number of fluctuations is referred to after the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol alone and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol alone. It can be exemplified to configure as follows. By configuring in this way, the first and second special symbols do not differ in the timing of the end of the time saving state, or the timing of the end of the time saving state is changed in the first and second special symbols. When programming is changed to other gaming machines that do not differ, it is possible to achieve commonality without requiring major changes such as deletion or addition of program data related to the total number of fluctuations. It is possible to realize the above-described game property that the time saving state ends when the variation is executed once.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game area in which a game is played by inserting a game medium by a player's operation, and a plurality of gauges planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the game area. An obstacle nail and a plurality of receiving ports (general winning port, starting port, variable winning port (variable starting port, large A winning opening, a prize winning opening), a V winning opening, etc.) are provided. When the game media are received at the receiving port, benefits (distribution of the game media, occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous, etc.) are provided. The operation of inserting game media can be entertained in an acceptable manner.

As this type of game machine, a plurality of game machines are arranged so as to be vertically movable between the vicinity of the upper edge and the vicinity of the center in the front-view game area, and are rotatable around an axis extending back and forth and protrude outward. has been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-279548). In the technique of this document, the rotating decorative body is positioned near the upper edge in a normal state, and the rotating decorative body is lowered near the center according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area. By rotating, a plurality of rotary decorative bodies are rotated in a state of protruding outward, so that the whole becomes larger, and the player can be surprised and suggested to the player that a chance will come.

However, in the technique as described in the above document, in a normal state in which the rotation is stopped, a plurality of rotating decorative bodies visible to the player protrude outward due to the rotation. However, since the appearance does not change significantly, some players may quickly become bored with the presentation of the plurality of rotary decorations, and may lose interest in the game due to the loss of enjoyment of the presentation. rice field.

[9. Control processing of the main control board]
[9-1. Various control processing by main control MPU]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU in particular) will be described. FIG. 126(a) is a flow chart showing the procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 126(a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment first performs various Initialize the data stored in the registers and the RAM built in the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"). A RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the power was turned on, and the clear signal is input to the main control MPU when the power is turned on. When it is determined that it is, an initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed to store information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1), A restoration process is executed to restore the state according to the information. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process, and the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state. Also, when the initialization process is executed, the game state is controlled to a non-time-saving state.

Next, as the process of step S2, random numbers, which are numbers to be updated within a predetermined numerical range, are updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol Variable random numbers provided for lottery processing for a predetermined time (variable time) required for variable display control, whether or not to reach as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 in response to the variable display of the special symbol Reach random number provided for the lottery process (whether or not to execute the effect), Pattern random number provided for the lottery process for determining the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number (First pattern random number, second pattern random number), random number (normal random number) used for lottery processing related to the winning that triggers the opening of the second start port 2004), etc. A random number counter that holds random numbers. I have.

In addition, in this example, so as to use a common reach random number for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even if the first start opening 2002 is started and won, the second start opening 2004 is started and won. Even in the case, it is configured to obtain reach random numbers from the same counter that updates reach random numbers, but by obtaining from counters with different ranges of random numbers that update reach random numbers, the execution ratio of reach effects It may be made different, and the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol as a reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number corresponds to the second special symbol and is different from the first reach determination table By providing a second ready-to-win determination table in which the determination value is set, the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect may be varied.

In the process of step S2, the random number counter is operated such that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) that are not related to winning or losing among these random numbers are updated. After the processing of steps S1 and S2 is performed in this way, only the processing of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

FIG. 126(b) is a flow chart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 126(b), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs save processing of the register as the processing of step S11 in this interrupt control. Next, as the process of step S12a, the gate sensor 2301, the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2511, the first count sensor 2512, the second count sensor 2513, the general winning opening sensor 3001a, Based on detection signals from various sensors such as the general prize winning slot sensor 3001b, the magnetic sensor 3003, and the specific area sensor 2512a, each detection result is captured.

Next, the main control MPU of the same main control board 1310, as the processing of step S12b, detects the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2511, the first count sensor, which are read in the processing of step S12a. 2512, the second count sensor 2513, the general winning slot sensor 3001a, the general winning slot sensor 3001b, the specific area sensor 2512a, etc., when the detection result based on the detection signal is in the ON state, the input corresponding to each sensor. A ball entry command transmission control process for transmitting a ball command to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed.

As a ball entry command, the first start opening ball entry command, which conveys that the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 has been detected by the first start opening sensor 3002, is accepted by the second start opening 2004. A second starting hole entry command for conveying the fact that the game ball B has been detected by the second starting hole sensor 2511, and the fact that the game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2005 has been detected by the first count sensor 2512. , a second big winning hole entry command for telling that the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006 has been detected by the second count sensor 2513, and the above-mentioned stored ball. A specific general winning opening ball entry command for notifying that the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001a provided in the effect unit 3400 has been detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001a, and the general winning opening provided in the starting opening unit 2100. A common general prize winning opening ball command for notifying that the game ball B received in the opening 2001b and the general winning openings 2001c and 2001d provided in the side unit 2200 has been detected by the common general winning opening sensor 3001b, the first A specific area entry command for notifying that the specific area sensor 2512a has detected the game ball B that has entered the special winning opening 2005 and has been distributed to a specific area out of the specific area and the discharge area by the distribution member and received. and so on.

When such various ball entry commands are received by the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the main control board 1310 to cause the payout control board 633 to receive prize balls based on the various ball entry commands. As well as being able to grasp the number of game balls to be paid out to the player, it is also possible to grasp that the big winning game will continue to occur after the small winning game. Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the first starting hole entry command, it grasps that the number of game balls to be paid out to the player as prize balls is "3 balls", and the second starting hole entry command is received. Upon receiving the ball-in-a-ball command, it is determined that the number of game balls to be paid out to the player as a prize ball is 1, and when the first ball-in-a-ball command is received, the game ball is given to the player as a prize ball. When grasping that the number of game balls to be put out is '15 balls' and receiving the command for entering the second prize-winning slot, the number of game balls to be paid out to the player as prize balls is '15 balls'. Upon receiving the specific general prize winning slot entry command, it grasps that the number of game balls to be paid out to the player as prize balls is "4 balls", and when the common general prize winning slot entry command is received, When grasping that the number of game balls to be paid out to the player as prize balls is '8 balls' and receiving a command to enter a specific area, a state in which a big winning game is continuously generated after a small winning game is established. Grasp.

Then, as the process of step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols and the normal symbols is stopped are updated in the counter of the random number counter. operation is performed.

After the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs special symbol process processing including lottery processing related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped as the process of step S14. to run. Although this special symbol process will be described later, here, basically, special symbol process flags (first special symbol process flag, second Special symbol process flag) corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on.

Next, the main control MPU of the same main control board 1310 executes normal symbol process processing including lottery processing related to the hit or drop that triggers the opening of the second start port 2004 as the processing of step S15. It should be noted that, even in this normal design process processing, basically, corresponding processing is selectively executed according to the normal design process flag indicating the progress of the game.

Further, when the special symbol process processing (step S14) and the normal symbol process processing (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next performs the special symbol process processing as the processing of step S16. Then, a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed.

Further, the main control MPU of the same main control board 1310 performs information output processing for outputting data such as hit information to be supplied to the hall management computer, as the processing of step S18.

Next, the main control MPU of the same main control board 1310, as the processing of step S19, detects the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2511, the first count sensor, which are read in the processing of step S12a. 2512, when the detection results based on the detection signals of the second count sensor 2513, the general winning slot sensor 3001a, the general winning slot sensor 3001b, etc. are in the ON state, prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. A prize ball process for outputting a payout control command to the payout control board 633 is executed so that it can be played. As a result, the payout control MPU provided in the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 to pay out prize balls to the player. In this example, when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 and the first start port sensor 3002 is turned on, "three balls" are entered, and the game ball B wins the second start port 2004 and the first When the second starting hole sensor 2511 is turned on, "1 ball" is entered, and when the game ball B enters the first big prize hole 2005 and the first count sensor 2512 is turned on, "15 balls", and the second big prize is turned on. When the game ball B wins in the opening 2006 and the second count sensor 2513 turns on, "15 balls", and when the game ball B wins in the general winning opening 2001a and the general winning opening sensor 3001a turns on. , and when the game ball B enters the general winning openings 2001b to 2001d and the general winning opening sensor 3001b is turned on, "8 balls" are paid out to the player respectively. It's like

Further, the main control MPU of the same main control board 1310 next executes storage processing for checking increase/decrease in the number of reserved storages as the processing of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal for checking the control state of the pachinko machine 1 outside the game machine, is executed. After that, drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control is terminated. becomes.

By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In addition, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the main control. A first start opening passing process such as storing in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S32). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2511 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number A second starting port passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, the main control MPU determines whether or not a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot game is controlled. Big hit control processing (step S40) is executed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit determination and the content of the big hit type) of the display mode when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "15R big hit". When this happens, the first count sensor 2512 detects that 10 game balls B have entered the first big winning hole 2005 after the first big winning hole 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). A process of controlling a 15R jackpot game in which an open/close pattern to be closed when detected is repeated 15 times is executed.

Also, in the jackpot control process, after such opening control of the first big winning opening 2005 is performed, the setting process of the time saving flag is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control (control executed in the time saving state) is being executed, and is set when finishing the big hit game based on the time saving control big hit after the big hit game ends, and the figure described later It is reset by the first special symbol stop processing shown in 138 or the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing described later. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of times of time saving is set so that the time saving control is terminated when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed five times or the variable display of the second special pattern is executed once. That is, when the time-saving control is started after the end of the jackpot game, and either the condition for executing the variable display of the first special symbol five times or the variable display of the second special symbol once is established. It is designed to end the time saving control.

Further, if the big hit running flag is not set, the main control MPU determines whether or not the small winning running flag indicating that the small winning game is being controlled is set (step S36), and determines whether or not the small winning running flag is set. If the in-execution flag is set, a small-hit control process (step S41) for controlling a small-hit game is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped suggests a "small hit", the second big winning opening 2006 described later After opening the second large winning opening 2006 based on the opening pattern A or opening pattern B, or when the second count sensor 2513 detects that 10 game balls B have won the second large winning opening 2006. Execute the closing process. In addition, when the game ball B that has entered the second big winning hole 2006 and is distributed by the distribution member enters the specific area, it is controlled to a big win game and the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 2512 that 10 game balls B have entered the first big prize opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern to be closed is repeated 15 times. Control. On the other hand, when the game ball B that has entered the first big winning port 2005 and is distributed by the distribution member does not enter the specific region and enters the discharge region, it is not controlled to the big win game, After the winning game is finished, the game state (normal state or time saving state) before the small winning game is controlled again.

In addition, the main control MPU is a second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area if neither the big hit execution flag nor the small hit execution flag is set. is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), On the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the two special design reservation storage area is not "0" (step S37), when the fluctuation display of the second special design is stopped A second special symbol process including a lottery process related to the display mode is executed (step S39).

FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passing process (step S32).

Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first starting hole 2002, the process shown in FIG. Thus, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and this Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) of "4" (step S42). In the processing of this step S42, when it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43- The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S44, each random number obtained in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S41, the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is to be a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( Variation pattern type) and other advance determination information are executed before the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S45), and then the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of step S43 to step S45, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of the first reserved memory changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is first reserved. Along with updating to correspond to the number of memories, set a command (first reservation number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the first reserved number of memories in the above-mentioned memory processing (step S20) and send it to the peripheral control board 1510 It is designed to In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0-4.

FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number obtained in the above step S41, specifically the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not a big win will occur, if a big win will occur, the type of the big win will occur, and if a big win will not occur, a ready-to-win performance will be executed as a game performance executed by a performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加The mode type of the game presentation is specified (step S61).

Then, the specified advance determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if it will be a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it will not be a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win production as a game production executed by the production display device 1600 Aspect type of game production to be played), type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and reserved memory number (value of reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reservation memory number (the One special reservation number counter value) and set the first special symbol pre-determination command according to (step S62).

Then, by transmitting a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), it is stored corresponding to the first start opening 2002 where the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of pending memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbols based on the generated starting winning is a big win, the kind of big win in the case of a big win, and executed by the performance display device 1600 in the case of no big win. Before starting the variable display according to the start winning, the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 grasps the advance determination information such as whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect to be executed or the mode type of the game effect to be executed. become able to.

When the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is provided with a first reservation storage area for storing pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories. Store in order from the area. Then, when the advance judgment command is received when the advance judgment information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the advance judgment information notified to the (n+1)th storage area (n=1 to 3). is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the first variation pattern command received when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received. Discard the determination information and move the advance determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). shift the stored pre-determined information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is placed in a suspended state in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state), the degree of expectation for the big hit (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control ) can be notified at a predetermined timing such as, for example, when the pending display is newly output or when the pending display is shifted according to the completion of the pending display. .

FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start opening passing process (step S34).

Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 2511 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the second starting hole 2004, the process shown in FIG. Thus, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value ) is "4" (step S52). In the processing of this step S52, when it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53- The process of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S54, each random number obtained in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of second reserved storage changes based on the game ball B entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reserved state. Along with updating to correspond to the number of memories, set a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 1) for instructing the second reserved number of memories in the above-mentioned memory processing (step S20) and send it to the peripheral control board 1510 It is designed to In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0-4.

FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing are similar program modules, and the random number used for determination And only the table is different, here only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing will be described. In the first special symbol process processing, on condition that the interval timer described later has timed out (YES in step S85), according to the first special symbol process flag, one of the following five process processing It will be executed selectively. If the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S85), the process ends without executing the following processes.

1. Read out the first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM, based on the read first special random number, lottery processing and the like for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special design first special design. Normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81 )
3. Variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the fluctuation random number, and variation of the effect display executed corresponding to the first special symbol on the effect display device 1600 First variation pattern setting process (step S82) in which lottery process for mode etc. is performed
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S83) to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process. First special symbol stop processing (step S84) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol

In addition, the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 126).

FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is the same main control built-in RAM read from And next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM A random number (first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the pattern is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and the start winning prize to the first start port 2002 Random numbers extracted according to occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is memorized so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

After that, as the process of step S105, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the hit/loss of the big hit or the small hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S106) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), this process is terminated.

FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table shown in FIG. When the second special symbol normal process is executed, the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process) is compared (step S114).

As shown in FIG. 134(A), the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM and provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random numbers, the two types of first special random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and three types different from the jackpot determination value. The first special random numbers are matched with the big hit determination value indicating that the first special random number has won the small win, and the first special random numbers of 265 kinds are matched with the loss determination value indicating that the first special random numbers are lost. It is associated (jackpot probability: 1/135, small hit probability: 3/270). Also, in this example, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, two types of second special random numbers are 113 types of second special random numbers that match the big win determination value indicating that the big win has been won and are different from the big win determination value match the small win determination value that indicates that the small win has been won, and 155 types of second special random numbers. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers coincide with the loss judgment value indicating the loss (probability of big win: 1/135, probability of small win: 113/270). That is, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. , When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the second starting opening 2004 is executed than when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting opening 2002 is executed The player is in a more advantageous state.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special read out in the second special symbol normal process As a result of comparison with a random number), when it is determined to be a big win (step S115), a big win flag indicating that the variation wins a big win is set (step S116), and the win determination process is terminated.

Also, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the variation has been won as a small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither the big win nor the small win is won, that is, if it is determined to be a loss, the reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102 are compared (step S119).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time saving state. and a reach determination table at the time of state. And in the reach determination table at the time of the time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the non-time-saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time-saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, The reach random numbers are associated with each of the 67 types of reach random numbers so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased more than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (step S120), the change is A reach flag is set to indicate reach, and the process ends (step S121).

FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 135, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131).

If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. By comparing with the selected big-hit symbol determination table, a big-hit symbol is determined as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S132).

As shown in FIG. 134 (B), the jackpot pattern determination table is associated with a pattern random number (first pattern random number, second pattern random number) according to the determination result (14R short-time jackpot, 5R short-time jackpot). remembered. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number.

In particular,
1. After opening the first big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or closing when the first count sensor 2512 detects that 10 game balls B have won the first big winning hole 2005. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 14R big win game that can (easily) enter the first big winning hole 2005, and after the big win game, the special symbol changes. 14R Time-saving jackpot A that controls to a time-saving state A that ends the state if the next jackpot game does not occur before 100 times execution.
2. After opening the first big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or closing when the first count sensor 2512 detects that 10 game balls B have won the first big winning hole 2005. (1 round), and after that the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when 10 game balls B enter the second big winning hole 2006, the second count sensor By repeating the opening and closing pattern for closing when detected at 2513 four times (four rounds), the game ball B can (easily) enter the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006, making it a 5R big hit game. After the end of the big win game, the next big win game must occur before the variation display of the first special symbol is executed five times or until the variation display of the second special symbol is executed once. 5R time-saving jackpot A that controls to the time-saving state B that ends the state
3. After opening the second big winning hole 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or closing when the second count sensor 2513 detects that 10 game balls B have won the second big winning hole 2006. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 14R jackpot game in which it is possible (easy) to enter the second big prize opening 2006, and after the jackpot game is finished, the pattern variation of the special pattern is changed. 14R Time-saving jackpot B that controls to time-saving state A that is terminated if the next jackpot game does not occur before 100 times execution.
4. After opening the first big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or closing when the first count sensor 2512 detects that 10 game balls B have won the first big winning hole 2005. (1 round), and after that the second big prize opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when 10 game balls B have entered the second big prize opening 2006, the second count sensor By repeating the opening and closing pattern for closing when detected at 2513 four times (four rounds), the game ball B can (easily) enter the first big prize winning port 2005 and the second big prize winning port 2006, making it a 5R big hit game. After the end of the big win game, the next big win game must occur before the variation display of the first special symbol is executed five times or until the variation display of the second special symbol is executed once. 5R time-saving jackpot B that controls to the time-saving state B that ends the state

In addition, the jackpot pattern determination table to be compared with the first pattern random number is divided into 6 judgment values when the 14R short-time jackpot A is obtained, and 94 judgment values are distributed when the 5R short-time jackpot A is obtained. there is That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by the lottery based on the first special random number, the 14R short-time jackpot A is obtained with a probability of 6%, and the 5R short-time jackpot A is obtained with a probability of 94%. Similarly, in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number, 58 judgment values are distributed when the 14R short time big hit B is obtained, and 42 judgment values are distributed when the 5R short time big hit B is obtained. ing. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by lottery based on the second special random number, the 14R short-time big hit B is obtained with a probability of 58%, and the 5R short-time big hit B is obtained with a probability of 42%. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number has a higher probability of being determined as a 14R short-time jackpot than the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting port 2002 The state is advantageous to the player.

Further, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained, the game state after the big win game is finished is determined according to the kind of the big win. Then, in the jackpot control process (step S40), after the jackpot game is controlled, the process of setting the time saving flag based on the determination result and the process of setting the time saving number of times corresponding to the type of the big hit to the time saving number counter. executed.

Specifically, when it is determined that the "14R short-time jackpot A" and "14R short-time jackpot B" have been obtained, a special symbol (first special symbol and the second special symbol) is controlled to the time-saving state until the symbol variation is executed 100 times, and when it is determined that the “5R time-saving jackpot A” and “5R time-saving jackpot B” have been obtained After five rounds worth of jackpot games are executed, the game machine is controlled in a time-saving state until the variable display of the first special pattern is executed five times or until the variable display of the second special pattern is executed once. In this way, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by lottery based on the first special random number, control is always made to the time-saving state after the end of the big win game, and likewise a lottery result of a big win is obtained by lottery based on the second special random number. is obtained, the time-saving state is surely controlled after the end of the jackpot game. However, when the "14R Short Time Big Hit A" and "14R Short Time Big Hit B" are obtained, the number of jackpot games is higher than when the "5R Short Time Big Hit A" and "5R Short Time Big Hit B" are obtained. He is trying to be controlled to a time-saving state over a long period of time after execution.

In addition, when the 14R time-saving jackpot A is determined, the 14R time-saving jackpot A pattern is decided as the 14R jackpot pattern of the first special pattern, and when the 5R time-saving jackpot A is decided, 5R as the 5R jackpot pattern of the first special pattern. Decide on the time-saving jackpot A pattern. In addition, when the 14R time-saving big hit B is determined in the second special symbol stop design setting process, the 14R time-saving big hit B symbol is determined as the 14R big-hit symbol of the second special symbol, and when the 5R time-saving big hit B is determined. The 5R time-saving jackpot B pattern is determined as the 5R jackpot pattern of the second special pattern.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the symbol is a losing pattern when the big hit flag is not set (step S136).

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects one of the lottery results (big hit type, small win, reach loss, or loss) as the process of step S137. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may instruct the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . And after that, as the process of step S138, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

The peripheral control IC 1510a controls display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command. On the performance display device 1600, a decorative design corresponding to the first special design on the first special design display device of the function display unit 1400 is variably displayed. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a, as a mode (stop design) when the fluctuation of the decorative design is stopped, determines the jackpot design (the left, middle, and right decorative designs are If it is determined to be a combination of the same symbols with a value of 0 to 8), and if the reach loss is specified, it is a losing pattern with a reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same symbols with a value of 0 to 8). The combination of patterns with different middle decorative patterns; A combination of different symbols) is determined, and the display of the determined stop symbols is controlled when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect).

FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 136, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S141), select the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit determined in step S132 of the first special symbol stop design setting process (step S142), and the reach flag is If it is set (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal loss (reach effect is not executed), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of failure is selected (step S147).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (step S149). In addition, the main control MPU sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S150). As a result, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 only for the variation time thus determined, and the effect display device 1600 is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol. Production control will be performed at .

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in such a way that it is associated with each variable random number. Thus, the main control MPU, among the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process is compared, and the variation time information associated with the read-out variation random number is obtained from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the fluctuation random number. . For example, out of 241 types of variable random numbers, 164 types of variable random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are super reach with low expectations for big hits. It is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the effects is to be executed, and the judgment value (223 to 240) that indicates that one of the 18 types of fluctuation random numbers is to execute one of the super reach productions with high expectations for big hits. ). It should be noted that the super reach production has a higher expectation for the big hit than the normal reach production, and for the player who desires the occurrence of the big hit game, when the super reach production is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased. It has become.

In addition, in the variation pattern table of this example, 13 to 60 seconds are set in the non-time saving state as the variation time corresponding to the first special random number, and 4 to 60 seconds are set in the time saving state, similarly to the second special random number The corresponding variable time is set to 13 to 60 seconds in the non-time saving state, and is set to 2 to 60 seconds in the time saving state.

When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as the process of step S151, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter for setting the number of continuations of the time saving state is "0". If the counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S152), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short number counter is "0" (step S153). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving control is ended is set (step S154).

When it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S151, when it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S153, at that point , the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated (step S155) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83), this process is terminated.

FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variable pattern is set. Then, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has passed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, this process is terminated when the first special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative design corresponding to the stop design of one special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when the time saving end flag is set (step S183), resets the time saving end flag (step S184) and resets the time saving flag (step S185). Thereby, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed a predetermined number of times (in this example, either 100 times, 1 time, or 5 times), the time saving control is terminated. It will start controlling the non-time saving state.

Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game (step S187), and starts the big win game. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of the big win to a big win number counter indicating the number of remaining rounds is also executed. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process to be described later, and when the jackpot number counter becomes "0", the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been executed. to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot control processing to be described later, the big win opening pre-opening process (step S91) and the big winning gate opening process (step S92) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot number counter reaches "0". When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S92), when the big win number counter is subtracted by 1 and becomes "0", the process shifts to the big winning mouth after opening process (step S93) and ends the big win game. Execute control that causes

Then, a jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S189). Incidentally, the jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a jackpot start command (14R short-time jackpot A start command, 5R short-time jackpot A start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (14R short-time jackpot A, 5R short-time jackpot A) is set. As a result, the effect of the big win game corresponding to the kind of the big win indicated by the big win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, a jackpot start command (14R short-time jackpot B start command, 5R short-time jackpot B start command according to the type of jackpot (14R short-time jackpot B, 5R short-time jackpot B) command) is set.

In addition, when the jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, when the jackpot game is ended, specifically, the jackpot is executed in the jackpot control processing (step S40) after the jackpot opening (step S93). Opening and closing control of the first big winning hole 2005 according to the type (for example, after the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 10 game balls B win the first big winning hole 2005 When this is detected by the first count sensor 2512, it is reset when the opening/closing control that repeats the opening/closing pattern 14 times or 5 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). While the big hit control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process process (step S14) by resetting the jackpot executing flag, the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set (step S186), if the small hit flag is set (step S190), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates to start the small hit game. A small-hit start command is set (step S191), and the standby time until the start of the small-hit game (time for displaying the start of the small-hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, a small-hit running flag indicating that the small-hit game is being executed is set (step S193). In addition, the small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the kind of the small hit. In step S191, a small hit start command (5R small hit A1 start command, 5R small hit A2 start command, 14R small hit A start command). As a result, the production of the small-hit game corresponding to the kind of the small-hit instructed by the small-hit start command is executed by the production display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, a small hit start command (5R small hit B1 Start command, 5R small hit B2 start command, 14R small hit B start command) are set.

In addition, when the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed, when the small hit game is ended, specifically, the small hit middle process (step S401) of the small hit control process (step S41) described later ), opening and closing control of the first big winning hole 2005 according to the type of small win (for example, after opening the first big winning hole 2005 (for example, 1.8 seconds), or after 10 game balls B are placed in the first big winning hole 2005 When the first count sensor 2512 detects that a prize has been won, it is reset when the opening/closing control that closes the game is finished. While the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process process (step S14) by resetting the flag during execution of the small hit, the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 It becomes possible to perform the variable display of the first special symbol on the device and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 .

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when it becomes a loss, the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol variable display is started is set in the interval timer. (Step S194), the process proceeds to step S195.

When the processing of steps S186 to S194 is executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. (step S195), and the process ends.

FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S40). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The above-mentioned peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are shifted to the above-mentioned jackpot game based on the fact that the state of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display is stopped becomes a big hit symbol. or waiting until the next round is started.
2. Based on the state at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols, the first big prize winning port 2005 and the second big prize winning port 2006 are controlled to be open based on the fact that it becomes a jackpot pattern, or based on the start of the next round. After controlling the first big winning mouth 2005 and the second big winning mouth 2006 to the open state, and opening the first big winning mouth 2005 and the second big winning mouth 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the first Large winning opening open process (step S92)
3. After all rounds are finished, the player is waited until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big win game is finished (step S93).

The big win process flag is operated in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 126) so as to indicate that the big winning hole pre-opening process (step S91) should be performed. Further, in the above-mentioned big winning opening opening process (step S92), at the start of the round for controlling the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 to be open, a big winning round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of the round for controlling the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 to be closed, a big winning round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game effect corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command is displayed. It is implemented by the device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, and the like.

FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the small hit control process (step S41). In the small-hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small-hit process flag.

1. Small hit start processing (step S400) for executing the setting process for starting the small hit game
2. Small-hit mid-process for monitoring the entrance and release time of the game ball B during the small-hit game (step S401)

Incidentally, the small hit process flag is operated in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 126) so as to indicate that the small hit start process (step S400) should be performed. In addition, when the entry of the game ball B into the specific area is detected in the small-hit process, a flag during execution of the big-hit is set, and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big-hit game according to the type of 4 rounds for a hit, 13 rounds for a 14R small win) are set in the big win frequency counter, and the process ends. As a result, the big winning game is started following the small winning game.

FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol process (step S15).

Now, in the processing of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 is in the ON state and the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S802, first, acquires the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. Run.

Then, in the normal design process processing, one of the following five process processing is selectively executed according to the normal design process flag.

1. Ordinary symbol normal processing (step S803) in which the ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and lottery processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the read ordinary random number.
2. Ordinary design fluctuation pattern determination processing (step S804) in which lottery processing for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the ordinary design displayed on the ordinary design display device of the function display unit 1400 is performed based on the ordinary design fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S805) to wait until the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The normal symbol display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process. Normal design stop processing to stop the fluctuation display of the design (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of normal pattern fluctuation control stop becomes a mode suggesting "normal pattern winning", the process of controlling the reception of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 is possible. Normal electric accessory opening process to be executed (step S807)

In addition, the normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 126).

FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S802).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 is ON and the game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S811, first acquires the counter value of the normal reservation number counter indicating the number of normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area from the RAM of the main control MPU. . Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved and stored normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

In the processing of this step S811, when it is determined that the number of pending memories of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly suspend the variable display control of the normal symbols. will be processed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal pending number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S813, the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are obtained from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S814, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU.

However, in the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of pending memories of the normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S812 to S814 (the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are not obtained from the random number counter), the normal pattern fluctuation display control is not newly suspended.

It should be noted that the gate portion passage processing (step S802) may be performed in another example described below. For example, if the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 is now in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The normal random numbers and the normal pattern fluctuating random numbers are obtained from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. After that, the counter value of the normal reserved number counter is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, it is judged whether or not the number of reserved memory of the normal symbol is its maximum value "4". conduct. Then, when it is determined that the number of pending memories of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the normal pending number counter is counted up (adding 1 ), then, the previously acquired normal random numbers and normal pattern fluctuation random numbers (the normal random numbers and the normal pattern fluctuation random numbers stored in the temporary storage area) are stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value of the normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, when it is determined that this counter value is the maximum value "4" (the holding storage number of the normal symbol is that If it is the maximum value), the previously acquired normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are discarded without being stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area, and the fluctuation display control of the acquired normal pattern is newly performed. It may be configured not to be held.

FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the reserved state. As a result, if it is determined that there is variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state, then as the process of step S822, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU Of the random numbers related to the display mode of the pattern (for example, normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers), the random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out from the same RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal reservation number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in the first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random number extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate section 2003 is stored from the first (foremost) area. Store in order. When the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. is stored, and when the condition for starting the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is established, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage is performed. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbols occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the normal hit determination table shown in FIG. 144(A) with the normal random numbers read out in step S822 (step S828).

The normal pattern hit determination table shown in FIG. 144(A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU. Then, in the normal per pattern determination table that is referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, the normal random numbers are matched with the per normal pattern determination value indicating that all 10 types of normal random numbers have been elected per normal pattern. Associated. That is, in this example, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the game is always won in the normal game.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a result of comparison between the normal pattern hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal pattern normal process, when it is determined to be a normal pattern hit (step S829), A normal pattern hit flag indicating that the variation has been elected per normal pattern is set (step S830), and the normal pattern per pattern is determined as a mode of stopping the variation control of the normal pattern (normal pattern stop pattern). (Step S831). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S829 that it is not a normal pattern hit, the normal pattern is determined to be a normal pattern losing pattern (step S833) as a mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal pattern (normal pattern stop pattern).

Then, after the lottery process for the normal symbols is performed in this way, as the process of step S834, these lottery results (specifying either the normal pattern hit or the loss) are lottery so that they are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the normal map judgment result notification command according to each result. And after that, as the process of step S835, this process is completed at the time when the above-mentioned normal design process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the normal design variation pattern determination process (step S804).

FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, as shown in FIG. If so (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for time reduction is selected (step S842), and if the time reduction flag is set (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time reduction is selected. (Step S843).

Then, by comparing the selected normal symbol variation pattern determination table with the normal symbol variation random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process, the normal symbol variation pattern (normal symbol variation pattern) to be executed is determined (step S844). ), set the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the normal pattern fluctuation in the determined normal pattern fluctuation pattern, and display the normal pattern fluctuation display on the normal pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S845).

In addition, when the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined, the main control MPU sets the normal pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal pattern fluctuation pattern to the normal pattern fluctuation timer (step S846). As a result, the production control is performed on the normal design display device (normal design fluctuation display) of the function display unit 1400 only for the normal design fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal design fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of non-time saving of this example, 20 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time. On the other hand, in the normal pattern variation pattern determination table for time saving of this example, the normal pattern variation time is 0.8 seconds so that the normal pattern variation time is short compared to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time saving. is set. Incidentally, the normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Also, when the normal symbol variation display control is started, as the process of step S847, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the normal symbol variation process (step S805), this End the process.

FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation process (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 1 is subtracted from the normal pattern fluctuation timer in which the normal pattern fluctuation time is set in step S846. When it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the normal pattern fluctuation time has passed (step S852), the process proceeds to step S853. That is, in the process of this step S853, this process is terminated when the normal symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the first special symbol stop process (step S806).

FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol stop processing (step S806).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Display control is performed to display the normal symbol stop symbol determined by the normal symbol normal process on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the derivation display of the first special symbol stop symbol is notified. A normal map stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S862).

And next, when the normal pattern per flag is set (step S863), using the normal pattern per open pattern table shown in FIG. 2004 is set (step S864).

Specifically, if it is controlled in a non-time saving state at the time of opening start of the second starting port 2004, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁That is, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to a non-time-saving state at the start of opening, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed when the lottery result of the normal drawing is obtained by the lottery based on the normal random numbers. The opening pattern A is executed in which the starting port solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in a short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example). Thereby, when the opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the time for the opening operation of the second starting port 2004 is short, and the game ball when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. It is difficult to enter the ball. That is, even if the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed during the non-time saving state, almost no game ball enters.

On the other hand, if the time saving state is controlled at the start of opening the second starting port 2004, the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁That is, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to a non-time-saving state at the start of opening, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed when the lottery result of the normal drawing is obtained by the lottery based on the normal random numbers. The opening pattern B in which the starting port solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in a long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) is executed. Thereby, when the opening pattern B is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the time for the opening operation of the second starting port 2004 is long, and the game ball when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. can be entered.

When the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 is set, then as the process of step S885, a normal pattern per start command indicating that the normal pattern per game is started is set, and the normal pattern process flag is set to the normal electric accessory. When the process is updated so as to shift to the release process (step S866), this process ends. In addition, the normal pattern per start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the production of the normal pattern per game according to the normal pattern per type instructed by the normal pattern per start command is the effect display device 1600, It can be implemented by lamps, LEDs, speakers, and the like.

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the normal design process flag so that the process is shifted to the normal design normal process which is the initial value when the normal pattern per flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal electric accessary product opening process (step S807).

Now, in the process of step S871, if it is determined that the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. If a predetermined time (opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) has passed after controlling the second starting port 2004 to the open state (step S872), the control MPU opens the second starting port 2004 When the starting port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the starting port 2004 is turned off and the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be closed (step S873), this process ends.

Also, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second starting port 2004 is in the closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 closes the second starting port 2004 as shown in FIG. is in the open state (step S874), when the starting port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is turned on and the second starting port 2004 is controlled to open (step S875), this End the process.

Further, in the process of step S871, if it is not the timing to open the second starting port 2004, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 opens the second starting port 2004 as shown in FIG. When the number of times becomes a predetermined number of times (the number of openings of the second starting port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) (step S876), the general pattern per end command is set (step S877). Then, when the normal design process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the normal design normal process which is the initial value (step S878), this process is terminated. In addition, the end command per normal pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the end command per normal pattern is received in the peripheral control board 1510, the effect of the game per normal pattern being executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp, the LED, the speaker, etc. can be terminated.

[9-2. Variation control at the end of time saving control]
As described above, in the time-saving state, the second starting port 2004 is controlled to open and close with an open pattern different from the non-time-saving state. That is, when the normal pattern variation executed by the normal pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 stops, if it is in the time saving state, the second start port 2004 is opened with the short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example) with the open pattern A. is opened and closed, and when the normal pattern variation executed by the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 stops, if it is a non-time saving state, the second in the open pattern B of the long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example) It opens and closes the starting port 2004 .

In this way, in order to change the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 on the basis of when the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 stops, immediately before the time saving state ends (for example, the time saving number of times is 100 times in the case of the time saving state A, the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 immediately before the 100th fluctuation display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) in the time saving state stops) In the case of opening and closing the second starting port 2004 by stopping the normal pattern fluctuation executed in, the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in the open pattern B of the long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example) as a time saving state will be In addition, when the time saving state ends after the second start port 2004 is opened, the game player may feel uncomfortable because the opening pattern in the time saving state is executed even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, the start winning to the second start port 2004 may occur at an unexpected time such as after the pattern fluctuation is started in a non-time saving state after the end of the time saving state, which is not intended by the game designer. Behavior (in the non-time-saving state, the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed and the variation display of the second special symbol is hardly performed, but to the second start port 2004 despite the non-time-saving state start winning occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), and the behavior may give the player a sense of incongruity, resulting in a decrease in the interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when the special symbols variably displayed on the special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400 are stopped with a losing symbol (for example, the second Step S194 of the special symbol stop processing), normally, "0.5 seconds" is set to the interval timer as the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol variable display is started. set. As described above, the interval timer is referred to in the first special symbol process processing (step S28) and the second special symbol process processing (step S39), and until the interval timer times out, the special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 (the 1 special design indicator, 2nd special design indicator) in the special design (the 1st special design, the 2nd special design) it controls so that the fluctuation display is not started.

Also, when the time saving state is ended, that is, when the pattern fluctuation of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the big hit game reaches the number of time saving times, when the pattern fluctuation stops (time saving When the last symbol variation in the state stops), set "2 seconds" to the interval timer as the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol variation display is started. set. After changing the second starting port 2004 to the open state in the time saving state as described above, when 1.5 seconds have passed, the second starting port 2004 is changed to the closed state. Therefore, by setting the interval timer to "2 seconds" when the last symbol variation in the time saving state stops and the time saving state ends, the special symbol variation in the non-time saving state starts before the second The second starting port 2004 can be changed to a closed state, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the starting prize to the second starting port 2004 after the pattern variation of the special pattern is started in the non-time-saving state.

In addition, the period to be set in the interval timer when the last symbol variation in the time saving state stops and ends the time saving state is at least equivalent to the opening time of the second start port 2004 in the time saving state (in this example "1.5 seconds”) or more. In addition, if the second starting port 2004 has not changed to the open state when the last symbol variation in the time saving state stops and ends the time saving state, it is normal as a waiting time until the next special symbol variation display is started. ("0.5 seconds" in this example) may be set.

In this way, regardless of the presence or absence of the first pending number and the second pending number when the last special lottery result in the time saving state is derived (when the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state stops), in a predetermined period Time saving control that can be continued after the last special lottery result in the time saving state is derived (after the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state is stopped) by suppressing the execution of the next special lottery (hitting or losing determination) over time. is terminated within the predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the second reservation number after the termination of the time saving control. As a result, the game progresses with a behavior not intended by the game designer such that the start winning to the second start port 2004 occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in spite of the non-time saving state. Since the game can be prevented and the game progresses with the behavior intended by the game designer (game characteristics intended by the game designer), it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game by not giving the player a feeling of discomfort. .

It should be noted that, in the above example, the determination of whether or not the time saving state (determining whether or not to end the time saving state) is performed by the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when the normal symbol variation stops. Although what is performed as a reference is shown, when starting the normal design fluctuation executed by the normal design display device of the function display unit 1400 to determine whether it is a time saving state (for example, the above normal design normal processing (step S803) is executed, or when the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S804) is executed) may be used as a reference. In this case, at least, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation executed in the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the time saving state (normal figure fluctuation time: "0.8 seconds" in this example), and in the time saving state The opening time of the second starting port 2004 (“1.5 seconds” in this example) may be equal to or longer than the total period (“2.3 seconds” in this example).

[10. Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 156. FIG. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sub-main processing executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and FIG. Is a flowchart showing the procedure for 16mS steady processing executed by the peripheral control IC1510a, FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing an example of the stored ball count control process executed by the peripheral control IC, and FIG. 154 is a peripheral control. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing an example of the stored ball discharge performance execution start control process executed by the IC, FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing an example of the stored ball performance unit failure determination control process executed by the peripheral control IC, and FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the storage ball production|presentation unit activation stop control process performed by peripheral control IC.

[10-1. Sub-main processing]
As shown in FIG. 149, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs initial setting processing (step S501). This initial setting process includes a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a generates an interrupt every 2mS and executes 2mS steady processing. In the 2mS steady process, a process of counting up the 16mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16mS progress monitoring counter) is executed. The flag T is set, and the 16mS elapsed monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this manner, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16mS elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then 16mS steady processing is performed (step S504).

In this 16mS steady process, based on the command received from the main control board 1310, the effect display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers and the like are controlled. When the 16mS steady process is finished, the process returns to step S502 again, and steps S503 to S504 are repeated each time the 16mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16mS. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

[10-2.16 ms steady process]
Next, the 16mS steady process will be described. As shown in FIG. 150, the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, step S149a of the second variation pattern setting process) is received. Control processing related to the effect display device 1600 is executed based on this.

In addition, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing related to the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, the control process related to the lamps/LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting lighting signals of lamps/LEDs to various decorative boards 184, 273, etc. is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, the process of updating the random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

It should be noted that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16mS steady process ends within 16mS. Even if it takes 16mS or more from the start of the 16mS steady process to the end of the 16mS steady process, the 16mS steady process is started immediately after 16mS has passed since the start of the 16mS steady process (command from analysis processing) is not executed. That is, when 16 mS has elapsed during execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapsed flag is set. to start.

In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. It is not something that can be done. For example, it may be configured to update various random numbers in either one or both of the loop processing and 16mS steady processing in the sub-main processing.

[10-3. Production control processing]
Next, the effect control processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 151, the peripheral control IC 1510a selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. becomes.

1. Variation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed in the command analysis process (first variation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the first special symbol, second Second variation pattern command for instructing the variation pattern of the special symbol) After performing the process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc., the effect process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the process during the variation effect Variation production start processing to be changed (step S711)
2. The effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. are measured for the elapsed time from the start of control, and the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. are controlled according to the elapsed time. One special design, second special design) in response to the passage of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern (step S712) to change the production process flag to a value corresponding to the fluctuation end processing (step S712)
3. Perform processing for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on receiving a stop display command that instructs to stop the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and if it is a loss, the above effect The process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the fluctuation performance start processing, if it is a big hit, it is changed to a value that corresponds to the big win performance processing, and if it is a small hit, it is changed to a value according to the small win performance processing. (Step S713)
4. Processing for executing display control during the big win game is performed on the performance display device 1600 based on the reception of the big win start command for instructing the start of the big win game, and the above performance process flag is varied when the big win game ends. Big hit effect processing (step S714) to change to a value according to the effect start processing
5. Processing for executing display control during the small winning game is performed on the performance display device 1600 based on the reception of the small winning start command for instructing the start of the small winning game, and the second big winning opening is performed during the small winning game. If the game ball B accepted in 2006 is distributed to the specific area, the production process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the big win production start processing when ending the small winning game, and the game ball B is distributed to the specific area. Small hit production processing (step S715) to change to a value according to the fluctuation production start processing if not

Special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed by the special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400) by the above processing In synchronism with the variable display of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed.

[10-4. Storage Ball Production Unit Activation Control Processing]
Next, the stored ball effect unit activation control process will be described with reference to FIG. This stored ball effect unit activation control process is performed as one process of the big hit effect process of step S714 in the effect control process of the above-described 16 ms steady process.

When the stored ball effect unit activation control process is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the stored ball effect unit activation condition is satisfied (step S1000). . The condition for activating the stored ball production unit is that the 14R time-saving jackpot is won by lottery based on the acceptance of game balls into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the jackpot game is being executed, or the time-saving state is normal. It is a state in which a 14R time-saving jackpot is won by lottery of a second special pattern based on acceptance of a game ball into a second start port 2004, and a jackpot game is executed by continuing right-handed hitting when winning a prize. The main control board 1310 transmits a determination result notification command corresponding to each of these lottery results. The condition for activating the stored ball performance unit is that the big winning game continues to occur after the small winning game, and the ball enters the first big winning port 2005 and is sorted. A specific area ball entry command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to indicate that the specific area sensor 2512a has detected a game ball that has been sorted into a specific area and received by a member. In the determination of step S1000, the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the peripheral control IC 1510a has received from the main control board 1310 a determination result notification command or a specific area entry command corresponding to each of these lottery results.

When the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1000 that it has not received from the main control board 1310 a determination result notification command or a specific area entry command corresponding to each of these lottery results, the routine ends. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1000, when the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the determination result notification command and the specific area ball entry command corresponding to each of these lottery results are received from the main control board 1310, the stored ball effect unit is activated. A flag SPU-FLG is set to 1 (step S1005). This stored ball effect unit activation flag SPU-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 can be performed, and is set to a value of 0 when the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 cannot be performed. is a flag that is set. In the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400, the game balls stored in the storage space 3415 in the ball storage part 3420 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 are discharged through the discharge port 3515 in the ball discharge part 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400. By discharging, an effect is executed in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to the number of discharged balls. Even if the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 is not executed, the game balls stored in the storage space 3415 have already passed through the general winning hole 2001a provided in the stored ball effect unit 3400 and the general winning hole sensor 3001a. Therefore, a payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 to the effect that it has been detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001a. In other words, the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 utilizes game balls that are no longer offered for payout (so-called “dead balls”), and discharges the game balls stored in the storage space 3415 to the ball discharge unit 3425. The game balls are discharged through the discharge port 3515, and a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the number of discharged balls are put out to the player. It is an attractive production that can provide the player with the experience of being able to do it.

Following step S1005, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs control to move the ball storage plate 3490 in the ball storage section 3420 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 from the original position to the operating position (step S1010). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a energizes the storage solenoid 3500 of the storage ball effect unit 3400 to move the ball storage plate 3490 from the original position to the operating position. At this time, the peripheral control IC 1510a does not energize the opening solenoid 3570 of the stored ball effect unit 3400, and places the ball discharge plate 3505 in the ball discharge portion 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 at the original position.

Following step S1010, the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the storage space 3415 in the ball storage section 3420 of the storage ball effect unit 3400 to emit light (step S1015). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510 a transmits light emission mode defining data (serial data) to the storage space LED board 3545 in the ball discharge section 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 . As a result, the plurality of LEDs 3540 (three full-color LEDs in this embodiment) mounted on the storage space LED board 3545 light up in a predetermined light emission mode to illuminate the storage space 3415 brightly. At this time, the peripheral control IC 1510 a transmits light emission mode defining data (serial data) to the discharge space LED board 3560 in the ball discharge section 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 . As a result, the plurality of LEDs 3555 (five full-color LEDs in this embodiment) mounted on the discharge space LED board 3560 are extinguished, and the discharge space 3422 in the ball discharge portion 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 is extinguished. state.

Following step S1015, the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the stored ball counter EBC to an initial value of 0 (step S1020). Peripheral control IC 1510a, when the game ball passing through the general winning hole 2001a provided in the stored ball effect unit 3400 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001a of the stored ball effect unit 3400, the peripheral control IC 1510a issues a specific general winning hole entering ball command. , is received from the main control board 1310 . This stored ball counter EBC, in a state in which the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 can be performed, based on the specific general winning hole entry command received from the main control board 1310 by the peripheral control IC 1510a, the stored ball effect unit It is used to count the number of game balls that have passed through the general winning hole 2001a provided in 3400.

Following step S1020, the peripheral control IC 1510a sets an initial value 0 to the stored ball discharge counter DBC (step S1025). The peripheral control IC 1510a counts the game balls stored in the storage space 3415 through the general prize winning port 2001a provided in the stored ball effect unit 3400 through the discharge port 3515 in the ball discharge part 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400. When detected by the sensor 3530 , that fact is input from the stored ball count sensor 3530 as a detection signal. This stored ball discharge counter DBC is generally provided in the stored ball effect unit 3400 based on the detection signal from the stored ball count sensor 3530 by the peripheral control IC 1510a in a state where the stored ball effect unit 3400 can perform the stored ball effect. The game balls stored in the storage space 3415 through the winning opening 2001a are used to count the number of game balls ejected from the ejection port 3515 of the ball ejection portion 3425 .

After step S1025, the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the failure determination flag ERR-FLG to the initial value 0 (step S1030), and ends this routine. The defect determination flag ERR-FLG monitors whether or not all the game balls stored in the storage space 3415 have been discharged from the storage space 3415 through the discharge port 3515 in the storage ball effect unit failure determination processing described later. When discharge is not completed, a value of 1 is set as a malfunction of the stored ball performance unit 3400, and when discharge is completed, a value of 0 is set as a failure of the stored ball performance unit 3400. is a flag that

Note that unlike the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the processing contents of the peripheral control IC 1510a are not backed up. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power is restored, the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value of the stored ball effect unit activation flag SPU-FLG, the value of the stored ball counter EBC, the value of the stored ball counter EBC, The ball discharge counter DBC value and the malfunction determination flag ERR-FLG are all set to the initial value 0. Even if a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that and this routine is started, as long as the determination result notification command and the specific area entry command according to each of the lottery results described above cannot be received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a Although it is not known what kind of jackpot was the jackpot game just before the power failure occurred, by receiving the above-described various ball entry commands from the main control board 1310 that has been restored based on the backup information, the game ball It is possible to grasp the state of payout (state of prize balls).

[10-5. Stored ball counting control process]
Next, the stored ball counting control process will be described with reference to FIG. This stored ball counting control process is performed as one process of the big hit effect process of step S714 in the effect control process of the 16 ms steady process described above.

When the stored ball counting control process is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the value of the stored ball effect unit activation flag SPU-FLG is 1, as shown in FIG. (Step S1050). As described above, the stored ball effect unit activation flag SPU-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 can be performed, and the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 is performed. This is a flag which is set to a value of 0 when it is not possible.

In the determination of step S1050, when the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the value of the stored ball effect unit activation flag SPU-FLG is not 1 (when the value is 0), the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 is performed. If it is determined that it is impossible, the routine ends. On the other hand, when the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1050 that the value of the stored-balls effect unit activation flag SPU-FLG is 1, that is, the stored-balls effect by the stored-balls effect unit 3400 can be performed. When it is determined, it is determined whether or not there is a reception of a specific general winning hole entry ball command (step S1055). When the game ball passing through the general winning hole 2001a provided in the stored ball effect unit 3400 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001a of the stored ball effect unit 3400, this specific general winning hole entering ball command is issued by the main control. This is a command sent from the board 1310 .

When the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1055 that the specific general winning hole entry ball command has not been received, the routine ends. On the other hand, when the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1055 that a specific general winning hole entry command has been received, it increments the stored ball counter EBC by 1 (step S1060), and ends this routine. . As described above, the stored ball counter EBC operates based on the specific general winning hole entry command received from the main control board 1310 by the peripheral control IC 1510a in the state where the stored ball effect unit 3400 can perform the stored ball effect. , is used to count the number of game balls that have passed through the general prize winning opening 2001a provided in the stored ball effect unit 3400. FIG.

[10-6. Storage Ball Discharge Performance Execution Start Control Processing]
Next, the stored ball discharge effect execution start control process will be described with reference to FIG. This stored ball discharge effect execution start control process is performed as one process of the big hit effect process of step S714 in the effect control process of the above-described 16 ms steady process.

When the stored ball discharge effect execution start control process is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the stored ball discharge timer TM is activated (step S1100), as shown in FIG. . As described above, the storage space 3415 in the ball storage section 3420 of the storage ball effect unit 3400 is designed to store up to 12 game balls. All the 12 game balls flow from the storage space 3415 into the discharge space 3422 in the ball discharge part 3425 of the storage ball production unit 3400 and are discharged through the discharge port 3515 Add extra time to the expected discharge completion time. A stored ball discharging time is set in advance as the time for which the ball is discharged. In the present embodiment, 6 seconds is set as the estimated discharge completion time, 4 seconds is set as the leeway time, and 10 seconds, which is the expected discharge completion time plus the leeway time, is set as the stored ball discharge time. The stored ball discharge timer TM measures whether or not the stored ball discharge time has come.

When the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1100 that the stored ball discharge timer TM has not started, it determines whether or not the stored ball discharge effect execution start condition is satisfied (step S1105). The stored ball discharge effect execution start condition is a state in which a 14R time-saving jackpot is won by lottery based on acceptance of game balls into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and a jackpot game is being executed, or When winning the normal figure in the time saving state, the right hitting is continued and the 14R time saving big hit is won by lottery of the second special pattern based on the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2004, and the big win game is executed. 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round The condition is to start an even round such as a round, 14 rounds, etc. A command to start an even round (jackpot round start command according to the number of rounds) is sent from the main control board 1310 . In the determination of step S1105, it is determined whether or not the peripheral control IC 1510a has received from the main control board 1310 a command to start an even round (jackpot round start command according to the number of rounds).

In the judgment of step S1105, when the peripheral control IC 1510a judges that the command for starting the even-numbered round (jackpot round start command according to the number of rounds) has not been received, the routine ends as it is. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1105, when the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that a command to start an even round (jackpot round start command according to the number of rounds) has been received, the value of the defect determination flag ERR-FLG is 1. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1110). As described above, the defect determination flag ERR-FLG is set when all the game balls stored in the storage space 3415 have been discharged from the storage space 3415 through the discharge port 3515 in the stored ball effect unit defect determination processing described later. It is monitored whether or not there is, and when the discharge is not completed, a value 1 is set as a malfunction of the stored ball performance unit 3400, and when the discharge is completed, the stored ball performance unit 3400 is not malfunctioned. is a flag to which a value of 0 is set.

In the determination of step S1110, the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 is executed when the value of the failure determination flag ERR-FLG is 1, that is, when the stored ball effect unit 3400 has a problem. The alternative performance is advanced (step S1115), and the routine ends as it is. The stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 uses the game balls that are no longer offered for payout (so-called "death balls"), and releases the game balls stored in the storage space 3415 to the ball discharge unit. The game balls are discharged through the discharge port 3515 of 3425, and a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the number of discharged balls are paid out to the player. In step S1115, since it is determined in the determination of step S1110 that the stored ball effect unit 3400 has a problem, instead of executing the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400, the player is given a ball. A preliminary performance for notifying the increase (in other words, a performance matching the stored-ball performance by the stored-ball performance unit 3400) is executed as an alternative performance for the stored-ball performance by the stored-ball performance unit 3400, and progresses.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1110, when the value of the failure determination flag ERR-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when the stored ball effect unit 3400 does not have any failure, the peripheral control IC 1510a A stored ball discharge timer TM is started in order to start execution of the stored ball effect by the unit 3400 (step S1120).

Following step S1120, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs control to move the ball discharge plate 3505 in the ball discharge section 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 from the original position to the operating position (step S1125). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a energizes the opening solenoid 3570 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 to move the ball discharge plate 3505 from the original position to the operating position. At this time, the peripheral control IC 1510a continues the state of energizing the storage solenoid 3500 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 and arranging the ball storage plate 3490 at the operating position.

Following step S1125, the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the discharge space 3422 in the ball discharge section 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 to emit light (step S1130), and ends this routine. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510 a transmits light emission mode defining data (serial data) to the discharge space LED board 3560 in the ball discharge section 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 . As a result, a plurality of LEDs 3555 (five full-color LEDs in this embodiment) mounted on the discharge space LED board 3560 light up in a predetermined light emission mode to brightly illuminate the discharge space 3422 . At this time, the peripheral control IC 1510 a transmits light emission mode defining data (serial data) to the storage space LED board 3545 in the ball discharge section 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 . As a result, the plurality of LEDs 3540 (three full-color LEDs in this embodiment) mounted on the storage space LED board 3545 light up in a predetermined light emission mode to maintain a state of brightly illuminating the storage space 3415 .

On the other hand, when the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1100 that the stored ball discharge timer TM is running, it determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the stored ball count sensor 3530 (step S1135). This stored ball count sensor 3530 detects game balls that have flowed from the storage space 3415 into the discharge space 3422 and passed through the discharge port 3515 . The peripheral control IC 1510a determines that one game ball has passed when the detection result based on the detection signal from the stored ball count sensor 3530 is in the ON state, and detects based on the detection signal from the stored ball count sensor 3530. When the result is in the OFF state, it is determined that the game ball has not passed.

In the determination of step S1135, when the detection result based on the detection signal from the stored ball count sensor 3530 is in the ON state, the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that one game ball has passed, and stores the stored ball discharge counter DBC. Add 1 (increment, step S1140). As described above, the stored ball discharge counter DBC is operated by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signal from the stored ball count sensor 3530 in the state where the stored ball effect unit 3400 can perform the stored ball effect. The game balls stored in the storage space 3415 through the general prize winning opening 2001 a provided in the 3400 are used to count the number of game balls ejected from the ejection port 3515 of the ball ejection portion 3425 .

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1135, the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the game ball has not passed when the detection result based on the detection signal from the stored ball count sensor 3530 is in the OFF state, or continues to step S1140. Then, the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 is advanced (step S1145). Here, the game balls stored in the storage space 3415 are discharged through the discharge port 3515 of the ball discharge unit 3425 by using the above-described game balls that are no longer provided for payout (so-called “dead balls”). , the game balls of a predetermined number corresponding to the number of discharged balls are paid out to the player.

After step S1145, the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the stored ball discharge time has elapsed (step S1150). In this judgment, the peripheral control IC 1510a judges whether or not the stored ball discharge time has come based on the time measurement by the stored ball discharge timer TM. As described above, the stored ball discharge time is set to 10 seconds, which is the expected discharge completion time (6 seconds) plus the surplus time (4 seconds).

In the determination of step S1150, the peripheral control IC 1510a terminates this routine as it is when the stored ball ejection time has not arrived based on the time measurement by the stored ball ejection timer TM. When the stored ball ejection time has arrived based on the time measurement by the stored ball ejection timer TM, the stored ball ejection timer TM is stopped and initialized, and the ball ejection plate 3505 in the ball ejection part 3425 of the stored ball production unit 3400 is operated. Control is performed to move from the position to the original position (step S1155). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a stops energizing the opening solenoid 3570 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 and changes the ball discharge plate 3505 from the operating position to the original position. At this time, the peripheral control IC 1510a continues the state of energizing the storage solenoid 3500 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 and arranging the ball storage plate 3490 at the operating position.

Following step S1155, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs control to turn off the discharge space 3422 in the ball discharge section 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 (step S1160). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510 a transmits light emission mode defining data (serial data) to the discharge space LED board 3560 in the ball discharge section 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 . As a result, the plurality of LEDs 3555 (five full-color LEDs in this embodiment) mounted on the discharge space LED board 3560 are extinguished, thereby extinguishing the discharge space 3422 . At this time, the peripheral control IC 1510 a transmits light emission mode defining data (serial data) to the storage space LED board 3545 in the ball discharge section 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 . As a result, the plurality of LEDs 3540 (three full-color LEDs in this embodiment) mounted on the storage space LED board 3545 light up in a predetermined light emission mode to maintain a state of brightly illuminating the storage space 3415 .

Following step S1160, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs stored ball effect unit failure determination control processing (step S1165), and ends this routine as it is. A detailed description of this stored ball effect unit defect determination control process will be given later, but it is monitored whether all the game balls stored in the storage space 3415 have been discharged from the storage space 3415 through the discharge port 3515. , and determines whether or not there is a problem with the stored ball effect unit 3400 .

[10-7. Storage Ball Production Unit Malfunction Judgment Control Processing]
Next, the stored ball effect unit malfunction determination control process will be described with reference to FIG. This stored ball effect unit defect determination control process is performed as the process of step S1165 in the above-described stored ball discharge effect execution start control process.

In the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, when the stored ball effect unit malfunction determination control process is started, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1200). As described above, the stored ball counter EBC, in a state where the stored ball effect unit 3400 can perform the stored ball effect, based on the specific general winning hole entry command received from the main control board 1310 by the peripheral control IC 1510a, It is used to count the number of game balls that have passed through the general prize winning opening 2001 a provided in the stored ball effect unit 3400 . On the other hand, the stored ball discharge counter DBC is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signal from the stored ball count sensor 3530 in the state where the stored ball effect unit 3400 can perform the stored ball effect as described above. , The game balls stored in the storage space 3415 through the general prize winning port 2001a provided in the stored ball production unit 3400 are used to count the number of game balls discharged from the discharge port 3515 in the ball discharge part 3425. It is a thing. Therefore, the value of the stored ball counter EBC counted based on the specific general prize winning hole entry command received from the main control board 1310 and the stored ball discharge counter counted based on the detection signal from the stored ball count sensor 3530 The values of DBC and , usually match.

However, if a problem occurs in the general winning hole sensor 3001a for detecting the game ball passing through the general winning hole 2001a provided in the stored ball effect unit 3400, the passing game ball cannot be detected accurately. As a result, for example, even though the game ball has passed, if it is not possible to transmit that effect to the main control board 1310 as a detection signal, the fact that the game ball has not passed is detected. It may be transmitted to the main control board 1310 as a signal. In addition, a stored ball count sensor 3530 detects the number of game balls stored in the storage space 3415 through the general prize winning port 2001a provided in the stored ball effect unit 3400 and discharged from the discharge port 3515 of the ball discharge portion 3425. If a problem occurs in , it becomes impossible to accurately detect the discharged game ball. As a result, for example, even though the game ball has been discharged, if it is not possible to transmit that fact to the peripheral control board 1510 as a detection signal, the fact that the game ball has been discharged although the game ball has not been discharged is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a detection signal. In addition, when there is a problem that the ball discharge plate 3505 in the ball discharge portion 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 cannot move from the original position to the operating position, the game balls stored in the storage space 3415 are discharged. The stored ball count sensor 3530 can detect the number of game balls discharged from the discharge port 3515 in the ball discharge part 3425 because the ball cannot flow into the discharge space 3422 of the discharge part 3425 .

When such a problem occurs, the value of the stored ball discharge counter DBC and the value of the stored ball discharge counter DBC do not match and become inconsistent. In the determination of step S1200, the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that no trouble has occurred in the stored ball effect unit 3400 when the value of the stored ball discharge counter DBC and the value of the stored ball discharge counter DBC match. When the value of the ball discharge counter DBC and the value of the stored ball discharge counter DBC do not match, it is determined that the stored ball effect unit 3400 is malfunctioning.

In the determination of step S1200, the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the stored ball effect unit 3400 is not malfunctioning when the value of the stored ball discharge counter DBC and the value of the stored ball discharge counter DBC match. The determination flag ERR-FLG is set to 0 (step S1205), and the routine ends as it is. If they do not match, it is determined that a problem has occurred in the stored ball effect unit 3400, and the value 1 is set to the defect determination flag ERR-FLG (step S1210). Control is performed to move the ball storage plate 3490 from the operating position to the original position (step S1215), and this routine ends. As described above, the malfunction determination flag ERR-FLG is set to a value of 1 when a malfunction has occurred in the stored ball effect unit 3400, and is set to a value of 0 when a malfunction has not occurred in the stored ball effect unit 3400. flag.

Specifically, in step S1215, the peripheral control IC 1510a stops energizing the storage solenoid 3500 of the storage ball effect unit 3400 and moves the ball storage plate 3490 from the operating position to the original position. At this time, the peripheral control IC 1510a stops energizing the opening solenoid 3570 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 and continues the state of arranging the ball discharge plate 3505 at the original position.

When the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the stored ball discharge time has come based on the timing of the stored ball discharge timer TM in the determination of step S1150 in the above-described stored ball discharge effect execution start control process, the stored ball discharge effect unit 3400 Assuming that the game balls stored in the storage space 3415 in the storage section 3420 have flowed from the storage space 3415 into the discharge space 3422 in the ball discharge section 3425 of the stored ball production unit 3400 and have been discharged through the discharge port 3515, In the process of step S1155, control is performed to move the ball discharge plate 3505 in the ball discharge section 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 from the operating position to the original position. Perform control processing. When the value of the stored ball discharge counter DBC and the value of the stored ball discharge counter DBC do not match in the determination of step S1200 in the stored ball effect unit failure determination control process, the peripheral control IC 1510a causes a problem in the stored ball effect unit 3400. 1 is set to the defect determination flag ERR-FLG in the process of step S1210 in the same process, and the ball storage plate in the ball storage section 3420 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 in the process of step S1215 in the same process. Control is performed to move the 3490 from the operating position to the original position.

That is, in the state where the malfunction determination flag ERR-FLG is set to 1 (state where it is determined that the stored ball effect unit 3400 has malfunctioned), the ball ejection plate 3505 moves from the operating position to the original position. The state in which the sphere storage plate 3490 is moved from the operating position to the original position is maintained. As a result, the game ball passing through the storage passage 3465 in the storage portion 3420 of the storage ball effect unit 3400 is not caught on the upper surface of the ball storage plate 3490, and goes straight toward the ball discharge passage 3487 on the lower wall of the ball storage portion 3420. A state in which the ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the board holder 1200 without being returned to the game area 5a from the discharge port 3485 through the ball discharge passage 3487, and is collected by the island facility of the game hall. Become. In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the failure determination flag ERR-FLG to a value of 1 in the processing of step S1210 of the stored ball effect unit failure determination control process, thereby performing the above-described stored ball effect unit activation stop control process described later. Every time the stored ball discharge effect execution start control process is started, it is determined in step S1110 in the same process that a problem has occurred in the stored ball effect unit 3400, and in the process in step S1115 in the same process, the stored ball is discharged. An alternative production of the production will proceed.

[10-8. Storage Ball Production Unit Activation Stop Control Processing]
Next, the stored ball effect unit activation stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. This stored ball effect unit activation stop control process is performed as one process of the big hit effect process in step S714 in the effect control process of the 16 ms steady process described above.

When the stored ball effect unit activation stop control process is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the stored ball effect unit activation stop condition is satisfied (step S1250). The condition for stopping the activation of the stored ball production unit is the state in which the 14R short-time jackpot is won and the jackpot game is being executed (the jackpot game is continued after the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is finished. state.) is received from the main control board 1310 by the peripheral control board 1510 to proceed with the production. In the determination of step S1250, the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the peripheral control IC 1510a has received from the main control board 1310 a command to end the state in which the jackpot game is being executed. In addition, the state in which the 14R short-time jackpot is won and the jackpot game is being executed (including the state in which the jackpot game is continued after the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is finished) ends. The command to do may be a command to convey the closed state from the state in which the first large prize winning port 2005 and the second large prize winning port 2006 are opened when the 14 rounds are completed.

In the determination of step S1250, when the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that it has not received from the main control board 1310 a command to end the state in which the jackpot game is being executed, it ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1250, when the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that it has received from the main control board 1310 a command to end the state in which the above-described jackpot game is being executed, the ball storing section of the stored ball effect unit 3400 The ball storage plate 3490 in 3420 is controlled to move from the operating position to the original position, and the ball ejection plate 3505 in the ball ejection section 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 is controlled to move from the operating position to the original position (step S1255). ). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a stops energizing the storage solenoid 3500 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 to move the ball storage plate 3490 from the operating position to the original position, and the stored ball effect unit. The energized state of the opening solenoid 3570 of 3400 is stopped, and the ball discharge plate 3505 is moved from the operating position to the original position.

Following step S1255, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs control to turn off the storage space 3415 in the ball storage section 3420 of the stored ball effect unit 3400, and also switches off the discharge space 3422 in the ball discharge part 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400. Control is performed (step S1260). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a transmits light emission mode defining data (serial data) to the storage space LED board 3545 in the ball discharge section 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400, and also transmits the ball of the stored ball effect unit 3400. Light emission mode defining data (serial data) is transmitted to the discharge space LED board 3560 in the discharge section 3425 . As a result, a plurality of LEDs 3540 (three full-color LEDs in this embodiment) mounted on the storage space LED board 3545 are extinguished, and the storage space 3415 is extinguished. A plurality of mounted LEDs 3555 (five full-color LEDs in this embodiment) are extinguished, and the discharge space 3422 in the ball discharge part 3425 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 is extinguished.

Following step S1260, the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the failure determination flag ERR-FLG to an initial value of 0 (step S1265). As described above, the malfunction determination flag ERR-FLG is set to a value of 1 when a malfunction occurs in the stored ball effect unit 3400, and is set to a value of 0 when no malfunction occurs in the stored ball effect unit 3400. is a flag that In the present embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a, in the process of step S1265, prevents the next stored-ball effect unit activation control process from being reflected in the stored-ball effect by the stored-ball effect unit 3400 this time. By the above-described stored ball effect unit activation control processing, the stored ball effect unit 3400 starts the stored ball effect, and the result of the occurrence of the problem of the stored ball effect unit 3400 is initialized, and the initial value 0 is set to the defect determination flag ERR-FLG. It has a mechanism of setting. That is, every time the stored-ball effect unit 3400 starts the stored-ball effect by the stored-ball effect unit activation control process described above, it is configured to monitor whether or not the stored-ball effect unit 3400 has a problem.

Following step S1265, the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the stored ball effect unit activation flag SPU-FLG to the initial value 0 (step S1270), and ends this routine. As described above, the stored ball effect unit activation flag SPU-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 can be performed, and the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 can be performed. A flag that is set to a value of 0 when it is not possible. In step S1265, the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value 0 (initial value 0) to the stored ball effect unit activation flag SPU-FLG in preparation for the next stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400.

[11. Production example]
[11-1. Suspension Notice Effect and Suspension Change Effect]
In this embodiment, the pending display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the pending number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310, but until the pending display is digested, the display mode of the pending display is changed, it is possible to execute a suspension notice performance suggesting a degree of expectation for a big hit with respect to the variable display of decorative patterns (variable display of special symbols) based on the suspension display. Also, during the display period of the pending display, a pending change effect suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the pending display will change can be executed.

Specifically, based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is established), the number of pending designation command and the prior determination command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 . Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the command analysis process of step S601, when the hold number designation command and the advance determination command are received, the hold number specified from the hold number designation command (number of pending memories) and advance judgment information specified from the advance judgment command (either big hit, small win, reach loss, or loss) is selected, and the decision set in the hold notice decision table By comparing the value with the read random number for determining pending notice, the type of the pending notice pattern set in the pending notice determination table is determined. In addition, in the pending notice determination table, the judgment value for each pending notice pattern is different for each advance judgment information (big hit, small hit, reach loss, or loss) specified from the advance judgment command. The appearance rate of the notice pattern is different.

In addition, when the game ball wins the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (starting conditions are established), the number of reservations (number of reservations stored) specified from the number of reservations designation command increases, so that the effect display One additional pending display is displayed on the device 1600 . On the other hand, when the variable display of decorative patterns (variable display of special patterns) based on the reserved display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the number of reservations (the number of reservations stored) specified by the number of reservations designation command is reduced. , erases the pending display on the effect display device 1600 . During the display period from when the pending display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to when the pending display is erased, the display mode of the pending display is displayed based on the pending notice pattern. Each time the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on another pending display is started (the start condition is established), the display mode of the pending display can be changed. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative design (variable display of the special design) based on the reserved display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the reserved display is erased. Even after the variable display (variable display of the special symbol) is started, the pending display may be continuously displayed and the display mode of the pending display may be changed. In such a case, before and after the start of the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) based on the suspended display, the position where the suspended display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 moves in the same manner as other suspended displays. , and may suggest the possibility that the display mode of the pending display will change due to execution of a pending change effect (a pending move change effect, a hole pending change effect, a billiards pending change effect) to be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, a description will be given of a suspension notice determination table in which a plurality of types of suspension notice patterns are set for each suspension number (holding storage number) specified from the suspension number designation command. The pending notice determination table is stored in the ROM of peripheral control board 1510 . FIG. 157(A) is a holding notice determination table used when hold 1 is lit (holding number=1), and FIG. 157(B) is a holding notice determination table used when hold 2 is lit (holding number=2). FIG. 157 (C) is a hold notice determination table used when hold 3 lights (hold number = 3), and FIG. 158 (D) is used when hold 4 lights (hold number = 4) It is a pending advance notice determination table.

As described above, multiple types of pending notice patterns are set in the pending notice determination table corresponding to the pending number (holding memory number). How the display mode of the pending display on the effect display device 1600 changes each time the pending memory is consumed is set by the number of memories). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 157(A), the display mode of the pending display in the effect display device 1600 changes in the pending notice determination table used when the pending 1 lights up (the number of pending=1). (that is, only the display of suspension is terminated), and a suspension notice pattern in which only the display mode of the suspension display for one time is set is associated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 157(B), the display mode of the pending display can be changed once before the pending display is extinguished in the pending advance notice determination table used when the pending 2 lights up (holding number=2). Therefore, a hold notice pattern in which the display mode of the hold display for two times is set is associated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 157(C), the display mode of the pending display can be changed twice until the pending display is extinguished in the pending notice determination table used when the pending 3 lights up (the number of pending = 3). Therefore, a hold notice pattern in which the display mode of the hold display for three times is set is associated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 158(D), the display mode of the pending display can be changed three times until the pending display is extinguished in the pending notice determination table used when the pending 4 lights up (the number of pending = 4). Therefore, a suspension notice pattern in which four display modes of suspension display are set is associated.

In addition, as the display mode of the pending display in the effect display device 1600 set to the pending notice pattern, four displays are displayed so that the pending display is displayed in one of white (basic color), blue, red, and rainbow colors. A form is provided. When the pending notice pattern is determined from the pending notice determination table, as a result of changing the display mode of the pending display to the end, the expectation of a big hit is high in the order of white (basic color) → blue → red → rainbow color. is set to be In other words, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit as the advance determination information, a pending notice pattern in which the display mode of the final pending display is a display mode (for example, rainbow color) with a high degree of expectation for a big win is determined with a high probability, and To determine, with a high probability, a holding notice pattern in which a display mode (e.g., white) with a low degree of expectation for a big win is displayed as a display mode of the final holding display when a lottery result is specified as a loss (loss, reach loss) as determination information. Therefore, when the display mode of the final reserved display is displayed in the display mode with a high degree of expectation for the big win, the player's expectation for the big win game is increased.

In addition, in the pending notice pattern, the display mode of the pending display does not change in the reverse order of the order of white→blue→red→rainbow color, and the display mode of the pending display is maintained when the pending display is terminated. Alternatively, it is set so that the next display mode is a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. Therefore, even if the display mode of the pending display is displayed in a display mode with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, there is still a possibility that the display mode will change to a mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit when the pending display is completed. Aspects can be drawn to the end with anticipation.

In addition, in the pending notice pattern, the display mode of the pending display does not necessarily need to change in the order of blue → red → rainbow color after being displayed in white (basic color). Start from the mode (for example, suddenly start in rainbow color due to hold notice pattern number 4 when hold 1 is lit), skip one or more display modes and change to the next display mode (for example, when hold 2 is lit) It is also set to change from white (basic color) to rainbow color) by reservation notice pattern number 7. Therefore, even if there are few opportunities (number of reservations) for the display mode of the pending display to change, the display mode of the pending display can be displayed in a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. In addition, even if the display mode of the pending display is displayed in a display mode with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, it is not possible to predict which display mode the next display mode will change, and the display mode of the pending display is displayed to the end. It can attract attention with anticipation.

In addition, in the pending notice decision table, only when the big hit is specified as the advance judgment information from the advance judgment command, the final pending notice pattern is displayed in rainbow color (holding notice pattern number when hold 1 is lit) 4, hold notice pattern numbers 4, 7, 9, 10 when hold 2 lights, hold notice pattern numbers 4 and 7 when hold 3 lights, hold notice pattern numbers 4 and 7 when hold 4 lights, etc.) is set to be possible. Therefore, when the display mode of the pending display is displayed in rainbow color, it is determined that the lottery result will be a big hit when the pending display is completed, and the player's expectation for the big winning game is increased. .

In addition, in the pending notice decision table, when a failure is specified as the preliminary judgment information from the preliminary judgment command, the final pending notice pattern is white (basic color) or blue (when Hold 1 is lit). Hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2, Hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 when Hold 2 lights, Hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 when Hold 3 lights, Hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 when Hold 4 lights, etc.) On the other hand, if a big hit, a small hit, or a reach is specified as pre-determination information from the pre-determination command, the final display mode of the hold display will be a red hold notice pattern (hold notice pattern when hold 1 lights Number 3, hold notice pattern numbers 3, 6, and 8 when hold 2 lights, hold notice pattern numbers 3 and 6 when hold 3 lights, hold notice pattern numbers 3 and 6 when hold 4 lights, etc.) is enabled. Therefore, when the display mode of the pending display is displayed in red, it is determined that the ready-to-win effect is executed at least when the pending display is extinguished, and the player's expectation for the big win game or the small win game. is increasing.

In this embodiment, by determining the pending notice pattern at the start of the display of the pending display, a series of contents in which the display mode of the pending display changes until the pending display is completed is determined. However, as the determination method, when the display of the pending display is started, only the display mode of the pending display at the start and the final display mode of the pending display may be determined. Then, if the display mode of the pending display at the start and the final display mode of the pending display are different, at least the final display mode of the pending display before the target pending display is digested is displayed, each time the timing at which the display mode of the pending display can change arrives, it may be determined how the display mode of the pending display changes. Even with such a determination method, it is possible to sequentially change the display mode of the pending display until the pending display on the effect display device 1600 is completed.

Next, a description will be given below of the suspension change effect suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the suspension display will change during the display period of the suspension display. In the pending notice effect described above, during the display period of the pending display, the display mode of the pending display can be changed each time the variable display of the decorative pattern (variable display of the special pattern) is started (the start condition is satisfied). , at the timing when the display mode of the suspension display can be changed, a suspension change effect suggesting the possibility of changing the display mode of the suspension display can be executed.

Specifically, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) is started (the start condition is satisfied), whether the display mode of the pending display changes based on the pending notice pattern By determining whether or not, selecting the pending change effect determination table corresponding to the determination result, and comparing the determination value set in the pending change effect determination table with the read random number for determining the pending change effect, A type of a pending change performance pattern set in a pending change performance determination table is determined. That is, it determines whether or not to execute the pending change effect, and determines the type of the pending change effect when executing the pending change effect.

FIG. 159 is a pending change effect determination table used for determining a pending change effect pattern. As shown in FIG. 159, a plurality of types of pending change effect patterns are set in the pending change effect determination table. A pending change effect pattern for executing a pending move change effect as a pending change effect (holding change effect pattern number 2), a pending change effect pattern for executing a crawling hold change effect as a pending change effect (holding change effect pattern number 3), a pending change A pending change effect pattern (holding change effect pattern number 4) for executing a billiard pending change effect is set as the effect. Note that the pending change effect determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, in the pending change effect determination table, the distribution of determination values for each of the pending change effect patterns (holding change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) for executing the pending change effect is approximately the same, and the appearance rate of each of the pending change effects are set at the same level, but the distribution of the determination values may be made different so that the appearance rate of each pending change effect may be different.

In addition, in the pending change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the pending display changes, the determination value is distributed only to the pending change effect patterns (holding change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) that execute the pending change effect. On the other hand, in the pending change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the pending display does not change, most judgments are made to the pending change effect pattern (holding change effect pattern number 1) that does not execute the pending change effect. values are distributed. Thus, when the display mode of the pending display changes, the pending change performance is always executed, and when the pending change performance is executed, the display mode of the pending display changes with a high probability. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the display mode of the pending display will change due to the execution of the pending change effect.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reservations (the number of reservations stored) is four. Specifically, when hold 1 (hold number = 1) is lit, the hold display is displayed at the lower left position of the display area, and when hold 2 (hold number = 2) is lit, hold is held at the lower right position of the display area. When hold 3 (hold number = 3) is lit, the hold display is displayed in the upper right position of the display area, and when hold 4 (hold number = 4) is lit, hold is held in the upper left position of the display area. showing the display. Also, as a general rule, when starting variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) (starting conditions are satisfied), the suspension display of suspension 1 displayed at the lower left position of the display area is erased. , the other pending displays of pending 2 to 4 move clockwise while remaining displayed in the display area.

First, in the pending change effect pattern (suspended change effect pattern number 1) that does not execute the pending change effect, when the pending display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, It is designed to move linearly in the shortest distance to the position of .

In addition, in the pending change effect pattern (suspended change effect pattern number 2) that executes the pending change effect as the pending change effect, when the pending display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, From the position to the position after movement, unlike the case where the suspension change effect is not executed, it moves in a non-linear manner, and during the movement (before reaching the position after movement), the suspension display The display mode of can be changed. Also, when executing the pending movement change effect, compared to the case where the pending display moves linearly (when the pending change effect is not executed), in the period until the pending display reaches the position after movement, There is a high possibility that the display mode of the pending display will change. In addition, in the pending movement change effect, multiple types of production patterns are provided in which the manner in which the pending display moves is different from when the pending change effect is not executed. The longer the moving distance is, the more likely it is that the display mode of the pending display will change. In the present embodiment, the longer the distance that the pending display moves, the higher the possibility that the display mode of the pending display changes. The more complicated the manner in which the pending display moves (for example, the higher the number of crossings in the movement path of the pending display), the higher the possibility that the pending display will change. In addition, as another example of the holding movement change effect, the longer the holding display moves, the higher the possibility that the display mode of the holding display will change to a display mode (for example, rainbow color) with a high expectation of a big hit. May be set.

In addition, in the pending change effect pattern (suspended change effect pattern number 3) that executes a crawling pending change effect as a pending change effect, when the pending display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, When the pending display moves from the position to the outside of the display area, it is erased once, and after a predetermined time has passed, the pending display returns to the display area and reaches the position after movement, and the point of return of the pending display. , the display mode of the pending display can be changed. Also, when executing the hold change effect, compared to the case where the hold change effect is not executed (when the hold display is not erased outside the display area and moves linearly), the position after the movement of the hold display There is a high possibility that the display mode of the pending display will change during the period until reaching In addition, in the hold change effect, multiple types of production patterns are provided with different times for the hold display to be erased outside the display area, and the longer the erase time, the more the display mode of the hold display can change. is becoming more sexual. In addition, as another example of the hold change effect, the longer the hold display is erased outside the display area, the more likely the display mode of the hold display will change to a display mode (for example, rainbow color) with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. can be set to be higher.

In addition, in the pending change effect pattern (holding change effect pattern number 4) that executes the billiard pending change effect as the pending change effect, when the pending display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, the billiard ball A simulated spherical display appears in a predetermined display mode, and after that spherical display bounces multiple times in the display area, when the spherical display collides with the suspended display at the position after movement, the spherical display is a new suspended display, and the display mode of the suspended display can be changed to the display mode of the spherical display depending on whether or not the spherical displays collide with each other. That is, when the billiards pending change effect is not executed, the ball display does not appear, and the display mode of the pending display does not change after the pending display reaches the position after movement, whereas the billiards pending change effect is not executed. When executed, a sphere display appears, and the display mode of the pending display can change after the pending display reaches the position after movement. In addition, when the billiards pending change effect is executed, compared to the case where the pending change effect is not executed (when the pending display moves linearly and the ball display does not appear), as a result of the movement of the pending display, the holding There is a high possibility that the display mode of the display will change. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the effect display different from the pending display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (the effect display with the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern) changes, An effect equivalent to the billiard holding change effect can be executed. Specifically, when a ball display resembling a billiard ball appears in a predetermined display mode, and after the ball display bounces multiple times within the display area, the ball display collides with the effect display. The production display changes. Therefore, even if the spherical display does not collide with the reserved display, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the effect display will change due to the collision with the effect display.

In this embodiment, the suspension notice effect and the suspension change effect are performed during the non-time saving state. In the non-time-saving state, almost no second special pattern side retention memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 2004 is generated, and based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 2002. Since it is a state in which the first special symbol side reserved memory can occur, only the reserved display based on the first special symbol side reserved memory is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 . In addition, in the non-time saving state, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided around the pattern display area where the effect display with the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern is performed, and the pattern display area. It is divided into a reserved display area in which a reserved display corresponding to the number of reserved memories on the special symbol side is performed. Specifically, the pattern display area is reduced to about 80% of the display area of the effect display device 1600 . In this way, in the non-time saving state, the reservation display area is provided separately, so that the reservation display displayed in the reservation display area can be made conspicuous, and the display mode of the reservation display changes by executing the reservation notice effect. It is easy to pay attention to whether or not to do so. In addition, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning a big hit or a small hit is low, and it is difficult to expect the variable display and effect display of decorative patterns performed in the pattern display area, but it is displayed in the reserved display area. Since the reserved display to be held is made conspicuous, it is possible to expect that the display mode of the reserved display will change, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the suspension notice effect and the suspension change effect are performed during normal fluctuation, which is the stage of whether or not the ready-to-win state is formed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In addition, when the pending change effect is not executed, the pattern display area remains reduced to about 80% of the display area, whereas when the pending change effect is executed, the display area is further reduced to 60%. The pattern display area is reduced to the extent. In this way, when the pattern display area changes from about 80% to about 60% of the display area, the pending change effect is performed for the pending display displayed in the pending display area. decreases, it is possible to make the player pay attention with anticipation that the suspension change effect will be performed for the suspension display. Further, when the pending change effect is executed, the pending display area is expanded, so that the effect content of the pending change effect for the pending display displayed in the pending display area can be made conspicuous, and the display mode of the pending display is changed. It makes it easier to pay attention to how the process changes. It should be noted that the pending display area is provided as an area where the pending display waits and the pending display is moved regardless of whether the pending change effect is executed for the pending display. During part of the execution of , it is allowed for the suspended display to move across the symbol display area.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a reach state is formed as a variable display of decorative symbols during normal variation, the pattern display area is returned to 100% of the display area as the reserved display area is erased. . That is, after the ready-to-win state is formed, the ready-to-win effect is performed using the symbol display area returned to 100%. In this way, when the ready-to-win effect is executed, the pattern display area is expanded, so that the state in which the hold display can be noticed during the normal state changes, and the ready-to-win effect as the effect display displayed in the pattern display area is changed. can draw attention.

In the present embodiment, the pattern display area is reduced to about 60% of the display area in any of the holding change effects of holding movement change effects, crawling hold change effects, and billiards hold change effects. , The rate at which the pattern display area decreases may be varied according to the degree of expectation of the pending change effect to be executed (possibility of changing the display mode of the pending display). For example, when executing a pending change effect with a high possibility that the display mode of the pending display will change, the rate at which the pattern display area decreases is increased, whereas the possibility that the display mode of the pending display will change is low. When executing the pending change effect, the rate at which the symbol display area decreases may be reduced. According to this, the possibility that the display mode of the pending display will change does not necessarily need to be grasped by the execution of the pending change effect, and can be grasped by the rate at which the symbol display area decreases.

Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 when executing the pending change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 162. FIG. FIG. 160 is a specific example of effect on the effect display device 1600 when executing the pending movement change effect, and FIG. There is, and FIG. 162 is a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 when executing the billiard pending change effect.

First, a specific effect example in the effect display device 1600 when executing the pending movement change effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 160(A), in the non-time-saving state, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided around the symbol display area 1600a occupying about 80% of the display area and the symbol display area 1600a. and a reserved display area 1600b that occupies about 20% of the display area. In this pattern display area 1600a, an effect display including a variable display of the decorative patterns 1605a to 1605c and a pattern background display (design background image) around the decorative patterns 1605a to 1605c is performed based on the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the pending display area 1600b, a pending display corresponding to the number of pending memories on the side of the first special symbol and a pending background display (a pending background image) around these pending displays are performed. Hold display 1601a of hold 1 at the lower left position of the display area, hold display 1601b of hold 2 at the lower right position of the display area, hold display 1601c of hold 3 at the upper right position of the display area, and upper left of the display area. A hold display 1601d of hold 4 is displayed at the position of , and a hold background display is displayed in the other portions. This pending background display is displayed in a manner different from the pattern background display (for example, a different background color), and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a pattern display area 1600a and a pending display area 1600b. It is easily recognizable. Also, the pending displays 1601a to 1601d of the pending 1 to 4 are displayed in white. In addition, for the hold display 1601d of hold 4, when the hold display 1601d of hold 4 is lit, the display mode changes from white → blue → red → rainbow color (hold notice pattern when hold 4 is lit) number 18) has been determined.

Then, as shown in FIG. 160(B), at the time when the variable display of the decorative patterns 1605a to 1605c is started based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, the hold movement change effect is executed for the hold display 1601d of the hold 4. is determined, the pattern display area 1600a is reduced to about 60%, and the reserved display area 1600b is increased to about 40%. In addition, as the pending display 1601a of the pending 1 is erased, the pending displays 1601b to 1601d of the pending 2 to 4 other than the pending display 1601a start to move clockwise while being displayed in the display area. In addition, the suspension displays 1601b and 1601c of the suspension 2 and 3 are moved to the position after movement based on the determination that the suspension change effect is not executed for the suspension displays 1601b and 1601c of the suspension 2 and 3. While moving linearly at the shortest distance, the hold display 1601d of hold 4 moves to the post-movement position based on the determination of execution of the hold movement change effect for the hold display 1601d of hold 4. , moving in a meandering manner. In this production example, the display mode is changed from white to blue while the hold display 1601d of hold 4 is moving. In addition, as a change in the display mode of the hold display during movement, for example, the color at the start of the movement (white in this production example) is maintained until reaching the halfway point of the movement route, and there is no change, but the halfway point After reaching , the gradation change gradually approaches the color after movement (blue in this production example), and when the movement is completed, the change to the color after movement (blue in this production example) is completed. etc. can be exemplified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 160(C), after a predetermined period of time has passed, the lost patterns are stopped and displayed as a variable display of the decorative patterns 1605a to 1605c. has finished moving the pending displays 1601b to 1601d. At this point, the hold indications 1601a and 1601b of the new holds 1 and 2 are white in display mode, while the hold display 1601c of the new hold 3 is blue in the display mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (D), at the time when the variable display of the decorative patterns 1605a to 1605c is started again based on the pending display 1601a of the pending 1, the pending display 1601a of the pending 1 is erased. Hold displays 1601b and 1601c of Hold 2 and 3 other than the above start moving clockwise while remaining displayed in the display area. In addition, the hold display 1601b of hold 2 moves linearly at the shortest distance to the position after movement based on the determination not to execute the hold change effect for the hold display 1601b of hold 2. On the other hand, the hold display 1601c of hold 3 meanders and moves to the post-movement position based on the determination of the execution of the hold movement change effect for the hold display 1601c of hold 3. In this production example, the display mode is changed from blue to red while the hold display 1601c of hold 3 is moving.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 160(E), after a predetermined period of time has passed, the lost patterns are stopped and displayed as a variable display of the decorative patterns 1605a to 1605c. has finished moving the pending displays 1601b and 1601c. At this point, the pending indication 1601a of the new pending 1 is white in appearance, while the pending indication 1601b of the new pending 2 is red in appearance.

Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (F), at the time of starting the variable display of the decorative patterns 1605a to 1605c again based on the pending display 1601a of the pending 1, the pending display 1601a of the pending 1 is erased. The pending display 1601b of the pending 2 other than the above starts to move clockwise while being displayed in the display area. In addition, the hold display 1601b of hold 2 meanders and moves to the post-movement position based on the execution of the hold movement change effect being determined for the hold display 1601b of hold 2. In this production example, it is possible to recognize that the display mode of the pending display is longer than the distance that the pending display moved when changing from white to blue and blue to red, and that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the pending display will change. can. Also, when the hold display 1601b of hold 2 moves, it crosses the front side of the pattern display area 1600a, so it is easy to pay attention to whether the display mode changes. Also, in this example of effect, the display mode is changed from blue to red while the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is moving.

Further, as shown in FIG. 160(G), after a predetermined period of time has passed, the decorative patterns 1605a to 1605c are displayed in a stopped manner as a variable display of the lost patterns. Finish moving display 1601b. At this time point, the display mode of the pending display 1601a of the new pending 1 is rainbow color, but when the display mode is displayed in rainbow color, the lottery result is a big hit when the pending display 1601a of the pending 1 is consumed. Since it is confirmed that it becomes, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the big hit game.

Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the change hold change effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 161(A), in the pending display area 1600b, a pending display corresponding to the number of pending memories on the side of the first special symbol is performed. 1 pending display 1601a, and a pending 2 pending display 1601b is displayed at the lower right position of the display area. In addition, the display mode of the hold display 1601a of hold 1 and the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is white. In addition, for the hold display 1601b of hold 2, when the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is lit, a hold notice pattern (hold notice pattern number 6 when hold 2 is lit) is determined in which the display mode changes from white to red. It is

Then, as shown in FIG. 161 (B), at the time of starting the variable display of the decorative patterns 1605a to 1605c based on the reservation display 1601a of the reservation 1, the execution of the hold change effect for the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is determined, the pattern display area 1600a is reduced to about 60%, and the reserved display area 1600b is increased to about 40%. In addition, as the hold display 1601a of hold 1 is erased, the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is moved out of the display area and erased once.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 161(C) and (D), after the hold display 1601b of hold 2 moves out of the display area, the hold display 1601b of hold 2 moves outside the display area toward the position after the movement. The light is moved within the display area as if the light emitted from the hold display 1601b of that hold 2 was moving as the . Also, a countdown of "3", "2", "1", and "0" is displayed as the light moves within the display area. This countdown corresponds to the time when the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is erased, and the longer the erased time, the closer the countdown is to "0". That is, if the erasing time is long, the countdown can reach "0", whereas if the erasing time is short, the countdown ends without reaching "0".

Then, as shown in FIG. 161(E), after the time for the pending display 1601b of the pending 2 to disappear, the pending display 1601b of the pending 2 returns to the pending display area 1600b. The display mode is changed to red. After that, as shown in FIG. 161(F), before the variable display of the decorative patterns 1605a to 1605c is stopped and displayed, the suspension display 1601b of suspension 2 finishes moving. At this point, the hold display 1601a of the new hold 1 has a red display mode. Since execution of the effect is confirmed, the player's expectation for the big win game and the small win game can be heightened.

Next, a specific example of an effect on the effect display device 1600 when the billiards pending change effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 162(A), in the pending display area 1600b, a pending display corresponding to the number of pending memories on the side of the first special symbol is performed. 1 pending display 1601a, and a pending 2 pending display 1601b is displayed at the lower right position of the display area. In addition, the display mode of the pending display of the pending 1 and 2 is white. In addition, for the hold display 1601b of hold 2, when the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is lit, a hold notice pattern (hold notice pattern number 6 when hold 2 is lit) is determined in which the display mode changes from white to red. It is

Then, as shown in FIG. 162(B), at the time when the variable display of the decorative patterns 1605a to 1605c is started based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, the billiard hold change effect is executed for the hold display 1601b of the hold 2. is determined, the pattern display area 1600a is reduced to about 60%, and the reserved display area 1600b is increased to about 40%. In addition, as the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is erased, the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is first based on the execution of the billiard hold change effect for the hold display 1601b of the hold 2. It moves linearly in the shortest distance to the post-movement position while maintaining the display mode in white. Also, when the hold display 1601b of hold 2 moves, a ball display 1602 resembling a billiard ball appears in the hold display area 1600b in a red display mode. At this point, if the ball display 1602 appears in a red display mode, the execution of the billiards pending change effect may cause the new hold 1 hold display 1601a to change to a red display mode. Player expectations can be raised.

Further, as shown in FIG. 162(C), when the sphere display 1602 appears in the reserved display area 1600b, an image of the center pressing operation portion 303a of the pressing operation portion 303 is displayed in the display area, and the center pressing operation portion 303a is displayed. The player is prompted to operate the operation unit 303a. After that, as shown in FIG. 162(D), when the player operates the central pressing operation part 303a within a predetermined time, the ball display 1602 is shot and the ball display 1602 bounces multiple times within the display area. Let On the other hand, even if the player does not operate the central pressing operation portion 303a within the predetermined time, the ball display 1602 is forcibly shot after the predetermined time. In addition, in this production example, an operation production is performed as to whether or not the player operates the central pressing operation unit 303a. If the set fluctuation time) is 4 seconds or less (if it is not possible to set a waiting time for whether or not the player operates the central pressing operation section 303a), the operation effect is not performed. Fire display 1602 . When the sphere display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, it crosses the front side of the pattern display area 1600a, so the sphere display 1602 is easy to pay attention to.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 162(E) and (F), after the ball display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, the ball display 1602 collides with the hold display 1601a of hold 1, and the hold display 1601a of hold 1 is pushed out. The sphere display 1602 becomes the new hold display 1601a of hold 1. As a result, the suspension display 1601a of suspension 1 changes its display mode to red, which is the display mode of the sphere display 1602, before the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c stops. At this time, the hold display 1601a of hold 1 is red in display mode, but when the display form is displayed in red, it becomes at least reach when the hold display 1601a of hold 1 is digested, and the reach production is performed. Since the execution is confirmed, the player's expectations for the big winning game and the small winning game can be heightened. In this production example, when the ball display 1602 bounces multiple times, only the hold display 1601a of hold 1 is displayed, and the hold display 1601a of hold 1 changes to a red display mode due to collision with the ball display 1602. Although there is only a possibility of change, when two or more pending indications are displayed in the pending display area, which of the pending indications the sphere display 1602 collides with, that is, which of the pending indications is displayed in red It is not possible to determine whether there is a possibility of changing to Therefore, when two or more suspended displays are displayed in the suspended display area, any of the suspended displays will change to a red display mode (the display mode of the sphere display 1602) due to collision of the sphere displays 1602. While having the expectation of , it is possible to draw attention to the direction in which the sphere display 1602 is traveling.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the effect display displayed in the symbol display area 1600a changes, an effect equivalent to the billiards pending change effect can be executed. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 162(E'), after the sphere display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, the sphere display 1602 collides with the effect display displayed in the symbol display area 1600a. After that, as shown in FIG. 162(F'), the effect display displayed in the symbol display area 1600a changes, and a new effect display appears as a new effect display notifying that the "special mode" will be entered. It is designed to Therefore, even if the sphere display 1602 does not collide with the pending display, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the effect display will change due to the collision with the effect display.

In the present embodiment, when executing the pending change effect, the color is changed as the display mode of the pending display, but at the timing when the display mode of the pending display can be changed, not only the color change It is also possible to ``add a predetermined additional decorative display (such as a character) to the reserved display''. In such a case, the degree of expectation for a big hit is made different depending on the type of additional decoration display added to the reserved display.

In addition to the configuration of the suspension notice effect described above, when executing the suspension movement change effect as the suspension change effect, not only the color change, but also the process of moving the suspension display, (characters, etc.) may be added. For example, when the pending display moves due to the execution of the pending movement change effect, the additional decorative display appears in the display area during the movement, the additional decorative display approaches the reserved display, and is added to the reserved display at the position after the movement. You may make it perform the production|presentation of whether it is done or not.

In addition to the configuration of the suspension notice effect described above, when executing the crawling suspension change effect as the suspension change effect, not only the color change but also the suspension display is displayed after the suspension display moves outside the display area. When returning to the area, "predetermined additional decoration display (such as characters) may be added to the hold display". For example, after the suspended display moves outside the display area due to the execution of the hold change effect, the additional decorative display appears in the display area, the additional decorative display moves outside the display area in the same manner as the reserved display, and the reserved display is displayed. When returning to the display area, an effect may be executed as to whether or not the additional decorative display is added.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the pattern display area 1600a is reduced from about 80% to about 60% of the display area with the start of the suspension change effect as a trigger, while the suspension display area 1600b is reduced from about 20% of the display area. It is increased to about 40%. Thus, in the pending change effect, the pending display area 1600b is enlarged, and using the enlarged pending display area 1600b, the pending background display effect that enlivens the pending change effect is also executed. When the background movement change effect is executed as the pending change effect, for example, the pending background display displayed in the pending display area 1600b is replaced with a group of characters "Chance!" during the movement of the pending display. may In addition, when executing a crawling pending change effect as a pending change effect, for example, as a pending background display displayed in the pending display area 1600b, while the pending display is moving (erasing) outside the display area, It may be replaced with an explanation message such as "If the color changes when you press the button, chance!" Further, when the billiards pending change effect is executed as the pending change effect, for example, as the pending background display displayed in the pending display area 1600b, during the period in which the ball display 1602 bounces multiple times, "Chance if you hit the ball! ” may be replaced with an explanation message.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is used as the display region in which the pattern display region 1600a and the reserved display region 1600b are provided. However, it is divided into a pattern display area 1600a and a pending display area 1600b, and with the start of the pending change effect as a trigger, the pattern display area 1600a is reduced, while the pending display area 1600b is increased. good. For example, when the symbol display area 1600a is provided in the display device with the larger display area of the two display devices, and the pending display area 1600b is provided in the display device with the smaller display area, with the start of the pending change effect as a trigger, The display device provided with the pattern display area 1600a and the reserved display area 1600b may be replaced.

[11-2. Production at the time of over winning in jackpot games]
In the present embodiment, when executing the jackpot game, the number of rounds (up to 14 rounds in the present embodiment), which is predetermined according to the jackpot type, is set as the upper limit. is opened (the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are brought into a state capable of receiving the game ball B), and a round game is performed. One round game is until the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are performed a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment), and the first big prize is won during one round game. Until the prescribed number of game balls B (upper limit number of winning prizes: 10 balls in this example) wins the opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006, or for a prescribed time (round game time: 28.5 seconds in this example) ) has elapsed.

In the above-described single round game, when a specified number of game balls B (upper limit number of winning prizes: 10 balls in this example) win the first big prize hole 2005 or the second big prize hole 2006, it is being opened. It closes a certain first big prize winning opening 2005 or second big winning opening 2006 . That is, when the first big winning hole 2005 is open, the first attacker closes the first big winning hole 2005 when the game balls B of the specified number are detected by the first count sensor 2512. The solenoid 2515 is driven and controlled, but at that time, game balls B exceeding the specified number may have already entered the first big winning hole 2005 (over winning), and in such a case, After closing the first big winning hole 2005, the first count sensor 2512 detects the game balls B exceeding the specified number. Similarly, when the second large winning opening 2006 is open, when the game ball B of the specified number is detected by the second count sensor 2513, the second attacker solenoid to close the second large winning opening 2006 2516 is driven and controlled, but at that time, game balls B exceeding the prescribed number may already enter the second big winning hole 2006 (over winning), and in such a case, the second big winning hole 2006 After the second prize winning opening 2006 is closed, the second count sensor 2513 detects the game balls B exceeding the specified number. When an over-winning occurs, a performance using the performance display device 1600 is provided separately from the round performance performed in the round game as a benefit for the player having obtained the payout of the game balls B exceeding the expectation. As an over-winning performance is performed.

Specifically, every time a round game in a jackpot game is started, a round start command for instructing the number of rounds of the round game is transmitted from the main control board 1310 . Also, when the game ball B wins the first big prize hole 2005 or the second big prize hole 2006 and the game ball B is detected by the first count sensor 2512 or the second count sensor 2513, the main control board 1310 A prize-winning command notifying that effect is transmitted. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the round start command and the command at the time of winning, the number of rounds of the round game being executed and the number of rounds of the round game being executed, the first big winning port 2005 or the second big winning An effect based on the number of game balls B winning in the mouth 2006 is executed as a round effect in the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加In addition, during each round game in the jackpot game, after the specified number of game balls B win the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006, the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole At 2006, it is determined whether or not the game ball B has won a prize, that is, whether or not an over-win has occurred, and when an over-win has occurred, the number of times the over-win has occurred is counted during execution of the jackpot game. do. However, even if two or more over-wins occur during one round game, the number of over-wins is counted as one.

When an over-win occurs, an over-win effect is executed as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but the type of over-win effect may vary depending on the number of times the above-described over-win occurs. I'm letting Specifically, when the number of over winnings is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, or 7, one of the characters A to E is determined, and a lottery effect is made to make the determined character appear. On the other hand, when the number of over-wins is an even count of 2, 4, or 6, a fixed effect is executed to make a character appear corresponding to the number of over-wins. . In addition, when the number of over winnings is counted after the eighth time, a premium-like fixed effect is executed that does not appear until the seventh count.

First, when the number of over-wins is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, or 7, the over-wins effect decision table shown in FIG. Decide which of ~E to appear. Specifically, the type of character set in the over-win effect determination table is determined by comparing the judgment value set in the over-win effect determination table with the read random number for determining over-win effect effect determination table. do. In this way, when the number of over winnings is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, or 7, one of the characters A to E is determined. In addition, attention can be paid to which character will appear as an over-winning effect.

It should be noted that the over-winning effect determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, in the over-winning effect determination table, the distribution of judgment values for the patterns in which each character appears among the characters A to E is approximately the same, and the appearance rate of each character is assumed to be approximately the same. The distribution may be made different so that each character has a different appearance rate.

If the number of over-wins is an even count of 2, it is determined to make the character F appear in the over-wins effect using the over-wins effect determination table shown in FIG. 163(B). do. Similarly, when the number of over-wins is an even count of 4, the over-wins effect determination table shown in FIG. If it is determined and the number of occurrences of over winning is an even count of 6 times, the over winning effect determination table shown in FIG. decide. In this way, when the number of over-wins is an even count of 2, 4, or 6, a predetermined character corresponding to the number of over-wins is determined. occurs, it is possible to recognize how many times the over-winning has occurred due to the appearance of the character.

In addition, when the number of over-wins is counted after the eighth time, all characters A to H appear in the over-wins effect using the over-wins effect determination table shown in FIG. decide to let In this way, when the number of over-wins is counted up to the 7th time, the character only appears alone in the effect at the time of over-wins. Since all of the characters A to H appear in the performance at the time of winning, the player can get a sense of accomplishment when the number of over winnings exceeds the eighth time while paying attention to the premium performance.

In this embodiment, when the number of over winnings is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, or 7 times, one of the characters A to E is determined, and a lottery effect in which the determined character appears. On the other hand, when the number of over-wins is an even count of 2, 4, or 6, a fixed effect is executed to make a character appear corresponding to the number of over-wins. . As a result, different pleasures can be given to the performance at the time of over winning depending on whether the number of times over winning is an odd number count of 1, 3, 5 or 7 times or an even number count of 2, 4 or 6 times. can. That is, when the number of over-wins is an even count of 2, 4, or 6, the number of over-wins caused by the appearance of the character is recognized, and 1, 3, 5 are recognized. , 7 odd counts, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of making the player pay attention to which of the characters A to E will appear.

Further, in this embodiment, even if two or more over-wins occur during one round game, the number of over-wins is counted as one. As a result, the performance at the time of over winning is not executed twice during one round game, and the performance at the time of over winning is easily recognized for each round game in which over winning occurs. Also, for example, when two over-wins occur, if the number of over-wins is counted as 2, the lottery effect and the fixed effect are not executed in order (for example, the over-win during the round game after the lottery effect). Since the lottery effect is executed even when a prize is won, and the lottery effect continues), the effect that the player was looking forward to may not be executed, but in this embodiment, such a situation can be prevented. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a specific example of effect on the effect display device 1600 during execution of the jackpot game will be described.

As shown in FIG. 164 (A), during execution of the big hit game, as a round effect using the effect display device 1600, the number of rounds of the round game being executed, the first big winning port 2005 or the second big winning An effect is executed to display the total number of winning balls (total number of payouts) for the winning to the mouth 2006 . This display of the total winning number is based on the fact that the game ball B has won the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006, and the number of winning (number of payouts) corresponding to the winning number is updated (additional display ), and unlike the above-mentioned over-winning effect, even if two or more over-winnings occur during one round game, the number of wins according to each winning number ( Payouts) are added to reflect all of them. That is, when two or more over winnings occur during one round game, the number of execution times of over winning performance is limited, but updating of the display of the total winning number is not limited.

Also, as shown in FIG. 164(B), when an over-win occurs during each round game, an over-win-time effect is started as an effect using the effect display device 1600. First, the effect display device 1600 From the first big prize winning port 2005 or the second big prize winning port 2006 provided on the lower right side toward the central part of the performance display device 1600, a performance display is executed as if light is gathered. As a result, when game balls B exceeding the prescribed number enter the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006, that is, when over winning occurs, the player is likely to notice that fact, and then It is possible to draw attention to the characters that appear in .

Then, as shown in FIG. 164(C), in the effect at the time of over-winning, a character appears according to the number of times the above-described over-winning has occurred. Specifically, when the number of over winnings is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, or 7, a lottery effect is executed in which one of the characters A to E appears. When the number of wins is an even count of 2, 4, or 6, a fixed performance is executed to make a character appear corresponding to the number of over wins. In addition, when the number of over-wins is counted after the eighth time, a premier-like fixed effect in which all the characters A to H appear is executed.

In addition, in the above-described effect at the time of over-winning, the effect display device 1600 is used to make characters appear according to the number of times over-winning has occurred. At the start of the game, the over-winning effect is terminated, and the character that has appeared is erased. Then, at the start of the round game, by restarting the round presentation corresponding to the number of rounds of the round game, the opening of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 is not overlooked. . It should be noted that, in this production example, when the next round game is started when over winning occurs during the round game, the over winning production is finished, but a predetermined time (for example, , 4 to 5 seconds), and even if the next round game is started after the occurrence of the over winning, the over winning performance is continued until a predetermined time elapses. can be In such a case, the over winning effect is always executed for a predetermined period of time due to the occurrence of the over winning effect, so that the over winning effect can be leisurely enjoyed.

In addition, the above-mentioned effect at the time of over winning is to be performed when game balls B exceeding a prescribed number enter the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 (over winning). However, when over-winning occurs in the first big winning opening 2005 having a specific area inside, the over-winning production is not performed, and only when over-winning occurs in the second big winning opening 2006. A time performance may be performed. In the present embodiment, when passing through the specific area of the first big winning hole 2005, a big hit confirmation effect indicating that the execution of the big win game is confirmed is performed. At the game timing of , it is possible to prevent the execution of the big hit fixing performance from being hindered due to the occurrence of accidental over winning.

In addition to being able to execute the above-described over winning effect, during the big win game, the lower right flock winning hole provided near the second big winning hole 2006 (for example, the lower right of the effect display device 1600 When a game ball wins a prize in the general prize winning port 2001) provided in the second big prize winning port 2006, a bonus effect is performed indicating that a bonus prize ball different from the prize ball for the winning of the game ball to the second big prize winning port 2006 is given. may In such a case, in order to prevent overlap between the over-winning effect and the bonus effect, control may be performed to suppress the execution of either one. For example, when a game ball wins in the lower right flock winning opening during execution of the over winning effect, execution of the bonus effect is suppressed, whereas when over winning occurs during the execution of the bonus effect , to suppress the execution of the over-winning effect, giving priority to the effect being executed can be exemplified. However, prize balls are paid out even when the execution conditions for the over winning effect and the bonus effect are met, and the total number of winning balls (total number of payouts) in the round effect using the effect display device 1600 is performed. is added to the display of

As described above, if the over-win effect is not executed even when over-win occurs, it is not counted as the number of occurrences of over-win. As a result, when the over winning performance is executed next time, the lottery performance and the fixed performance are executed in order with respect to the already executed over winning performance, thereby giving the player a sense of incongruity. can be prevented.

In the above description, if over-winning occurs during the execution of the bonus effect, the execution of the over-winning effect is suppressed. It may be replaced with an over winning effect (premium-like fixed effect). In this way, when the number of over winnings is counted after the eighth time, the number of over winnings is counted after the eighth time by surely executing the premium performance as the performance at the time of over winning. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of loss such as not being able to see the premium performance even though the count is .

[11-3. Storage ball production by storage ball production unit]
Next, as an example of an effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 according to various commands from the main control board 1310, when executing the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 , an example of the effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400. FIG. Here, the 14R time-saving jackpot is won by lottery based on the reception of game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the jackpot game is being executed, and the power failure occurs during the fourth round. A brief description will be given of an example of an effect when a problem occurs in the stored ball effect unit 3400 at the end of the sixth round after power is restored.

Various images and characters are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 as the effect of the big win game progresses. In addition to these images and characters, pitch information is displayed on the upper right side of the display area (hereinafter referred to as "upper right side of the screen"). To briefly explain the configuration of this pitch information, round information is displayed on the upper right side of the screen, information on the total number of pitches played is displayed below the round information, information on the number of pitches played by the attacker is displayed below the information on the total number of pitches played, Pooled ball information is displayed below the attacker's information. The stored ball output information is displayed while the stored ball effect unit 3400 is executing the stored ball effect.

The round information notifies the number of rounds being digested, and is displayed based on the big hit round start command according to the number of rounds from the main control board 1310 . For example, when the digestion of the first round is started, the main control board 1310 transmits a jackpot round start command corresponding to the first round, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs "1 round ” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

The total number of put-out balls information reports the sum of the number of put-out balls obtained in already completed rounds. Control is performed to display the calculated result on the effect display device 1600 .

The attacker's ball-out information reports the number of balls won by entering the big prize-winning hole in the round being completed. The result calculated based on the prize winning hole entry command is displayed. For example, when the digestion of the first round is started and the game ball is accepted in the first big winning hole 2005, the main control board 1310 transmits the first big winning hole entry ball command for each ball entering. . The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 initializes the attacker's pitching information (initial value 0) each time the round is started, and the attacker's pitching is performed each time the first prize winning slot entry command is received. A calculation is performed to add (increment) 15 balls to the information, and control is performed to display the calculation result on the effect display device 1600 .

The stored ball output information notifies the number of output balls acquired by the number of balls discharged from the stored game balls in the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 in the round being digested, and the stored ball effect unit 3400 The result calculated based on the detection signal from the stored ball count sensor 3530 provided is displayed. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 first initializes the stored ball output information (initial value 0) each time the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 is started, and is provided in the stored ball effect unit 3400. Based on the detection signal from the stored ball count sensor 3530, calculation for adding (incrementing) four balls is performed, and control is performed to display the calculation result on the effect display device 1600. FIG. The reason why the 4 balls are added is that when the game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001a provided in the stored ball effect unit 3400, 4 game balls are paid out (4 game balls are paid out as prize balls). It is from.

When a big winning game occurs and the first round is finished, the second round is started. In the state where the 14R time-saving jackpot is won and the jackpot game is being executed, the reserved ball presentation unit 3400 performs the reserved ball presentation in even-numbered rounds. For this reason, the above-described stored ball output information is displayed on the performance display device 1600 during execution of the stored ball performance by the stored ball performance unit 3400, so that it appears on the performance display device 1600 every even-numbered round. .

When digestion of the second round is started, as shown in FIG. A message "Release the stored ball!" In this pitching information, "2 rounds" is displayed on the production display device 1600 as round information, and as the total number of pitching information, the calculation result "TOTAL : 150 GET" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and if the number of balls won by entering the big winning hole at the present time during the second round is, for example, 45, as the attacker's ball information, "AT : 45 GET" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the number of game balls discharged in the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 during the second round as the stored ball output information is, for example, 2 balls. In some cases, “plus alpha (denoted as “+α” in the figure, hereinafter the same): 8 GET” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

In the interval from the end of the second round to the start of the third round, the number of balls put out displayed on the performance display device 1600 as the attacker's put out information at the end of the second round, and the number of balls put out at the end of the second round A production mode is executed in which the number of put-out balls displayed on the production display device 1600 as stored ball put-out information is subtracted one by one, and the subtracted number of balls is added to the total number of put-out balls information. The effect mode is executed, and the number of put-out balls displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the put-out information of the attacker and the number of put-out balls displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the put-out information of the stored balls are subtracted. When it becomes zero, the total number of put-out balls acquired from the first round to the second round is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the total number of put-out ball information. It disappears from 1600.

It should be noted that the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the stored ball effect unit 3400 has a problem when the second round ends. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 confirms whether or not there is a problem with the stored ball effect unit 3400 in the above-described stored ball effect unit failure determination control process.

When the digestion of the third round is started, as shown in FIG. 165(B), following the second round, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays information on the number of balls put out. In this pitch information, "3 rounds" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as round information, and "TOTAL: 320 GET", which is the total number of pitches obtained from the first round to the second round, is displayed as the total number of pitches. Displayed on the device 1600 as the attacker's pitching information is "AT: 60 GET" when the number of pitches obtained by entering the big winning slot at the present time during the completion of the third round is, for example, 60 pitches. Displayed on device 1600 .

In the interval from the end of the third round to the start of the fourth round, the number of put-out balls displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the attacker's put-out information at the end of the third round is subtracted by one. At the same time as the mode is executed, an effect mode of adding this subtracted number of balls to the number of put-out balls information is executed, and the number of put-out balls displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the put-out ball information of the attacker is subtracted to zero. Then, the total number of put out balls obtained in the first to third rounds is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as the number of put out ball information. Appear.

Digestion of the fourth round is started, and when the second round ends, it is confirmed whether there is a problem with the stored ball effect unit 3400, and if there is no problem, as shown in FIG. Then, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, information on the put-out ball is displayed, and a message "Release the stored balls!" In this pitch information, "4 rounds" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as round information, and "TOTAL: 470 GET" is displayed as the total number of pitches obtained in the first to third rounds. Displayed on the device 1600 as the attacker's pitching information is "AT: 15 GET" if the number of pitches obtained by entering the big winning hole at the present time during the fourth round is, for example, 15 balls. Displayed on the device 1600 as stored ball output information, when the number of balls discharged in the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 at the present time during the fourth round digestion is, for example, 1 ball, "+α : 4 GET” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

At this time, a power failure occurs, and then, when the power is restored and the power is restored, the effect display device 1600 first displays a message "power is being restored", as shown in FIG. 165(D). Although the power is being restored, when the main control board 1310 returns to the game state just before the power failure based on the backup information, various commands are started to be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 . The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 can return to the progress of the performance immediately before the power failure occurs based on the various commands received, but when the power failure occurs, all the above-mentioned ball-out information is lost. Therefore, even if the power is restored, it is not possible to know what round the round in progress was just before the power failure occurred, unless a big hit round start command is received from the main control board 1310.例文帳に追加

For this reason, the main control board 1310 recovers power and returns based on the backup information to continue the fourth round and start the fourth round. When the ball command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. Round” is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as the round information because it is not known whether it is the th round, and the total number of balls played is displayed as “TOTAL: ???? is displayed on the production display device 1600, and "AT: 15 GET" is displayed on the production display device 1600 as the 15 balls acquired after returning as the attacker's ball output information. “+α: ??? GET” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the ball output information. When a power outage occurs, the game balls stored in the storage space 3415 in the ball storage section 3420 of the storage ball effect unit 3400 move naturally from the operating position to the original position. The game balls stored on the upper surface of the storage plate 3490 fall toward the ball discharge passage 3487, and pass through the ball discharge passage 3457 and return to the game area 5a of the game board 5 from the discharge port 3485. It is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via 1200 and collected to the island facility of the game hall. Therefore, when power is restored, the game balls stored in the stored ball effect unit 3400 do not exist at all.

In the interval from when the power is restored and the 4th round ends to the start of the 5th round, the number of put-out balls displayed on the performance display device 1600 as the attacker's put-out information at the end of the 4th round is one ball at a time. At the same time, the effect mode of adding the subtracted number of balls to the initial value 0 of the information on the number of put-out balls is executed, and the result displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the information of the number of put-out balls of the attacker is executed. When the number of balls is subtracted and becomes zero, the total number of put-out balls obtained after the power is restored is displayed as a concrete numerical value for the first time on the performance display device 1600 as information on the number of put-out balls. At this time, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 still does not know what round it is. Since it is not known, "+α:???GET" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as stored ball output information.

It should be noted that even if the main control board 1310 finishes the fourth round, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will completely cancel the content of the ball storage effect by the ball storage effect unit 3400 that was being performed until just before the power failure occurred. Since it is lost, the process of determining whether or not the stored ball effect unit 3400 has a problem (that is, the above-described stored ball effect unit defect determination control process) is not performed. In other words, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 cannot grasp at this time even if some trouble occurs in the stored ball effect unit 3400 due to the occurrence of a power failure. Therefore, when the sixth round is started, the stored ball effect is performed by the stored ball effect unit 3400 even if the stored ball effect unit 3400 has some trouble.

When digestion of the 5th round is started, as shown in FIG. Recognize. For this reason, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is updated with the ball-out information. In the put-out information, "5 rounds" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the round information, and "TOTAL: 45 GET" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the information on the total number of put-out balls obtained after the power is restored. As the attacker's pitching information, "AT: 60 GET" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the number of pitches obtained by entering the big winning slot at the present time during the fifth round is, for example, 60. , and the stored ball output information disappears from the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

In the interval from the end of the fifth round to the start of the sixth round, the number of put-out balls displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the attacker's put-out information at the end of the fifth round is reduced by one. At the same time as the mode is executed, an effect mode of adding this subtracted number of balls to the number of put-out balls information is executed, and the number of put-out balls displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the put-out ball information of the attacker is subtracted to zero. Then, after the power is restored, the total number of put out balls obtained in the fifth round is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as the number of put out ball information. Appear.

When the digestion of the sixth round is started, as shown in FIG. A message "Release the stored ball!" In this ball throwing information, "6 rounds" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the round information, and "TOTAL: 195 GET" is displayed as the total number of throwing balls obtained from power restoration to the fifth round. Displayed on the display device 1600, as the attacker's pitching information, "AT: 90 GET" is produced when the number of pitches obtained by entering the big winning hole at the present time during the sixth round is, for example, 90 balls. Displayed on the display device 1600 as stored ball output information, when the number of balls discharged in the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 at the present time during the sixth round is, for example, 3 balls, " +α: 12 GET” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

In the interval from the end of the 6th round to the start of the 7th round, the number of balls displayed on the performance display device 1600 as the attacker's ball information at the end of the 6th round, A production mode is executed in which the number of put-out balls displayed on the production display device 1600 as stored ball put-out information is subtracted one by one, and the subtracted number of balls is added to the number of put-out balls information. The effect mode is executed, and the number of put-out balls displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the put-out information of the attacker and the number of put-out balls displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the put-out information of the stored balls are subtracted. When it becomes zero, the total number of balls put out until the sixth round after the power is restored is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as information on the number of balls put out. disappear from the device 1600;

It should be noted that the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the stored ball effect unit 3400 has a problem when the sixth round ends. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 confirms whether or not there is a problem with the stored ball effect unit 3400 in the above-described stored ball effect unit failure determination control process.

With this confirmation, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in a state where it is grasped that some kind of trouble has occurred in the stored ball effect unit 3400, starts the digestion of the 7th round, and when the processing of FIG. As shown in H), after the sixth round, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the information about the put-out ball. In this ball throwing information, "7 rounds" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the round information, and "TOTAL: 365 GET" is displayed as the total number of throwing balls obtained from power restoration to the sixth round. Displayed on the display device 1600, as the attacker's pitching information, if the number of pitches obtained by entering the big winning hole at the present time during the 7th round is, for example, 15, "AT: 15 GET" is produced. It is displayed on the display device 1600 .

In the interval from the end of the 7th round to the start of the 8th round, the number of put-out balls displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the attacker's put-out information at the end of the 7th round is subtracted by one. At the same time as the mode is executed, an effect mode of adding this subtracted number of balls to the number of put-out balls information is executed, and the number of put-out balls displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the put-out ball information of the attacker is subtracted to zero. Then, the total number of put-out balls acquired by the seventh round after power is restored is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as information on the number of put-out balls.

Digestion of the 8th round is started, and when the 6th round ends, it is confirmed that there is a problem with the stored ball production unit 3400, and it is understood that there is a problem. ), the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 is not executed even though it is an even-numbered round of the eighth round. Following the 7th round, although the ball-out information is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 , the stored ball-out information disappears from the effect display device 1600 . Then, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, instead of executing the stored-ball effect by the stored-ball effect unit 3400, provides a preliminary effect (in other words, a storage effect by the stored-ball effect unit 3400) that informs the player of an increase in ball output The message "Increase in ball output!" It is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a large size compared to the size. At this time, the background image is darkened so that the message "Increasing number of balls!" The speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 for bass sounds, etc.) are used for notification.

As for the put-out information, "8 rounds" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as the round information, and "TOTAL: 515 GET" is displayed as the put-out information as the total number of put-out balls obtained from power restoration to the 7th round. Displayed on the device 1600 as the attacking ball information is "AT: 75 GET" when the number of balls won by entering the big winning hole at the present time during the 8th round is, for example, 75 balls. Displayed on device 1600 .

In the interval from the end of the 8th round to the start of the 9th round, the number of put-out balls displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the attacker's put-out information at the end of the 8th round is subtracted by one. At the same time as the mode is executed, an effect mode of adding this subtracted number of balls to the number of put-out balls information is executed, and the number of put-out balls displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the put-out ball information of the attacker is subtracted to zero. Then, the total number of put-out balls acquired by the eighth round after the power is restored is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as information on the number of put-out balls.

Incidentally, since the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 already has a problem with the stored ball effect unit 3400 when the eighth round ends, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the above-described stored ball effect unit failure determination. No control processing is performed, and the existence or non-existence of trouble in the stored ball effect unit 3400 is not confirmed. After that, the digestion progresses from the 9th round to the 14th round, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the peripheral control of the peripheral control board 1510 in the 10th, 12th, and 14th rounds, which are even-numbered rounds. The IC 1510a does not perform the above-described stored ball effect unit defect determination control process and does not check whether there is a defect in the stored ball effect unit 3400. The presence or absence of a defect is reset in 14R, and when a big win game is generated by winning, for example, the 14R time-saving jackpot next time, the presence or absence of a defect in the stored ball presentation unit 3400 is confirmed again.

[12. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment,
As a result, in the normal state, the central decorative body 3351 in the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located at the retracted position raised near the upper edge in the front view game area 5a, and the two first A pair of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 respectively overlaps each other two by two on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 in the first position. located in Here, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a is arranged on the left side of the central decorative body 3351, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a is arranged on the right side thereof. For this reason, the central decorative body 3351 can be seen near the upper edge in the front view game area 5a, and the first protruding decorative part 3352a and the second protruding decorative part 3353a are respectively on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351. is visible, and the inside of the game area 5a is decorated with a central decoration body 3351 and two first projecting decoration parts 3352a and second projecting decoration parts 3353a to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁In a normal state, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and second protruding decorative portions 3353a positioned at the first position overlap each other in the front-rear direction. Since only the decorative portion 3353a can be seen from the front (player side), it is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the rear side. It can be recognized that the number of the first protruding decoration part 3352a and the second protruding decoration part 3353a is the number that is currently visible. In a normal state, when the LEDs mounted on the upper front center decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board, and the second protruding decorative part decorative board emit light, the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative part 3352a, and the second Since the two protruding decorative parts 3353a can be decorated with light, the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative part 3352a and the second protruding decorative part 3353a can be used to illuminate the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative part 3352a and the second protruding decorative part 3353a. The portion 3353a can be made conspicuous, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decoration 3350 such as the central decoration 3351 or the like. In addition, in a normal state, the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are at retracted positions near the upper edge of the front view game area 5a, so that the front view game can be played. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the area 5a is not blocked by the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351, and is in a good state from the player's side. The effect image can be visually recognized, and the player can enjoy the effect image.

In this normal state, the upper front driving motor 3302 is driven according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a, and the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position toward the lower appearing position. Then, the central decoration 3351 and the two first protrusion decorations 3352 and the second protrusion decorations 3353 descend together. At this time, on the left side of the central decoration 3351, the second protruding decoration 3353a of the second protruding decoration 3353, on the right of the central decoration 3351, on the first protruding decoration 3352a of the remaining first protruding decoration 3352, The lower ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 are attached respectively, and the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 are attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable within a predetermined range. Since it is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the same vertical direction as the movement direction of the central ornament 3351, it is attached to the tip of the first link rod 3303 that is attached to the center ornament 3351, and thus it descends together with the central ornament 3351. The two first projecting decorations 3352 and second projecting decorations 3353 (the first projecting decoration part 3352a and the second projecting decoration part 3353a) move the left and right second link rods 3304 in the same direction as the central decoration 3351 moves. Pulled downward, the upper end of the second link rod 3304 slides downward relative to the unit base 3301 . The upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 are vertically slidable within a range shorter than the moving distance (lifting distance) of the central decoration 3351 by the first link rod 3303. The upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 reach the lower ends in the sliding direction before the 3351 reaches the appearance position of the lower end. After the upper end of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, when the central decorative body 3351 moves further downward in the direction of the appearance position, the lower end of the second link rod 3304 reaches the appearance position further. Since it cannot move in the direction of (downward), the right side of the two first projecting decorations 3352 and the second projecting decorations 3353 that try to descend together with the central decoration 3351 by the left and right second link rods 3304 The first protruding decorative part 3352a and the second protruding decorative part 3353a on the left side are pulled upward toward the unit base 3301, and this force causes the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 to move toward the center decoration. A first connecting rod 3352b and a second connecting rod 3353b attached to the rear side of the body 3351 rotate in different directions about an axis extending forward and backward around the center of the central decorative body 3351, The first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a move from the first position in which they are overlapped in the front-rear direction to the second position in which the overlap in the front-rear direction is eliminated. As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a, which have been seen as one on the left and right sides of the central decoration 3351, become two and rotate in a fan-like manner. Four first projecting decorations 3352a and second projecting decorations 3353a radially extending from the central decoration 3351 form one large decoration to be shown to the player. Therefore, since all the numbers of the first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the second protruding decorative parts 3353a appear around the central decorative body 3351 that has moved to the center of the game area 5a, the first protruding decorative part 3352a and the second protruding decorative part 3352a The increase in the number of protruding decorative parts 3353a can surprise the player, and the expansion of the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the second protruding decorative parts 3353a around the central decorative body 3351 makes the entire decoration. can be increased, giving a strong impact to the player and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, as described above, when the upper front driving motor 3302 lowers the central decorative body 3351 from the retracted position at the rising end to the appearance position at the lowering end, the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 move toward the lower ends in the sliding direction. The two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 overlap each other until reaching (the downward rotation end of the tip side of the first link rod 3303). After the upper end of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, the central decoration 3351 moves downward in the direction of the appearance position (downward). ), the left and right two first protruding decorative parts 3352a and second protruding decorative parts 3353a rotate from the first position where they overlap each other to the second position where the overlap is eliminated, and radially around the central decoration 3351. Since the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative bodies 3353 can show the player a movable effect of two-stage movement, the upper front drive motor 3302 By appropriately controlling the movement (effect) in the first stage, it is possible to move (effect) to the second stage, and the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can increase the variation of the movable effect, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player can hardly get bored, and the player's game can be improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

Further, according to the game state, the upper front driving motor 3302 can move the central decorative body 3351 from the retracted position at the raised end to the appearing position at the lowered end. Depending on whether or not the central decorative body 3351 descends to the appearance position when the game state changes, the player can be thrilled and entertained. Then, the upper front driving motor 3302 lowers the central decoration 3351 from the retracted position toward the appearing position, and moves it to the first stage where the first protruding decoration 3352 and the second protruding decoration 3353 do not rotate. Since the decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 move downward in their normal state, it seems that something good will happen to the player. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for the game. Furthermore, when the central decoration 3351 is lowered to the second stage, that is, to the appearance position of the lower end, the four first projecting decorations 3352a and the second projecting decorations 3353a spread radially around the central decoration 3351. Thus, the central decorative body 3351, the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the second protruding decorative parts 3353a can show a large decoration to the player, and the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a Since the second protruding decorative portion 3353a descends, the player can feel as if a sign from the sky is given to the player. It is possible to make the player think that the game is going to occur, to increase the expectation for the game, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In this way, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position to the appearing position, the movements of the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative bodies 3353 can be changed in two stages. Therefore, the possibility (expected value) of the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is different between when the player stops at the first stage and when the player stops at the second stage. It is possible to recognize that the second stage has a higher expected value than the first stage. Various expected values can be displayed to the player with the body 3353 .

In addition, the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position near the center in the front view game area 5a, and by lowering the central decorative body 3351 to the appearance position, a space is secured around the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, the four first protruding decorations 3352a and the second protruding decorations 3353a can be moved from the first position to the second position around the central decoration 3351 at the appearing position to spread radially. The body 3351 and the two first projecting decorations 3352 and second projecting decorations 3353 can form as large a decoration as possible. Therefore, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302 according to the game state, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first projections radially spreading around it are located near the center of the game area 5a. Since the player can see the large decoration by the decorative part 3352a and the second protruding decorative part 3353a, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the center of the game area 5a. At the same time, the central decoration body 3351 and the four first projecting decorative parts 3352a and the second projecting decorative parts 3353a can be enjoyed by the large decoration, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when the central decoration 3351 is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position by the upper front drive motor 3302, the two first projecting decorations 3352a and second projecting decorations 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decoration 3351 move to the first positions. to the second position, and one upper front drive motor 3302 moves the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative bodies 3353, When performing an effect (movable effect) using the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353, it is sufficient to control only one upper front drive motor 3302, and the effect can be achieved. This load can be reduced. Therefore, when the central decoration 3351 and the two first projecting decorations 3352 and the second projecting decorations 3353 are used for the production, the other movable decorations, the light-emitting decorations, etc. can be produced at the same time. Also, since it is possible to suppress the increase in the load applied to the control of the production, the control of the production becomes unstable due to overload, so that the upper front drive motor 3302 drives the central decoration 3351 and the two first projecting decorations 3352 And it is possible to prevent jerky movement of the second protruding decorative body 3353, and to ensure the production effect using the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can achieve the above-described effects.

As described above, while the central decoration 3351 is descending to the appearance position, the two first projecting decorations 3352a and the second projecting decorations 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decoration 3351 are moved to the second position. Since they are moved, the speed at which the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a move (rotate) to the second position is relatively faster than the moving speed of the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the second protruding decorative parts 3353a can suddenly spread around the central decorative body 3351. The production using the one projecting decoration 3352 and the second projecting decoration 3353 can be enjoyed.

Further, as described above, after the central decorative body 3351 has moved from the retracted position toward the appearing position to some extent, the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are moved to the first position. It is designed to be moved from one position to a second position. That is, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a are moved from the vicinity of the upper edge of the front view game area 5a toward the center to some extent, and then spread radially around the central decorative body 3351. position to the second position, when the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a move to the second positions, the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a This makes it difficult for the portion 3353a to come into contact with other members, thereby preventing damage to the first decorative protrusion 3352a, the second decorative protrusion 3353a, and other members.

Also, when the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front central decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board, and the second protruding decorative part decorative board emit light, the central decorative body 3351, the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and Since the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be independently luminous decoration, the central decorative body 3351 and the first protruding decorative portion 3351 and the first protruding decorative portion 3353a are illuminated by the luminous decoration of the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a. The decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be conspicuous, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, before the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative bodies 3353 are lowered from the retracted position to the appearing position by the upper front driving motor 3302, the upper front central decorative substrate, the first protruding decoration The central decoration body 3351 and the first and second projecting decorative parts 3352a and 3353a on both the left and right sides are illuminated by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the central decoration board and the second projecting decorative part decorative board. can be made to pay attention to the central decorative body 3351 and the like. can let

Then, the upper front driving motor 3302 lowers the central decoration 3351 to the appearance position on the central side of the game area 5a, and the four first projecting decorations 3352a and the second projecting decorations 3353a are formed radially around the central decoration 3351. If it spreads over a wide area, it can surprise the player and make him think that something good is going to happen, and increase the player's sense of anticipation for the game. When the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearing position, the central decorative body 3351, the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the second protruding decorative part are connected by the upper front central decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board and the second protruding decorative part decorative board. When the two protruding decorative portion 3353a is made to emit light, the player can see the decoration that shines greatly in the center of the game area 5a. ”) will occur, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be heightened to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a, when the upper front drive motor 3302 lowers the central decorative body 3351 to the appearance position in the center of the game area 5a, the center Since (a part of) the effect image is blocked by the decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353, the player can notice and pay attention to the descent of the central decorative body 3351 and the like. It can move from the first position to the second position to reveal four first protruding decorations 3352a and second protruding decorations 3353a radiating around the central decoration 3351 . Therefore, in the center of the game area 5a, the large decoration by the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the second protruding decorative parts 3353a can be surely shown to the player, and the above-described effects can be achieved. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 that reliably plays.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a, and the game ball B is placed in the area excluding the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500. You can play games that are distributed. A presentation effect unit 2600 having a single transparent front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame. The effect image displayed on the display device 1600 can be enjoyed. In this state, a predetermined LED 2630 out of a plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the upper peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 via a reflector 2620 is selected according to the game state that changes as a game is played in the game area 5a. When (one of the first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group 2630c, and fourth LED group 2630d) is caused to emit light, a specific Light is applied to the light entering portion 2612 (one of the first specific light entering portion 2612a, the second specific light entering portion 2612b, the third specific light entering portion 2612c, and the fourth specific light entering portion 2612d), and the specific light entering portion 2612 The corresponding pattern 2614 (any one of the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d) is displayed by light emitted from the light portion 2612 and incident on the front light guide plate 2610. The Rukoto. More specifically, the periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted in the fixed recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, and through a plurality of through holes 2622 penetrating the fixed recess 2621, light is directed toward the specific light entrance portion 2612. Since a plurality of LEDs are attached to the reflector 2620 through the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 so as to face the LEDs 2630, the LEDs 2630 can be brought as close as possible to the peripheral surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 (specific light entrance portion 2612). The light from the LED 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2612, and the through hole 2622 can prevent the light from the LED 2630 from diffusing, thereby preventing the specific light entrance portion 2612 from not corresponding to the specific light entrance portion. The portion 2612 can be prevented from being irradiated with light.

Then, the light incident on the light guide plate body 2611 from the specific light entrance portion 2612 passes through the corresponding reflecting concave portions 2613 (first reflecting concave portion 2613a, second reflecting concave portion 2613b, third reflecting concave portion 2613c, and fourth reflecting concave portion 2613d). , or ), the light irradiated in the reflecting concave portion 2613 is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction. At this time, since the reflective concave portion 2613 extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, the light reflected or refracted by the reflective concave portion 2613 is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction. Since the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 is included, the light guide plate main body 2611 can be seen by the reflective recesses 2613 from the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a (the light guide plate main body 2611). The light reflected or refracted in the direction perpendicular to the surface of .theta. On the other hand, the light that enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the specific light entering portion 2612 reaches the reflecting recesses 2613 that do not correspond to the specific light entering portion 2612, but the reflecting recesses 2613 that do not correspond Since it extends in a direction different from the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the specific light entrance portion 2612 on which the light is incident, the direction of the light reflected or refracted by the reflecting concave portion 2613 is perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. , so that the eyes of the player seated in front of the game area 5a do not reach the eyes of the player, and the non-corresponding reflective recesses 2613 do not appear to shine. In this way, when the LED 2630 irradiates the specific light entrance portion 2612 with light, only the reflecting concave portion 2613 corresponding to the specific light entrance portion 2612 reflects or refracts the light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. As a result, the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a can be seen, and the player can see that only the pattern 2614 composed of the corresponding reflective recesses 2613 is illuminated. .

Therefore, by appropriately selecting the LED 2630 to emit light and changing the specific light entrance portion 2612 to which light is emitted, the pattern 2614 displayed by light emission on the front light guide plate 2610 can be variously changed. The luminescent display of 2614 can surprise and amuse the player, making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game and suppressing a decline in interest in the game. Since the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 are formed so as to be sequentially related to each other, a plurality of LEDs 2630 (first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group) 2630c, fourth LED group 2630d) are sequentially illuminated, a plurality of patterns (a first pattern 2614a, a second pattern 2614b, a third pattern 2614c, and a fourth pattern 2614d) are sequentially illuminated and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 for animation. It is possible to show the player a light-emitting display with movement such as .

Specifically, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are illuminated in order, and after the last fourth pattern 2614d, the first pattern 2614a returns to the beginning. When the luminous display is repeated in order from the top, the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 allow the player to see the luminous display that continues to move from the outside toward the center. It is possible to create an illusion that the player is in a state of concentration, to make the player think that something good will happen, and to heighten the player's expectations for the game. On the other hand, on the contrary, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, the second pattern 2614b, and the first pattern 2614a are illuminated in order, and after the last first pattern 2614a, the first pattern is returned to the first pattern. When the luminous display is repeated in order from the four patterns 2614d, the plurality of patterns of the light guide plate allow the player to see the luminous display that continues to move outward from the center. The player can be made to have the illusion of spreading out from the center or the illusion of moving forward, and the player can have a premonition that the game state will change. In this way, since it is possible to show the player a moving light-emitting display like an animation, the moving light-emitting display by the front light guide plate 2610, which has never been seen in the pachinko machine 1 so far, is attractive to the player. The impact can be given, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be made to think that an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous will occur, so that the player will not be affected by the game. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500 attached to the center accessory 2500 in the center of the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is illuminated by the LED 2630, the light is emitted. The displayed pattern 2614 does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good condition, and the game becomes hard to see. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful and enjoy the game in a good condition.

In addition, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed concave portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 can be mounted more easily than in the conventional case where two members are used for attachment. , and the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at desired positions with respect to the front light guide plate 2610 . Therefore, since the LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light entrance portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LEDs 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light entrance portions 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 can be displayed. Light emission display can be reliably performed.

Furthermore, since the pattern 2614 is composed of a plurality of reflective concave portions 2613 extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the specific light entrance portions 2612 , the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 are arranged on the light guide plate main body 2611 . It can be arranged on a specific side (here, the upper side) of the periphery, and by arranging a plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) is guided. It can be arranged only on the upper side of the light plate main body 2611 . As a result, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) does not enclose the outer periphery of the light guide plate body 2611, and the front cover (frame body) covers the entire periphery of the light guide plate body 2611. Therefore, it is possible to avoid partitioning the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged in the rear, so that the effect image and the like can be easily seen from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to entertain the performance image in a good state to suppress the deterioration of interest, and to have a feeling of openness by not having a frame-like partition in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The appearance of the game area 5a is improved to make the pachinko machine 1 attractive enough to strongly attract the interest of the players.

In addition, as described above, since a plurality of (four in this case) patterns 2614 can be displayed by light emission with a single front light guide plate 2610, there is no need to use a plurality of light guide plates as in the conventional art. The front-rear direction dimension of the light-emitting display of the pattern 2614 can be made as small (thin) as possible, and since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 is directed toward the player side. The position can be as close as possible, and a wide space behind the front light guide plate 2610 can be easily secured. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. are placed on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. can be arranged, thereby improving the appearance in the game area 5a and making it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the players, and in addition to the performance by the light emitting display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable performance By performing movable performances by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable performance unit 3200, the upper front movable performance unit 3300, etc., various performances can be provided to the players, and the players are entertained and the decrease in interest is suppressed. be able to.

In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, by matching the periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500, the periphery of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610. A strong impact can be given to the player who thought that the 2610 did not exist, and the player can be surprised, and the light emitting display of the plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest. can.

Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflectors 2620 are hidden from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the game area 5a from deteriorating due to the reflectors 2620 being visible. , the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 are hidden from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630. By causing the pattern 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 to emit light, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display that the player did not expect, and the light emission display of the pattern 2614 can be enjoyed by the player. It is possible to make the player think that something good will happen to the player, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610, the light emission display of the plurality of patterns 2614 different from each other by the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 can be achieved. Since it is possible to show the player an effect combining the above, various effects can be performed by appropriately combining them, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 The player can be entertained by the performance by and can suppress the decline of the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 are different, it is possible to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the luminescently displayed patterns 2614 by displaying an effect image associated with the plurality of luminescently displayed patterns 2614 on the front light guide plate 2610. A performance (display performance) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a has an upper rear left decoration body 3220 and a left slider 3212 and a right slider 3232 which move in the vertical direction. An upper rear right decoration 3240 and an upper rear left decoration substrate and an upper rear right decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted for decorating the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are attached. Therefore, the weight applied to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 is increased, and a large force acts to move the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 downward due to gravity. In this state, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is transported or installed on the island facility of the game hall, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted or vibrates. is applied and the force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 further acts, the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and the upper rear right driving motor 3234 and the left slider 3212 and Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between each of the right sliders 3232 (the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240), the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 tend to descend, and the clutch mechanism 3250 Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the output member 3253 tries to rotate, the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, and the roller 3254 is held between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b. It will be in the biting state, and the force which will try to rotate the storage case 3251 will act with a plurality of rollers 3254 . At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255 , frictional resistance is generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 , and the housing case 3251 is pushed through the plurality of rollers 3254 . Frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 resists the force to rotate the housing case 3251, preventing the housing case 3251 from rotating and locking the rotation of the output member 3253. state. In this way, output according to the rotational load from the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decoration body 3220 side and upper rear right decoration body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from freely descending. Therefore, the movement of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 can be locked by the clutch mechanism 3250, so that the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 can be freely moved during transportation or installation. By moving to , it is possible to prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from colliding with other members at the moving end and damaging the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 and other members. In addition, the movement performance by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be surely enjoyed, and the deterioration of interest can be suppressed.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is shipped from the manufacturing factory, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are shipped in the state of the origin position, the upper rear left decoration body 3250 is operated by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since the decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 can be prevented from moving without permission, the origin adjustment of the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 can be performed when installed on the island facility of the game hall. is not required, the labor required for installing the pachinko machine 1 can be saved, and the burden required for installation can be reduced.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is installed or maintained, for some reason, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved from their regular positions (origin positions). In this case, when the operator tries to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to the regular positions by hand, the clutch mechanism 3250 uses the tightening spring as a torque limiter on the outer peripheral side of the storage case 3251. By tightening with 3255, the rotation of the output side is locked according to the rotation load, and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are prevented from moving. In order to move 3220 and upper rear right decoration 3240, apply a stronger force to upper rear left decoration 3220 and upper rear right decoration 3240, and rotate storage case 3251 via a plurality of rollers 3254. When this force becomes larger than the frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 slide against the frictional resistance, As the storage case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates together with the storage case 3251 and becomes unlocked. Since the force is transmitted to the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side, the strong force acting on the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 is transmitted to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. It is possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220, the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the clutch mechanism 3250, and the like from being damaged.

In addition, according to the game state that changes by playing a game in the game area 5a, the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and the upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear left unit 3210 in the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, its rotation is transmitted through the clutch mechanism 3250, and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 attached to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 move to the front view game area 5a. Since the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 attached to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 move downward from the upper part of the inside, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are lowered respectively. The player can be surprised by the descent (appearance) of the upper rear right decoration 3240, and the player is made to pay attention to the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear left decoration 3220 are displayed. The movement and decoration of the right decorative body 3240 can be enjoyed, and the lowering of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 may bring some good to the player. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

At this time, a clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the upper rear left driving motor 3214, the upper rear right driving motor 3234, and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (upper rear left decoration 3220 and upper rear right decoration 3240). Therefore, vibrations from the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, other movable decorations, etc., the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, the upper Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate as the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 tend to descend due to the gravity acting on the rear left decoration substrate and the upper rear right decoration substrate, the output member 3253 The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the roller 3254, and the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b. A force will act to rotate it. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255 , frictional resistance is generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 , and the housing case 3251 is pushed through the plurality of rollers 3254 . Frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 resists the force to rotate the housing case 3251, preventing the housing case 3251 from rotating and locking the rotation of the output member 3253. state. In this way, output according to the rotational load from the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decoration body 3220 side and upper rear right decoration body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from descending freely. Unexpected movement (falling) of the upper rear right decoration 3240 can be prevented, and the unintended movement of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 makes the player feel distrustful. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a .

Furthermore, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side are going to descend, the clutch mechanism 3250 can restrict and lock the rotation of the output member 3253, so that the left slider 3212 and Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary height position through the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be varied. A player can be shown a variety of performance patterns of lifting and stopping at a position, and the player is less likely to get bored with the movable performance of the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can be made

In addition, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at any position in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3240 can be stopped. It is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and it is possible to prevent early damage to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 due to overload. Disturbance of the game due to breakage of the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be avoided to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119(d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are locked by the lock springs 3260. In the case of urging toward the protruding portion 3252a close to each of them, when a force to rotate the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately applied. can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the lock is locked after the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 until such time can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and the upper rear right driving motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 descend smoothly without jerking. Therefore, the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 does not give the player a sense of incongruity, and the movable performance by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 is enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the clutch mechanism 3250 has a relatively simple configuration using a housing case 3251, an input member 3252, an output member 3253, a plurality of rollers 3254, etc., two planetary gear mechanisms are provided as the clutch mechanism. Therefore, by making the clutch mechanism 3250 smaller, the space for arranging the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (or other members) can be saved. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be made relatively large and conspicuous. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player by strongly attracting the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 having the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are provided, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3230 are provided according to the game state. By appropriately moving the upper rear right decoration 3240 up and down via the respective left slider 3212 and right slider 3232, the two upper rear left decorations 3220 and the upper rear right decorations 3240 play a variety of movable patterns. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and reduce the interest in the game. At this time, since each of the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 includes the clutch mechanism 3250, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are provided as described above. moves smoothly, the player can enjoy the movements of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, when the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 of the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 are moved downward according to the game state, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3220 Since the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 can be combined to form a large decoration by bringing the rear right decorations 3240 into contact with each other, a large decoration appears when they are combined. By doing so, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, " It is possible to make the player think that a "jackpot game") will occur, heighten expectations for the game, and suppress a decline in interest. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other, the mutual contact causes the upper rear right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 to move. However, since each has a clutch mechanism 3250, as described above, the force (from the output side) to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 Even if a rotating force acts, the roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are engaged. can be locked, movement of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 can be prevented by contact with each other, and the reaction of contact can prevent the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 from moving. It is possible to prevent the upper rear right decoration body 3240 from returning, and the movable performance of the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 abutting and uniting is surely enjoyed by the player to reduce interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be decorated with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper rear left decorative board and the upper rear right decorative board to emit light according to the game state. Therefore, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be made conspicuous to strongly attract the player's interest, and the decoration and movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 In addition, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are decorated with light, so that the player can be made to think that something good will happen. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by increasing the expectation for. In addition, since the upper rear left decoration substrate and the upper rear right decoration substrate are provided, the weight of the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 increases, and the gravity force and inertial force acting on the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 increase. Also, as described above, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be reliably stopped via the left base 3211 and the right base 3231. The upper rear left decoration substrate and the upper rear right decoration substrate can prevent the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 from moving unintentionally. It is possible to make the upper rear right decorative body 3240 perform a desired movement with a high performance effect, and to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, in the clutch mechanism 3250, the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the body housing 3256. 3253 is rotated to press the roller 3254 against the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, and the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Therefore, when a force to rotate the storage case 3251 acts via the plurality of rollers 3254 , the force (torque) to rotate the storage case 3251 becomes frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255 . If it is larger than , a slip occurs between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, causing the storage case 3251 to rotate. When the storage case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates via a plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 comes into contact with the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252. Rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252 . As a result, when an attempt is made to rotate the output member 3253 from the output side with a strong force, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 that tightens the housing case 3251 and the housing case 3251, and the rotational force is transferred to the upper rear left side. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 is strongly caught and the lock cannot be released, or the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration. It is possible to prevent the body 3240, the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 from being damaged, and it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the lower central lifting base 3121 and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3151 on both left and right sides of the lower central lifting base 3121 are located in the front view game area 5a. After lowering the elevating base 3171, the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body are moved by sliders or the like (slide mechanisms) attached to the respective lower left side elevating base 3151 and lower right side elevating base 3171. 3173 are slid outward in the left and right direction, and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation part 301 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit 200 below the game area 5a is retracted downward. In this normal state, the effect image displayed by the effect display device 1600 can be seen in the center of the front view game area 5a, and the lower front center decoration 3111 (lower rear center decoration) 3122) and the four rotating decorations 3126 aligned in the left-right direction of the central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part can be seen, and are separated from the left and right ends of the row of the four rotation decorations 3126 to the left-right both outsides. The left side rotating decoration 3153 and the right side rotating decoration 3173 of the lower left side effect unit 3150 and the lower right side effect unit 3170 can be seen at the positions, and the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 can be seen above them. Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 below the game area 5a, an annular rotary operation part 302 and a pressing operation part 303 arranged in the ring can be seen as an effect operation part 301 that can be operated by the player. ing.

In this state, when the game state changes due to the game being played in the game area 5a (the first special lottery result or the second 2, depending on the result of the special lottery), the four rotating decorations 3126 aligned horizontally on the upper side of the lower front center decoration 3111 rotate, or the four rotating decorations aligned horizontally by the lower central elevating base 3121. 3126 rises together with the lower rear central decoration 3122, the four rotary decorations 3126 raised by the lower central lifting base 3121 rotate, the lower left slide driving motor of the lower left side effect unit 3150 and the lower right side A pair of left side rotating decorative body 3153 and right side rotating decorative body 3173 slides in the left and right direction by a lower right slide driving motor etc. (slide mechanism) of the production unit 3170, and the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173 rotates, and the left side rotary decorative body 3153 and the right side rotary decorative body 3173 are raised by the slide mechanism and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171. The player can see a movable effect such as arranging the sub-side rotary decoration body 3155 and the right sub-side rotary decoration body 3175 in the horizontal direction or rotating the left sub-side rotary decoration body 3155 and the right sub-side rotary decoration body 3175. Therefore, the player is made to pay attention to the central movable unit 3125 (four rotating decorations 3126), the left side rotating decoration 3153 and the right side rotating decoration 3173, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175, and the like. As well as being able to enjoy the movable production by them.

In addition, when the lower central elevating base 3121 is positioned at the lower end, the lower rear central decoration 3122 is illuminated and the lower front central decoration 3111 is illuminated to display a downward arrow or elevate the lower center. By raising the base 3121 and illuminating the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111 with a plurality of LEDs on the lower central decoration board, a large downward arrow can be illuminated, or a pair of lower left sides can be raised and lowered. By raising the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 and causing the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to emit light, a larger downward arrow can be displayed by light emission. The player can be entertained by the effect, and the player's line of sight can be guided to the downward direction of the effect operation part 301 by the illuminated downward arrow, and the player can operate the effect operation part 301. can encourage In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, and the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to participate in the player participation type effect. and entertain.

Therefore, since it is possible to perform various movable effects, light emitting effects, and player participation type effects as described above, it is possible to provide various patterns of effects to the player by appropriately combining them. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored and to make it difficult for the player to anticipate the performance pattern, it is possible to surprise the player by performing an unexpected performance. can be entertained and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, four rotating decorations 3126, a pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173, and a pair of left sub-side rotating decorations 3155 and right sub-side rotating decorations 3175 each extend in the horizontal direction. It rotates independently around the axis, and has four decoration parts 3127, 3154, and 3156 that are different from each other in the circumferential direction. It is possible to change the faces facing (decoration portion 3127, decoration portion 3154, and decoration portion 3156), and to change the appearance (decoration) in the game area 5a in various ways to entertain the player.

Also, when the rotation of the four rotating decorations 3126, the pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173, and the pair of left sub-side rotating decorations 3155 and right sub-side rotating decorations 3175 are stopped, By stopping the rotation of the decoration parts 3127, 3154, and 3156 facing the player, various messages can be sent as decorations to the player. Therefore, the combination of the decoration parts 3127, the decoration parts 3154, and the decoration parts 3156 that are stopped rotating may cause an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot game") in which the player is advantageous. By representing (expected value), four rotating decorations 3126, a pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173, and a pair of left sub-side rotating decorations are displayed according to the game state. When rotating the 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175, the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the rotation stops at the combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, and the decorative portion 3156 with higher expected value. , the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the lower rear center decorative body 3122 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a arranged vertically and capable of emitting light independently, if the plurality of light emitting regions 3122a are caused to emit light at the same time, one light can be emitted. A downward arrow can be illuminated, and if the plurality of light emitting areas 3122a are repeatedly illuminated in order from above, the player's line of sight will be directed to the downward direction of the effect operation section 301 by the light emission that flows from top to bottom. The guidance can be facilitated, and the operation of the effect operation unit 301 can be further encouraged, so that the player can reliably operate the effect operation unit 301. - 特許庁

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 301 includes the circular rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring, the rotation operation of the rotary operation unit 302 can be performed by the player. and the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, by appropriately combining the operations of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, it is possible to diversify the pattern of the player participation type production. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult to get tired of.

In addition, since the pressing operation portion 303 is arranged in the ring of the annular rotating operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 is surrounded by the rotating operation portion 302, the diameter of the rotating operation portion 302 must be increased. , and the large rotary operation unit 302 can strongly attract the player's interest. Therefore, as described above, when the player's line of sight is guided downward by the light emitting display of the downward arrow by the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111, the rotation operation part 302 (pressing operation part 303 ), the player can be strongly urged to operate the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be enjoyed. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the pressing operation part 303 is arranged in the ring of the annular rotation operation part 302, as described above, the downward arrow is displayed by the lower rear center decoration body 3122 and the lower front center decoration body 3111. When the player looks below the arrow, the rotating operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 can be seen, so that the player may be in an advantageous game state due to the rotation speed of the rotation operation part 302. At the same time, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be strongly encouraged, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be reliably performed, and the expectation for the game can be increased. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the person.

In addition, since the pressing operation portion 303 can be in a state of being lowered and a state of protruding upward, the pressing operation portion 303 can be seen to be large and conspicuous when the pressing operation portion 303 is in the protruding state. It is possible to make the player think that there is a high possibility of occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous. On the other hand, since the pressing operation part 303 is less conspicuous when the pressing operation part 303 is lowered, the player can be made to think that the probability of occurrence of an advantageous game state is low. The advance/retreat position of the can suggest the possibility (expected value) of occurrence of an advantageous game state to the player.

In addition, since it is possible to suggest the possibility (expected value) of occurrence of an advantageous game state to the player depending on the forward/backward position of the pressing operation portion 303, as described above, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the lower front Depending on whether or not the pressing operation part 303 protrudes when the downward arrow is illuminated by the central decorative body 3111 or the like, the player can feel nervous and excited, thereby heightening the player's sense of anticipation and performing the pressing operation. The pressing operation of the part 303 can be entertained, and the player is less likely to become bored, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided in the center of the front view game area 5a, in addition to the game performed in the game area 5a, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 Also, the player can be entertained, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a behind the lower movable effect unit 3100, the lower center elevating base 3121 moves together with the lower rear center decoration 3122 according to the game state. By lifting the four rotating decorations 3126, the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 move the lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172 together with the left side rotation decoration 3153 and the right side rotation decoration. When the body 3173 is raised, part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is blocked by the four rotary decorations 3126, the left side rotary decoration 3153, the right side rotary decoration 3173, etc. Since the player can be made to notice the rise of the four rotary decorations 3126, the left-side rotary decoration 3153, the right-side rotary decoration 3173, etc., the player can surely see the effects using them. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the effect image can be displayed in the center of the front view game area 5a, as described above, the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower rear center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side When the decoration body 3172 or the like illuminates a downward arrow to prompt the player to operate the lower effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image for prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301 and the effect operation unit. By displaying an effect image explaining the operation of 301, an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous and the effect operation unit 301, etc., the player can understand the effect operation unit 301. can be strongly encouraged to participate in the player-participation-type performance that operates the , and the performance operation part 301 can be easily operated, and the player-participation-type performance can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed. .

In addition, as described above, since various combinations of effects can be shown to the player, for example, the normal lower central elevating base 3121, the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower right side elevating base 3171 are lowered. From this state, when the left and right side rotary decorations 3153 and right side rotary decorations 3173 are moved toward the center in the horizontal direction by a slide mechanism such as a lower left slide drive motor and a lower right slide drive motor, the four side by side rows are displayed. A left side rotating decoration 3153 and a right side rotating decoration 3173 are positioned on both left and right sides of a row of one rotating decoration 3126, so that there are four rotating decorations 3126 and a pair of left side rotating decoration 3153 and right side rotating decoration. Since the bodies 3173 are arranged side by side, the player can be surprised and entertained.

In this state, the four rotary decorations 3126 and the pair of left side rotary decorations 3153 and right side rotary decorations 3173 are lifted by the lower central elevating base 3121, the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower right side elevating base 3171. , four rotating decorations 3126, a pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173, and a pair of left sub-side rotating decorations 3155 and right sub-side rotating decorations 3175 are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction. Since it is possible to show the player a large horizontally long decoration that traverses the game area 5a, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and I think that something good will happen. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game.

Four rotating decorations 3126, a pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173, and a pair of left sub-side rotating decorations 3155 and right sub-side rotating decorations 3175 are arranged in an appropriate combination. In the state where they are lined up, when the rotation is stopped after rotating them, the combination of each decoration part 3127, the decoration part 3154, and the decoration part 3156 makes the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not the rotation stops in a desired combination. It is possible to enjoy the rotation (movable performance) of the four rotary decorative bodies 3126, etc., and when the respective decorative parts 3127, etc. are stopped rotating in a desired combination, an advantageous game state is brought to the player. can be convinced of the occurrence of the game, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state can be heightened, thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest.

After that, a downward arrow is illuminated by the lower rear center decoration 3122 (lower front center decoration 3111), the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172, thereby directing the player's line of sight downward. It is possible to guide the player to the section 301 and prompt the player to operate the effect operation section 301 .

At this time, the possibility (expected value) of an advantageous game state occurring can be suggested by the size of the downward arrow displayed in light, so if the arrow displayed in light is small, it will continue to the player It is possible to make the player think that recovery is possible by operating the performance operation part 301, and when the light-emitting arrow is small, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous game state will occur, so that the expectation for the game can be heightened in any case. The subsequent operation of the performance operation unit 301 can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, effects are produced based on commands from the main control board 1310 provided in the main control unit 1300 of FIG. A peripheral control board 1510 included in the performance control unit 1500 of FIG. 12 is provided as a performance control board capable of controlling progress. This pachinko machine 1 further includes a peripheral data ROM board 1520 shown in FIG. 122 as a ROM board and a liquid crystal output board 1530 shown in FIG. 122 as a video signal output board. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a peripheral data ROM 1520a shown in FIG. 122 as a ROM in which control information (peripheral data) relating to effects based on game specifications is stored in advance. The liquid crystal output board 1530 can output to the effect display device 1600 as a display device a signal conforming to the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 of FIG.

Between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in FIG. 122 and a special connector provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in FIG. They are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector capable of board-to-board connection with the socket of SCN3. Between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, as a second connector different from the first connector, a special connector SCN2 plug provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in FIG. 122 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 in FIG. are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector capable of board-to-board connection by means of a socket of a special connector SCN4 provided in the .

Peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the performance by control information (peripheral data) read from peripheral data ROM board 1520, and can output video signals to liquid crystal output board 1530 in a plurality of types of methods. . Examples of the multiple types of video signal systems include the RGB system, the LVDS system, the MIPI system, the eDP system, and the clockless system. In this embodiment, as a system of a plurality of types of video signals, there are four systems: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system (four systems in total). ) is adopted.

The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 of FIG. 122 as the same board box.

In this way, the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the control information (peripheral data) related to the effects based on the game specifications is stored in advance is provided on a dedicated board called the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which is a separate board from the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device. A board for outputting a signal conforming to the format of the video signal input to 1600 is provided on a dedicated board called a liquid crystal output board 1530 which is separate from the peripheral control board 1510 . In other words, if the peripheral control board 1510 is not modified according to the control information (peripheral data) related to the performance based on the game specifications and is not manufactured anew, Therefore, it can be configured as a common board that does not depend on the game specifications or the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 . As a result, there is no need to manufacture a plurality of types of peripheral control boards 1510 according to the game specifications or the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and manufacturing only the same peripheral control board 1510 reduces costs. can contribute to Therefore, the cost of the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it has the game area 5a in which game balls can flow down, a lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the result of this lottery is the specified result. For example, in the case of winning the 14R time-saving jackpot (winning a small hit), the game ball enters the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 in FIG. As a specific game state in which a ball is possible, for example, a state in which a 14R short-time jackpot is won and a jackpot game is being executed (a small hit is won by lottery based on the reception of game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004) (including the case where the big win game continues after the end of the small win game).

In this pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) in FIG. 122 as the effect control means, the ball receiving port 3405a of the stored ball effect unit 3400 in FIG. The discharge port 3515 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. 107(a) is used as the port, the ball storage plate 3490 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. 108(a) is used as the storage means, and the storage shown in FIG. The general winning hole sensor 3001a of the ball effect unit 3400, the ball discharge plate 3505 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 of FIG. 108(a) as the releasing means, and the stored ball of the stored ball effect unit 3400 of FIG. 107(a) as the released ball detection means. A count sensor 3530 is provided.

The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) is capable of controlling the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 165(a) as a performance display device. The ball receiving opening 3405a of the stored ball effect unit 3400 is provided at a position different from the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, and is directed toward the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. A game ball that flows down can enter. The discharge port 3515 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 is provided at a position different from any of the first big winning port 2005, the second big winning port 2006, and the ball receiving port 3405a of the stored ball effect unit 3400. can be entered. The ball storage plate 3490 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 can store a game ball entering the ball receiving port 3405a of the stored ball effect unit 3400 in a specific game state. The general winning hole sensor 3001 a of the stored ball effect unit 3400 can detect game balls stored in the ball storage plate 3490 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 . The ball ejection plate 3505 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 can release the game balls stored in the ball storage plate 3490 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 toward the discharge port 3515 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 . The stored ball count sensor 3530 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 can detect game balls released by the ball discharge plate 3505 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 .

Peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) displays the effect display device of FIG. Attacker's ball output information ("AT: 45 GET") displayed in 1600 and the presentation of Fig. 165(a) as the second information corresponding to the ball stored in the ball storage plate 3490 of the stored ball presentation unit 3400 and released. It is possible to perform control to individually display the stored ball output information (“+α:8GET”) displayed on the display device 1600 in separate display areas of the effect display device 1600 .

In this way, when a game ball entering the ball receiving port 3405a of the stored ball effect unit 3400 in the specific game state is stored by the ball storage plate 3490 of the stored ball effect unit 3400, the stored game ball is stored. Since the ball discharge plate 3505 of the ball effect unit 3400 can be discharged toward the discharge port 3515 of the stored ball effect unit 3400, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big prize opening during the specific game state Not only entering the winning hole 2006, but also entering the ball receiving port 3405a of the stored ball effect unit 3400 and the discharge port 3515 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 can be given new interest. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Also, the balls stored in the ball storage plate 3490 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 are detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001a of the stored ball effect unit 3400, and the balls released by the ball discharge plate 3505 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 are stored. Since it is detected by the stored ball count sensor 3530 of the ball effect unit 3400, in the specific game state, the first information corresponding to the ball entering the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 and the stored ball output information as the second information corresponding to the balls stored and released in the ball storage plate 3490 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 are separately displayed in separate display areas of the effect display device 1600. can be displayed on

[13. example]
It goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms as long as they fall within the technical scope of the present invention.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, as a movable effect unit, a rotating decorative body 3126 that is rotatable around an axis extending in the left and right direction and in which a plurality (four) of decorative portions 3127 that are different from each other in the circumferential direction are formed is arranged in the left and right direction. Although four are provided on the same axis as shown in the figure, the present invention is not limited to this, but a rotary decoration body which is rotatable around an axis extending vertically and has a plurality of decoration parts different from each other in the circumferential direction is formed. It may be provided with at least one, at least one rotatable decorative body that can rotate around an axis extending back and forth, or at least one movable decorative body that slides in the left-right direction. .

In the above-described embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 is used for the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 that move up and down via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but it is limited to this. Instead, a clutch mechanism 3250 may be provided between a movable decoration that moves in the left-right direction, a movable decoration that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, or the like, and the drive motor.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 includes the housing case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, and the rollers 3254, but the clutch mechanism 3250 is not limited to this. and a speed converter for transmitting the reduced rotation to the output side. a first planetary gear mechanism having a non-rotatable fixed ring gear and a second planetary gear mechanism having a second sun gear coupled to the first sun gear, a second planetary gear and a rotatable rotating ring gear; , between the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism, a carrier provided with support shafts for supporting each is arranged on both sides, and in the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism, a ring At least one of the gear and the sun gear may be provided with a difference in the number of teeth so that the rotation from the drive motor is reduced and transmitted to the rotating ring gear.

In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 has the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 plugs, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has the special connector SCN3 socket, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 has the special connector SCN4 socket. However, they may be arranged so that the direction in which information or signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and correspondingly, the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. The ROM board 1520 is on the transmitting side and the peripheral control board 1510 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector as a socket) that serves as a plug, and correspondingly, the peripheral control board 1510 has a special connector (or as a plug) that serves as a socket. a special connector) can be provided. In the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal formats to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is on the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that becomes a socket), and correspondingly, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a special connector (or a plug) that becomes a socket. special connector).

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and are molded in an opaque black color. Although the peripheral control board box 1505 is composed of 1502, if the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, they may be translucent and colored. Even with this configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin, the above-described peripheral control board is mounted on the rear surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed with metal pan head screws so that they are grounded to the same ground (GND) as described above. ) can be configured to be As a result, noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can be flowed to the ground (GND) of various substrates, and the noise can be removed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in addition to the effect by the light emitting display of the pattern 2614, the movable effect is performed by the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. Although it is possible to provide various effects, the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is changed to the first LED in response to the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation part 301 being pressed. The group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d are caused to emit light in this order, and the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d emit light in this order. Then, a light emission effect such as an animation with a movement spreading outward from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 may be performed. Modifications of the light emitting display of this front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the light emission display of the light guide plate, and FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the light emission display of the light guide plate.

Specifically, as the variable display of decorative patterns in the effect display device 1600, the decorative patterns in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern ("7" in this example) to form a ready-to-win state. is reduced and displayed in the lower left part of the effect display device 1600, and the first LED group 2630a among the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light as a reach effect etc. By allowing light to enter from the specific light entrance portion 2612a, the first pattern 2614a surrounding the vicinity of the center of the front light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light, and the effect display device is visible through the portion surrounded by the first pattern 2614a. "Press the button!" is displayed on 1600 (Fig. 166(A)).

When the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds), the decorative symbols in the left column are reduced and displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display device 1600, and the decorative symbols in the right column are displayed in a reduced manner. While reducing display in the lower right part of the device 1600, after displaying the middle row of decorative patterns in the center of the effect display device 1600 so as to be visible through the part surrounded by the first pattern 2614a, the middle row of decorative patterns is displayed on the left. A pattern ("6" in this example) different from the decoration patterns in the column and the right column is temporarily stopped and displayed (FIG. 166(B)).

Next, the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 are caused to emit light in the order of the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d, and the second specific light enters the light guide plate main body 2611. By allowing light to enter from the portion 2612b, the third specific light entering portion 2612c, and the fourth specific light entering portion 2612d, the second pattern 2614b (Fig. 166(B)), the third pattern 2614c (Fig. 166(C)), The fourth pattern 2614d (FIG. 166(D)) is illuminated in order, and an animation-like illumination effect is performed in which the front light guide plate 2610 spreads outward from the center.

The display effect unit 2600 of this example includes a reflector (not shown) attached to a part of the right side of the front light guide plate 2610, and a reflector attached to the top surface of the reflector toward the right side of the front light guide plate 2610. A front light guide plate decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs 2660 that emit light are mounted, and a light guide plate decoration substrate (not shown) provided in front of the plurality of LEDs 2660 and condensing the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 2660 to increase the intensity of the light. and a condensing member 2670 . Further, on the back surface of the light guide plate main body 2611, a plurality of fine reflecting recesses 2616 are formed to reflect forward the light incident from the plurality of LEDs 2660. As shown in FIG.

Then, by causing the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 to emit light in the order of the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d, the first pattern 2614a can be obtained. , the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are illuminated in this order, and an animation-like lighting effect with a movement that spreads outward from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 is performed several times (1 After that, the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 are arranged in a first LED group 2630a, a second LED group 2630b, a third LED group 2630c, and a fourth LED group. 2630d is made to emit light, and a plurality of LEDs 2660 are made to emit light to allow light to enter the light guide plate main body 2611 from the upper right side of the light guide plate main body 2611. The punched-out pattern 2615, which is a mode in which the decorative pattern in the middle row that is visible through the center of the fourth pattern 2614d) is pierced, is made to emit light, and the decorative pattern in the middle row is cracked by being pierced by this punched-out pattern 2615. This mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 166(D)). At this time, in synchronization with the light emission of the plurality of LEDs 2660, an arrow of light is emitted toward the center of the front light guide plate 2610 to the effect display device 1600 positioned behind the light guide plate main body 2611, and penetrates the center of the pattern 2614. Such effect display is performed, and then this image disappears to assist (auxiliary display) the shooting pattern 2615 .

Specifically, the back of the shot pattern 2615 (at least part of it is sufficient to cover the area other than the back of the shot pattern 2615 so that the light travels in a direction gradually away from the vicinity of the plurality of LEDs 2660). ) is gradually displayed to complete an image that overlaps the shooting pattern 2615, and then this image is erased so that the arrows of light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 2660 form a pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a). ~Fourth pattern 2614d) is penetrated, and as a result, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d spread outward from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 in this order. It is designed to perform an effect as if the light emitting effect such as a certain animation has stopped.

In addition, the shot pattern 2615 includes a portion displayed in a higher layer and a portion displayed in a lower layer with respect to the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d). Specifically, the surface side of the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d) on the nearer side than the part stuck in the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d) of the shot pattern 2615 The part that represents a certain point (the right part of the shot-out pattern 2615 that is divided into left and right and displayed) is displayed in a higher layer than the pattern 2614 (the first pattern 2614a to the fourth pattern 2614d), and the shot-out pattern 2615, the part (divided into left and right) that is stuck in the pattern 2614 (the first pattern 2614a to the fourth pattern 2614d) and represents the back side of the pattern 2614 (the first pattern 2614a to the fourth pattern 2614d). The left part of the shot-out picture 2615 is displayed in a lower layer than the picture 2614 (the first picture 2614a to the fourth picture 2614d). As a result, a sense of perspective can be expressed based on the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d), and the light arrows emitted from the plurality of LEDs 2660 are projected onto the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d). It is possible to realistically express the state of shooting through the center of.

In addition, as described above, a condensing member 2670 is provided in front of the plurality of LEDs 2660 that emit the shot pattern 2615, and the light is condensed and enters the light guide plate main body 2611 in a state in which the intensity of the light is increased. Let On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 are not provided with the light collecting member 2670 , and the light from these is diffused and enters the light guide plate main body 2611 . Therefore, the projected pattern 2615 can be illuminated with stronger light than the pattern 2614 (the first pattern 2614a to the fourth pattern 2614d) emitted by the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640. However, the light of the shot pattern 2615 is gradually weakened as the distance from the plurality of LEDs 2660 increases (the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 2660 decreases as the reflective concave portion 2616 of the light guide plate main body 2611 moves away from the plurality of LEDs 2660). The light visible from the front of the light guide plate main body 2611 is gradually weakened by gradually decreasing the rate of forward reflection of light, etc.), and the light emission of the shot pattern 2615 also expresses perspective.

In addition, when the variation display results in a big hit, the light guide plate main body 2611 is made to emit the shot-out pattern 2615, and after displaying on the effect display device 1600 the mode in which the decorative pattern in the middle row is cracked, the left row is displayed. and the decorative pattern in the middle row, which is displayed temporarily with a different pattern ("6" in this example) from the decorative pattern in the right column, is broken (destroyed) and becomes the same pattern as the decorative patterns in the left and right columns. The big hit pattern is fixed and displayed by changing it (Fig. 167(F)). On the other hand, if the variation display results in a failure, the light guide plate main body 2611 is made to emit light through the punched-out pattern 2615, and after displaying on the production display device 1600 a mode in which the decorative pattern in the middle row is cracked, the left row is displayed. and the decorative pattern in the right column ("6" in this example) is displayed temporarily without breaking (without being destroyed) with the decorative patterns in the left and right columns. is maintained with a different pattern, and the lost pattern is determined and displayed (FIG. 167(E)).

It should be noted that not only when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, but when the ready-to-win effect is developed into a super ready-to-win effect, etc., for example, in FIG. It is possible to execute the above-described effect even when developing the super reach effect after destroying the decorative pattern in the middle row. In addition, when executing the above-described production as a ready-to-win production, the shooting pattern 2615 is emitted when it becomes a big hit or when the ready-to-win production is developed into a super ready-to-win production, etc., and when it is lost or the ready-to-win production is changed to a super ready-to-win production. In the case of deriving a failing pattern without developing into 2610, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are displayed in the order of the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d without illuminating the shot pattern 2615. After stopping the light emitting effect such as an animation with a movement that spreads outward from the center, the lost symbols may be fixed and displayed. In addition, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d spread in order from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 toward the outside without causing the shot pattern 2615 to emit light. After stopping the light emitting effect such as animation, the shooting pattern 2615 may be caused to emit light to derive a jackpot pattern, or a reverse effect may be executed in which the ready-to-win effect is developed into a super ready-to-win effect or the like.

In this way, in the light emission display of the light guide plate of the modified example, a plurality of patterns 2614 (first pattern 2614a, second pattern 2614b, third pattern 2614c, fourth pattern 2614d) and punched pattern 2615 are formed on the front light guide plate 2610. Although the same light guide plate (the front light guide plate 2610) is made to emit light, the perspective can be expressed realistically, so that the player can be surprised and unexpected, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the stored ball effect unit 3400, a plate-like ball storage plate 3490 that can reciprocate in the front-rear direction (forward and depth directions) and a front-rear direction ( A game ball is stored in the storage space 3415 using a plate-like ball ejection plate 3505 that can reciprocate forward and in the depth direction, and the stored game ball is discharged from the storage space 3415 to the ejection space 3422. It flows in and falls toward the ball discharge passage 3520 on the lower wall of the ball discharge portion 3425, passes through this ball discharge passage 3520, the discharge port 3515, and the stored ball count sensor 3530, and returns to the game area 5a. Although it was possible to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the substrate holder 1200 without being broken and recovered to the island facility of the game hall, this is done using an electromagnet instead of a physical opening and closing plate. You may do so. For example, an electromagnet in which a coil is wound around a core of magnetic material is provided in the storage ball production unit 3400, and the coil is energized when game balls are started to be stored in the storage space 3415 under the control of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 3515. By generating a magnetic force, the game balls falling one after another toward the storage space 3415 are drawn into the discharge space 3422 and stuck together. Since it is stopped and the magnetic force is no longer generated, the game balls stuck in the discharge space 3422 fall one after another toward the ball discharge passage 3520 on the lower wall of the ball discharge part 3425, and pass through this ball discharge passage 3520 to the discharge port. 3515, and can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the substrate holder 1200 without being returned to the game area 5a again through the stored ball count sensor 3530, and can be collected by the island facility of the game hall.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 is executed in the even rounds, but the stored ball effect by the stored ball effect unit 3400 is executed in the odd rounds as well. can be configured to Specifically, in the odd-numbered rounds, a stored-ball effect A related to ejection, and in the even-numbered rounds, a stored-ball effect B related to storage (a effect that precedes the stored-ball effect A), and these are alternately generated in the odd and even rounds. You can let it run. As the stored ball effect A, the above-described "stored ball release!" Further, when providing these stored-ball effects A and B, a common alternative effect may be provided for each of the stored-ball effects A and B as the above-described alternative effects. As a common alternative effect, it is possible to exemplify that the above-described alternative effect of "Pitches are increasing!" is continuously executed over odd-numbered rounds and even-numbered rounds.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the stored ball output information is erased from the performance display device 1600 at the start of the odd-numbered round. The ball information may be continuously displayed, and the history of ball output obtained by the stored ball effect unit 3400 alone from the start to the end of the 14R time-saving jackpot may be left. After it disappears due to a power outage, it only has a history of subsequent emissions.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the storage time and the discharge time in the storage ball production unit 3400 are divided into odd-numbered rounds and even-numbered rounds, but may be configured in another manner. For example, it may be composed of three rounds such as "storage round, storage round, discharge round", or may be configured to "discharge in the next round after reaching a predetermined number of reserves". If it is configured to ``discharge in the next round when the predetermined number of reserves has been reached'', the retention time and discharge time in the retention ball production unit 3400 from the start to the end of the 14R short-time jackpot will be random, and the ``retention It is possible to avoid giving the player a feeling of discomfort or disgust due to a useless discharge operation such as "discharged even though it is not discharged".

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the performance using the stored ball production unit 3400 is performed in the 14R short time jackpot. In that case, a different stored ball effect may be provided for each type of big win (prevention of boredom). In that case, alternative effects may be different or may be common.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the storage space 3415 of the ball storage section 3420 of the stored ball effect unit 3400 is configured as a box-shaped space, but may be configured as a spiral space. By making the storage space 3415 a spiral space, the number of game balls stored can be made easy to understand.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example, but the game machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko machine. game machine) or a fusion game machine that fuses a pachinko machine and a slot machine (plays a slot game using game balls). Here, a slot machine as a reel-type game machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

The slot machine 6000 comprises a front door 6002 and a main body 6004, as shown in FIG. Front door 6002 and body portion 6004 are connected to each other via hinges (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the body portion 6004 by inserting a key into a keyhole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise around this hinge.

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door 6002 , and a projecting portion projecting forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door 6002 . A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this projecting portion. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged on the lower half of the front door 6002 , and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024 . These bet buttons 6010, 6012, starting lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, accumulation settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. It is The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004 .

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 and production devices (not shown) are displayed through this display window. It is designed to be transparent. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the body portion 6004 . On the other hand, the production device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002 .

On these variable rotating bodies, translucent pattern belts printed with a plurality of patterns (for example, bells, watermelons, cherries, 7s, Vs, etc.) as pattern information are attached to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such cylindrical variable rotators are called reels or drums in game machines such as slot machines, and the output shafts of stepping motors (not shown) are connected to the respective variable rotators. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shafts of the stepping motors, a plurality of types of patterns are continuously changed from the above display window from top to bottom. It looks like

The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the above-described effect display device 1600, the above-described display effect unit 2600, various decoration boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the above-described peripheral control unit 1500. , is equipped with Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls operation of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, and the like. By performing various controls, the progress of production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above. As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate. ), the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the rear side of the circuit board by means of metal round screws. It is configured to be the ground (GND).

A predetermined number of medals as game media are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and the main control board 1310 starts the variable display of pattern information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals to a receiving tray 6026 as a game medium.

In addition, in the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls as game media inserted into the ball slot 6008', and the start lever 6014 is operated. Then, the variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, and the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls to a receiving tray 6026 as game media.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko machine 2... Outer frame 3... Door frame 4... Main body frame 5... Game board 5a... Game area 1300... Main control unit 1310... Main control board 1500... Production control unit 1501... Cover body 1502 Base body 1503 Wiring cover body 1510 Peripheral control board 1520 Peripheral data ROM board 1530 Liquid crystal output board 1600 Effect display device.

Claims (1)

In a game machine that performs a pattern variation game in which a lottery is performed based on the game ball launched into the game area entering a start hole in the game area, and the symbols are variably displayed based on the result of the lottery,
a winning game executing means for executing a predetermined winning game when a winning result is derived as a result of the symbol variation game;
A production control means for controlling the production during the winning game,
During the winning game, a unit game for opening and closing a predetermined large winning opening is performed a plurality of times,
The one unit game is set to end when N game balls enter the big winning hole,
The production control means is
an over winning effect execution means for executing an over winning effect when an over winning occurs in which N+1 game balls enter the big winning hole in one unit game;
a total display means for displaying on a predetermined effect display device the total number of prize balls generated as the game balls enter the big prize opening during the winning game;
Even if the over-winning occurs in one of the unit games, the execution of the over-winning effect is not started under a predetermined situation,
Even if the over-winning occurs in one of the unit games and the execution of the over-winning effect is not started, the prize balls generated along with the over-winning are reflected in the total display means,
moreover,
Even after the execution of the performance at the time of over winning occurs in one of the unit games and the performance at the time of over winning is started, the performance at the time of over winning is terminated in the middle under a specific situation. A game machine characterized by

Images